Home

Hitachi GR2000 User's Manual

1. 3 3 Basic Control Unit BCU The BCU comprises the modules listed in Table 3 2 Description of each board follows Table 3 2 BCU Components Device Name BCU Model Name Subcomponent Board Name Board Size GR2000 2S RM CPU 2S Special size RMP Full size 30mm wide GR2000 4S BCU S300S RM CPU 4S RMB CPU 4S Full size 50mm wide BU Snes RM I0 4S RMB IO 4S Full size 30mm wide GR2000 6H BCU H300H RM CPU HH RMB CPU HH Full size 50mm wide BCU H850H RM IO H RMB IO H Full size 30mm wide GR2000 10H BCU M300H RM CPU MH RMB CPU MH Full size 60mm wide EN RM IO H RMB IO H Full size 30mm wide GR2000 20H BCU L300H RM CPU LH RMB CPU LH Full size 50mm wide BCU L850H RM IO H RMB IO H Full size 30mm wide CSW LH CSW L3MH Special size GR2000 4 BCU S300 RM CPU S Full size 60mm wide RM IO S Full size 30mm wide GR2000 10 BCU M300 RM CPU M Full size 6 0mm wide RM IO M Full size 6 Omm wide GR2000 20 BCU L300 RM CPU L Full size 5 0mm wide RM IO L Full size 50mm wide CSW L CSW L1M Special size CSW L3M Special size 3 3 1 RM CPU 2S The RM CPU 2S is incorporated in the GR2000 2S cabinet and physically appears as Figure 3 5 RM CPU 2S Figure 3 5 RM CPU 2S Front Panel View 3 4 GR2K GA 1002 Rev 6 03 Component Details 3 3 2 RMP 2S The RMP is for GR2000 2S and physically appears as Figure 3 6 The RMP has one CONSOLE RS232C port
2. optical fiber cable Figure 3 94 shows the cable specifications which are the same as those for the OC 3c STM 1 POS MMF interface Subsection 3 10 2 6 One or more cables of the same type is recommended to be prepared for spare The boundary with ATM OC3 is used as a connector on this router s side A multimode optical fiber is used for connection with the router Figure 3 101 shows the schematic diagram This router s optical interface specifications are shown in Table 3 107 3 Directly connected between routers when connection is not possible using a cable in 4 below Graded index multimode fiber of 50 125 or 62 5 125 um 2 core SC connector core clad 1300 nm wavelength max attenuation 1 dB km router side minimum bandwidth 400 MHzekm max 2 km Boundary with network router s connector optical fiber cable with the specifications shown in Figure 3 102 One or more cab of the same type is recommended to be prepared for spare The boundary with ATM OCS3 is used as a connector on this router s side A multimode optical fiber is used for connection with the router Figure 3 102 sho the schematic diagram This router s optical interface specifications are shown i Table 3 108 For connection to box 1 core FC SC ST connector x 2 box side Graded index single mode fiber of 9 5 125 um 2 core SC connector core clad 1300 nm wavelength max router side attenuation 1
3. an optical fiber cable with the specifications shown in Figure 3 84 One or more cables of the same type is recommended to be prepared for spare Table 3 98 sho the router s optical interface specifications for l1OOBASE FX multimode connectio 2 core SC 2 core SC connector connector Graded index multimode fiber 100BASE FX 50 125 or 62 5 125 um core clad 1300 nm wavelength max attenuation 1 dB km minimum bandwidth 400 MHz km max 2 km 1000BASE SX 1000BASE LX at 500 MHzekm bandwidth 50 125 um core clad 850 nm wavelength max 550 m 1000BASE SX 1000BASE LX at 160 MHz km bandwidth 62 5 125 um core clad 1300 nm wavelength max 220 m Figure 3 84 Multimode Optical Fiber Cable Specifications for 100BASE FX requires an optical fiber cable with the specifications shown in Figure 3 85 One or more cables of the same type is recommended to be prepared for spare Table 3 99 shows the router s optical interface specifications for OOBASE FX and 1000BASE LH single mode connections 2 core SC 2 core SC connector connector Graded index single mode fiber 100BASE FX 9 5 125 um core clad 1300 nm wavelength max attenuation 0 6 dB km max 15 km or 0 3 dB km max 40 km 1000BASE LX 9 5 125 um core clad 1500 nm wavelength max 40 km 80 km 100 km 1000BASE LH 9 5 125 um core clad 1500 nm wavelength max attenuation 0 3 dB km max 70 km Boundary with network router s connector The
4. MI wo a o AJ oJ oN Table 3 5 Specifications of 8 pin RJ45 Connector on 10BASE T 100BASE TX Port Specifications Transmit TA Transmit TB Receive RA Unused UA Unused UB Receive RB Unused UC Unused UD OINI Aa AJ OJ N Note Because the interface cable is of twisted pair type make TA and TB into a pair and make RA and RB into another pair on 10BASE T the other pins can be connected to one another without particular regard to pairing or can be left open On 100BASE TX additionally make UA and UB into a pair and make UC and UD into another pair to cause termination within the RMP GR2K GA 1002 3 7 Rev 6 03 GR2000 Installation Guide 3 3 3 RM CPU 4S RMB CPU 4S RM CPU HH RMB CPU HH RM CPU MH RMB CPU MH RM CPU LH and RMB CPU LH The RM CPU 4S and RMB CPU 4S for GR2000 4S the RM CPU HH and RMB CPU HH for GR2000 6H the RM CPU MH and RMB CPU MH for GR2000 10H and the RM CPU LH and RMB CPU LH for GR2000 20H physically appear as Figure 3 7 through Figure 3 9 The RM CPU 4S the RMB CPU 4S the RM CPU HH RMB CPU HH the RM CPU MH RMB CPU MH and the RM CPU LH RMB CPU LH each have one AUX RS232C port for the console connection Table 3 5 shows the connector specifications on this port Q o y S g 5 Y a Note AUX not used in case of RM
5. mismatch Various types of POW models apply to the GR2000 device models as listed in Table 3 87 Additional information on each POW model follows Table 3 87 POW Models Model Name Components Application Device Model Power Supply Configuration Q POW S100S e One power unit GR2000 4S Single 100 or 200 VAC input 1 One powericord Dual 100 or 200 VAC input 2 POW H100H e One power unit GR2000 6H Single 100 or 200 VAC input 1 Sie Power cord Dual 100 or 200 VAC input 2 POW HDCH e One power unit GR2000 6H Single 48 or 60 VDC input 1 Dual 48 or 60 VDC input 2 POW M100H e One AC input unit GR2000 10H Single 100 VAC input 1 e Tiss DCD GT units Dual 100 VAC input 1 POW M100HA e One AC input unit GR2000 10H Single 100 VAC input 0 One power cord Dual 100 VAC input POW S100 One power unit One power cord Device Model GR2000 4 Power Supply Configuration Single 100 or 200 VAC input Dual 100 or 200 VAC input POW M100 One power unit One power cord GR2000 10 Single 100 or 200 VAC input Dual 100 or 200 VAC input POW MDC One DC power unit GR2000 10 Single 48 or 60 VDC input Dual 48 or 60 VDC input INPUT MDC One DC input unit GR2000 10 Single 48 or 60 VDC input Dual 48 or 60 VDC input POW L200 Two power units One power cord GR2000 20 Single 200 VAC input Dual 200 VAC input
6. ccccccseeeeseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeseeeeseeeseeeeseneeseeeesneeseeseneseeseseneeseeeeenene 4 58 4 6 1 Bandwidth Planning Considerations aessssesesesieeeeenneeeenrnesetennneennnnnestennneennanaeettenneetnennecnne 4 58 GR2K GA 1002 XXXV Rev 6 03 GR2000 Installation Guide 4 6 1 1 Routing Capacity of GR2000 on ATM Interface 4 58 4 6 1 2 Cellularization Overhead 2000 ceecceeecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeaaeaaeeeeeaaaaeeeeeaeaeeeteseeaeees 4 58 4 6 1 3 Possible Loss of Link with Other Device Due to Shaping eessssssssessrrieserrrresrsssrnnn 4 59 4 6 1 4 Outbound QoS on ATM Intertace eececeeeeeeeeeee eee eeeeceeeeeeeeeaeeeeeneaaaeeeeeeeaeeeeeseaaas 4 60 4 6 1 5 Relationship between Load on RP and Oof ieee eeeeneeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeaaas 4 60 4 6 1 6 Setting of VP peak col Mesci reia E EEEE RI E EEA AEE EA 4 60 4 6 2 Required Settings for ATM Connection with Other Device ssssssssssssssiessressrrssrrnssrnnnsrnsenn 4 61 4 6 2 1 ATM Connection with Hitachi NP200 and NO 4 61 4 6 2 2 ATM Connection with Hitachi AN 000 4 62 4 6 2 3 ATM Connection with Cisco Systems Houter 4 62 4 6 3 Connection To ATM SOIViCeS ess cached orria E EENE TNA EEE AAE EEA A 4 63 4 6 4 Function wise Conditions for ATM Connection 0 eeeececceeeeeneeeeeeeenneeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeenaeeeeenees 4 63 4 6 4 1 ATM Connection with IPX Devices 00 0 eeeeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeseeeeeeeeneeeeees
7. Precautions when connecting NWVX 8 Relationship between connection of cables supplied with VX 8 and LINE number NWVX 8 is supplied with the cables attached to VX 8 Connect the cables attached to VX 8 100 pin high density connector as shown below The tips of the cables attached to VX 8 have connecting sections for the same 50 pin half pitch connectors LINE 0 to LINE 7 as in NWVX 4 3 26 GR2K GA 1002 Rev 6 03 Component Details Be careful when connecting the cables attached to VX 8 to the devices that the connector insertion faces are reversed between the lower side connectors LINE 0 LINE 1 and LINE 4 LINE 5 and the upper side connectors LINE 2 LINE 3 and LINE 6 LINE 7 LINE 7 LINE LINE 3 LINE 2 LINES LINE 4 100 pin high density connecto The cables attached to VX 8 have a length of 1 m The cables y L En attached to VX 8 50 pin half pitch connector equivalent to that for NWVX 4 Es SEH connector ae Lag of ae KS The existing interface cables E 2 V 24 V 35 X 21 Z o LINE 7 LINE 6 LINE 3 LINE 2 LINE 7 Y LINE ERR G ACT T R LINE 5 LINE 4 LINE 1 LINE 0 When connecting the cables attached to VX 8 to the devices tighten the connectors lightly to the standard torque of 1 5 kgf cm by using a screw driver a small sized screw driver is recommended Be extremely careful not to over tighten which may cause the bolts to break 100 pin high dens
8. Removed base memory of BCU can be utilized for RP memory increment Resulting Memory Capacity MB Base 32 Add One MS64 96 Add One MS1 Not applicab 4 11 Table 4 11 100BASE FX Line Accommodation Router Model Max No of Lines Per NIF Per RP Per Router GR2000 2S GR2000 4S GR2000 6H GR2000 10H GR2000 20H 4 2 4 3 Line Accommodation with WAN Other than ISDN and Overload The circuit accommodation conditions indicated below apply to WAN circuits of 6Mbit s or less and 34Mbit s E3 multiplex circuits other than ISDN 6Mbit s or less WAN circuit accommodation conditions In regard to GMbit s or less WAN circuit accommodation conditions accommodation Condition Max Throughput kbps per QoS Use of WAN Protocol on Subject RP Disabled When only PPP is used non multiplex 32 500 When only PPP is used multiplex 26 000 When only frame relay is used 25 900 When PPP and frame relay are used 25 900 Enabled without When only PPP is used 14 500 kbps based minimum When only frame relay is used 14 500 EE EES When PPP and frame relay are used 14 500 Enabled with When only PPP is used 14 500 kbps based minimum bandwidth guarantee When only frame relay is used When PPP and frame relay are used Calculations are based on 128 byte packets Frame relay does not support kbps based minimum bandwidth guarantee
9. 20 a 20 i NIF side Metal fittings supplied as accessories 4 screws supplied as accessories NIF side Figure 6 44 Fixation of Cables on Large Scale Models Using Metal Fittings GR2000 10H 6 4 2 1 This subsection shows you how to connect input power cables to specific models of GR2000 2S GR2000 10H GR2000 20H GR2000 4 GR2000 10 and GR2000 20 GR2000 2S Figure 6 46 shows how to connect the input power cable to GR2000 2S which accepts only AC input 100V or 200V The steps are as follows 1 Ensure that the power switch in the rear end of the chassis is in the O out position 2 Insert the receptacle on the input power cable firmly to the plug adjacent to the power switch Rear Connect both power cables if there is a redundant power supply Power Switch Tighten the screws 48V Ground note Power Secure it in place with the cable clamp supply cable AN Note Due to the difference in level the ground connection is connected to the terminal from above Figure 6 47 shows how to connect the AC input power cable to GR2000 10H Th steps are as follows 1 Ensure that the power switch for 200V input or the breaker switch for 100V input in the front end of the chassis is in the O out position When the pow supply is duplexed redundant make sure in two positions 2 Insert the receptacle
10. ccceeeccesesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeeneeeeeeeenens 3 1 3 1 Cabinet Chassis iaaea eege eege eege 3 1 3 2 Module Characteristics E EET A E T 3 3 3 3 Basic Control Unit BCU a geesde ee 3 4 KE ee d Ee TE EE 3 4 BiB72 HME Etgen neer eege eegene ae edel eege 3 5 3 3 3 RM CPU 4S RMB CPU 4S RM CPU HH RMB CPU HH RM CPU Mhk RMB CPU MH RM CPU LH and RMB CPU UH 3 8 3 3 4 RM CPU S RM CPU M RM CPU MC2 and RM CDU 3 10 3 3 5 RM IO 4S RMB IO 4S and RMJOIH nnne een 3 11 3 3 6 RM IO S RM IO M and RM lIO L ccccecceceeesseceeeeesnneeeeescaeeeeeeeaeeeeeeseaeeeeeesnaeeeeeesseeenees 3 14 gae RMB El eege cn eaten EE ee anes EE Miaes 3 15 KEE 3 15 3 4 Routing Processor RP aeaa era E aaar aa ENEE EEN SEENEN Ee Se 3 16 JAT RP ATW RP D RP DG EE 3 16 3 42 e TEE 3 17 3 5 Network Interface Module NIF cesseeeeeeeeeeeee cence eennenneeeeeeeseeeeeeeeasneeseaeeeeeeseeeeeeseseeseeneaeenees 3 18 3 5 1 NE100 8T NE100 8TA and NEIOO STR nnne tnnnnntntnnnnennnnnne ennnen 3 19 3 5 2 NE100 4F NE100 4FS and NEIOO AESGA ccccecceceesnneeeeeseseeeeeeeaaeeeeesesaeeeeenseeeeeenens 3 20 3 5 3 NE1G 1S NE1G 1SA NE1G 1L NE1G 1LA NE1G 1LHA NE1G 1LHA8 NE1G 1LB NCIGIGBandNEIG LHBA ccesisiieni iones oneee iei a E TE E ere ea ben EeE S TERTERA 3 21 3 5 4A NWA EE 3 22 KEE AE 3 25 KEE 3 32 S557 NWIT DEE 3 33 SOOS NWMX e KEE 3 34 ISI NWI HE 3 35 Be Dili NWT E EEN 3 36 viet NWET EE ENEE 3 38 K EN EE 3 40 B
11. ccsseesseseseeeeeeeees 3 86 Optical Interface Specifications for 100BASE FX Multimode Connection In this case core clad diameter is 62 5 125 UM ccecceceseeeeeeee eee ee eee eeeeeenneneeeeaeeeseeeeeeseeseeeeneeeaeeeees 3 87 Optical Interface Specifications for 100BASE FX and 1000BASE LH Single Mode CONMOCCHIONS oricine i EES EES SEENEN SE EES 3 88 Customer Responsibility WAN Interface Cable Selection s scccceseeeeeeeeeeneeseeeeeeeeeseeeesnenseeeenes 3 90 Pin arrangement on the device side 1 430 interface 2 cccccccceseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 91 Pin arrangement on the device side primary group 1 431 interface csssseecsseeeeeeseeeeeens 3 92 Pin arrangement on the device side and DSU side primary group 1 431 interface 00 3 94 Optical Interface Specifications for OC 48c STM 16 POS Single Mode Connections 3 97 Optical Interface Specification for NWOC48 1S8 1A8 ccseececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeenseeeseeenneeeeeeeeeseeneeeenees 3 98 ATM Interface Cable Selection cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenseeneneaeeneeeseeeeeneeaseneeeeseseeeesesseneeceaeeeees 3 99 Specifications of Optical Interface ccccseseeeceeeeeeee eee eeceeeeensneeeeeeeeseeeeeeeesneeeeeeeaseeeeeeenseeeeeeeenseneneees 3 100 Specifications of Optical Interface ccccseseeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeensneeeeeeeseeeeeeensneeeeeeeaseeeeeeenseeeneeeenseeeeneees 3 101 Ch
12. cecccsseseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeneeeeeseeeneeeesneeeeeeeeseeenenenes 6 13 Desktop Installation for GR2000 4S cccccseseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeseeneeeeaseeeneeseaseeneeeseseeeneeseseeeneeeeeseeenenenss 6 13 Desktop Installation for GR2000 6H cccsccseseeeeseeeeeneeeeneeeeessaeseeeneeeeeaeeseseeeeeeeeeessaesaeeeeesseaeseseeeeenes 6 14 GR2000 10H Floor Installation ccccccsecceeeceeeeseeeeseeeeeeseeeeneeeeeeeessesaaeseeseesesaaeseeeeeesseaeseseeeeeeeeeseseanenes 6 14 GR2000 20H Floor Installation 0 cccccssecceceeeeeeteeeeseeeeeesaeeeneeeeeeeessenaeeseeeeeeesaaeseneeeesseaeseseeeesneeeseseneeeees 6 15 GR2000 10 Floor Installation 2 2 cccccceceseeeeeee eee ee cece seen nee eeee cence eee ee ees neaeaeeeeeeseeseeeseaseneaaeaeeeeeeseeeeeneees 6 15 GR2000 20 Floor Installation cccccccceeeeeseeeeeneeeeeeeeeeseaeeeneeeeesaaeseeeeeeeneaeeseseeeeeeeeeessaesaeeeeessseeseseeeeeees 6 16 GR2000 10H and GR2000 20H Screw Jack and Caster Positions cceseeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeenes 6 18 GR2000 10 Screw Jack and Caster Positions cccseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeesenenee eee seeneeeseseneeeeeeseeneeeeenseseenenss 6 19 GR2000 20 Screw Jack and Caster Positions cccseseeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeneeeeeseeeeeeseseeeeeesesneeeeeeeesesseenens 6 20 Fixation of GR2000 20 with Under Support cccscccseseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeneeeeseeeeeeeeeesseaeeneeeeeeneeseseeeeees 6 21 How To Move Floor Installed ROut
13. in parentheses indicates MMF or SMF NAOC3 8M MMF Mark at the end NAOC3 8S SMF indicates M or S AP o ES E Bo gt 0 gt 0 ES zo ATMOC 3 STM 1 gt ST O TR gt O TR OPOTR OPOTROPOTROPOTROPOTROPOTR O es 7 Opg 7200 Cep oo 7 00 Cep oo 7200 7200 Gees 7 CLINE 97 LINES 277 LINES UNE 7 LINES 77 OLINE2 977 LINE CUNEN lee Figure 3 50 NAOC3 8S and NAOC3 8M Front Panel View Switch and LED indication Table 3 75 NWOC3 8M 8S switch and function of LED indications STATUS LED Green Shows the operating Green Operable operation The NAOC12 2S and NAOC12 2M physically appear as Figure 3 51 NAOC12 2 ATM OC 12 STM 4 MMF ATM OC 12 STM OQ 7 Figure 3 51 NAOC12 2S and NAOC12 2M Front Panel View Switch and LED indication Table 3 77 NWOC12 2S NWOC12 2M switch and function of LED indications STATUS LED Green Shows the operating Green Operable operation Yellow Red condition of NIF Yellow Blocking and the board replaceable state lamp tested The NE1G 4C physically appears as Figure 3 52 1000BASE X Figure 3 52 NE1G 4C Front Panel View Switch and LED indication Table 3 79 NE1G 4C switch and function of LED indications LED Color Status Content STATUS LED Green Shows the operating Green Operable operation Yellow R
14. Even if the NIF under the RP is running it will stop Make sure the LED on the RP is yellow Remove the RP board For further information about commands see the Operations Guide Network Interface NIF Stop the operation of the GBIC to be removed Charge the following commands from the control terminal Input type maintenance close nif lt nif_no gt line lt line_no gt nif_no NIF number being the object line_no LINE number being the object 1 If necessary delete the applicable configuration defining information Confirm before the removal that the LED indication for GBIC of the line being the object has turned to yellow For details of the command refer to the Operation command reference Volume 4 3 1 Maintenance 9 1 Software Installation and Update Introduction The control software for the GR2000 is shipped pre installed While it is usually unnecessary to reinstall the software there is a complete procedure for doing so well as a procedure to update the software to another release Use update and ins procedures below when replacing the software or installing it in a new MC m Install Use this procedure to install software on a new MC All files are written to the MC The configuration and user information uses the same settings as when shipped Operation is temporarily suspended during installations or updates preventing communication through the system
15. Front Breaker switch l qi O Terminal board folololololdoldolololololo o D this connection work requires expertise the work must be conducted by qualified personnel The steps are as follows l Procure the DC input power cable in compliance with the specifications show below When the power supply is duplexed redundant procure two cables a Cord structure 3 wire a AWG No of each conductor determined by ampacity 6 a Cord diameter determined by cable clamp 27mm or smaller a Size of wire binding screw on terminal board M6 Ensure that the breaker switch in the front end of the chassis is in the O ou position When the power supply is duplexed make sure in two positions Connect each terminal wire of the input power cable firmly to the terminal bo and the ground See Figure 6 53 for the dimensions of the terminal board an the terminal wire When the power supply is duplexed repeat the connection work in two positions Fix the input power cable with the cable clamp not illustrated When the po supply is duplexed repeat the fixation in two positions 6 4 2 6 Unit mm Figure 6 53 Terminal Board Wire Dimensions for DC Input to GR2000 20H GR2000 4 Figure 6 54 shows how to connect the input power cable to GR2000 4 which accepts only AC input 100V or 200V The steps are as follows 1 Ensure that the power switch in the re
16. Hitachi Gigabit Router GR2000 Series Installation Guide GR2K GA 1002 Rev 6 03 GR2000 Installation Guide Statement on EN55022 Compliance WARNING This is a Class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures Statement on Federal Communications Commission FCC Compliance This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his her own expense The user is cautioned that changes or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void the user s authority to operate the equipment Class A Emission Statement Korea Je F328 AHH E JI oeu HHA E ASAE Ol SS FSA Oro Sez TO SE TAa HAE H Trademarks Ethernet is a product name of Xerox Corp USA Ethernet is a trademark of Fuji Xerox Co Ltd MS DOS is a registered trade
17. Memory card slot RS 232C port for console LED status indicator Figure 2 3 Front View of GR2000 4S AC Input GR2K GA 1002 Rev 6 03 GR2000 Installation Guide RS 232C port for AUX RM CPU POW1 POWO Power switch Power cord receptacle Figure 2 4 Rear View of GR2000 4S AC Input Acrylic Cover po m EES DM JO RM CPUO RM IOO RS 232C port RPO for AUX NIF1 NIFO None in case of RMB CPU RP1 LED status NIF3 NIF2 indicator RP2 NIF5 NIF4 Memory card slot RS 232C port for console Two CONSOLE amp AUX in case of RMB 10 Figure 2 5 Front View of GR2000 6H AC Input GR2K GA 1002 Rev 6 03 Product Overview Power switch POW1 POWO Power cord receptacle Figure 2 6 Rear View of GR2000 6H AC Input Placement of RM IO and NIF boards and power supply units ee LED status indicator ee 101 INPUT1 AC Memory card slot INPUTO RS 232C EE ERR J AC connector for console Two CONSOLE amp AUX in case of RMB 10 Power breaker 100V or switch 200v Power cord receptacle Two CONSOLE amp AUX in case of RMB 10 Figure 2 7 Front View of GR2000 10H with AC Input GR2K GA 1002 2 5 Rev 6 03 GR2000 Installation Guide FANS FAN1 RS 232C Placement of RM CPU and RP boards and power supply units
18. SC 2 core SC 2 core Device H kH Multimode optical fiber of 850 nm wavelength or single mode optical fiber of 1300 nm wavelength 1000BASE LH SC 2 core SC 2 core Device H kH Single mode optical fiber of 1500 nm wavelength 2 42 GR2K GA 1002 Rev 6 03 Product Overview 2 5 1 2 WAN Only special interface cables for V 24 V 35 X 21 of the serial channel are supplied by the manufacturer NIF modules share the same connector with V 24 V 35 X 21 Other interface cables are to be procured by the customer V 24 50 pin half pitch 25 pin D sub Device ee eee Special cable V 35 50 pin half pitch Se pin Tor y 33 Device Special cable X 21 50 pin half pitch 15 pin D sub Device Special cable Basic 1 430 430 a Japan Only RJ 45 RJ 45 Device ST UTP category 3 4 5 4 core twisted wire straight Primary 1 431 1 431 a Japan Only 188877 1S8877 or 1S10173 Device SST UTP category 3 4 5 4 core twisted wire straight Primary G 703 ANSI T1 403 RJ 48 RJ 48 Device OS UTP category 3 4 5 4 core twisted wire straight Secondary G 703 Japan Only BNC BNC Device SS Metal coaxial 3C 2V Tertiary G 703 G 751 BNC BNC Device eN Metal coaxial 3C 2V GR2K GA 1002 2 43 Rev 6 03 GR2000 Installation Guide OC 3c STM 1 150M POS OC 12c STM 4 600M POS MMF SC 2 core 1 core SC 2 core 1 core Multimode optical fiber OC 3c STM 1 150M POS OC 12c STM 4 600M POS OC 48c STM 16 2 4G POS SMF SC 2 core 1
19. 30mm wide SMF 15km 25Mbps ATM NA25M 1 Half size 30mm wide 90m OC 12c STM 4 ATM NAOC12 2M Full size 30mm wide MMF 500m OC 12c STM 4 ATM NAOC12 2S Full size 30mm wide SMF 15km NAOC3 8M Full size 30mm wide 2km NAOC3 8S Full size 30mm wide 15km For Japan only Product intended for the Japanese market handled only by Hitachi Japan 3 5 1 NE100 8T NE100 8TA and NE100 8TB The NE100 8T NE100 8TA and NE100 8TB physically appear as Figure 3 22 These NIFs each have eight ports for connection with 8 pin modular connectors of RJ 45 Table 3 16 shows the connector specifications 10BASE T 100BASE TX LNK ACT G LINE ERR Y T R O EEN UNE 7 LINE6 LINE5 UNE A UNE 3 UNE 3 LINE1 LINEO NE100 8T NE100 8TA STATUS Figure 3 22 NE100 8T NE100 8TA and NE100 8TB Front Panel View Table 3 16 Connector Specifications for NE100 8T NE100 8TA and NE100 8TB Specifications Transmit TA Transmit Receive Unused UA Unused Receive RB Unused UC Unused UD Note Because the interface cable is of twisted pair type make TA and TB into a pair and make RA and RB into another pair on 10BASE T the other pins can be connected to one another without particular regard to pairing or can be left open On 100BASE TX additionally make UA and UB into a pair and make UC and UD into another pair to cause termination within the NIF
20. 4 10 1 1 4 10 1 2 When you use GR2000 as an IPX router pay attention to the following Configuration Settings Setting of RIP Packet Processing By defining the configuration information you can make GR2000 as an IPX rout operate in one of the following modes for the RIP data packet processing H Dynamic routing only H Static routing only Both dynamic routing and static routing To choose an option for the above mode setting you may also need to alter the R control packet transmission interval setting per interface initially set to 1 minute To operate the router in static routing only mode for the RIP data packet processi or to suppress transmission of the RIP control packet on a WAN line because of billing you must alter these settings Setting of SAP Packet Processing 4 10 1 4 H Forward Does not respond to the watchdog packet on behalf of the client Choose an option for the above mode setting taking the billing for the line such as ISDN and the network traffic into consideration Serialization packet and diagnostic packet GR2000 handles these packets in either Forward mode or Discard mode available for setting per interface Since forwarding of these packets is usually unnecessary and increases the billing and the network traffic the initial mode setting for these packets is Discard NETBIOS packet GR2000 always discards the NETBIOS packet at reception no forwarding action Use of NetWare 4
21. FAN2 Fan 1 Fan 3 Fan 1 Fan 3 RS 2326 power main power main connector rear rear rear rear for AUX FAN3 FANI FAN2 FANO Upper fan tray Lower fan tray Figure 2 36 Rear View of GR2000 10H with AC Input GR2K GA 1002 2 25 Rev 6 03 GR2000 Installation Guide GR2000 20H LED status indicator Memory card slot RS 232C connector for console Ta Terminal block This model incorporates one BCU one RP and three POWs the BCU consists of one RM physically packaged in one RM CPU module and one RM IO module and one CSW physically packaged in one master CSW module CSW M and one sub CSW module CSW S One BCU for redundancy up to nine additional RPs and three POWSs for redundancy can be installed as options independently of one another Since one RP can handle up to two NIFs a total of twenty NIFs can be installed on this model The BCU redundancy is made available by mounting the optional RM CPU RM IO CSW M and CSW S modules in the RM CPU1 RM IO1 CSW 1M and CSW 1S slots otherwise only the base RM CPU RM IO CSW M and CSW S modules are mounted in the RM CPUO RM IOO CSW 0OM and CSW OS slots The front view is shown in Figure 2 37 the front appearance view of GR2000 20H AC input and the rear view in Figure 2 38 the rear appearance view of GR200 20H AC input For the device configuration when PS is mounted with a DC input unit and the PS mounting position please refe
22. Figure 6 15 shows GR2000 2S and GR2000 4 each instal on the desktop GR2000 2S GR2000 4 ihe oloToTorororota tol OLOLOLOLOLOLOIO Tor on Lon EI i Figure 6 17 Desktop Installation for GR2000 6H 6 3 3 Floor Installation of Chassis In this style of installation place the router chassis to meet the minimum service clearance requirements the cooling requirements and the general rules as previously mentioned at first Figure 6 18 through Figure 6 21 illustrate procured earthquake proof bolts as necessary Just locking the casters is allow as a temporary fixation during transportation but this method is not allowed for installation See Figure 6 22 through Figure 6 24 for the locations and dimensions of the screwjacks earthquake proof bolt holes and casters for GR2000 10H GR2000 2 GR2000 10 and GR2000 20 unit mm Screwjack earthquake proof bolt hole M12 Frame base opening for air Caster M12 nut pitch 1 75 a SEN fe Zem Note 1 Finish size of a screw jack Note 2 Ensure this because of necessity as air exhaust Note 3 Use the screw jack for fixing the device Do not fix it by using the caster lock When fixing it by using ancho
23. Green Shows the operable condition of the device Green blinking Operable operation Extinguished Operation not possible Including the device power supply being turned off LED Yellow Shows partial fault in the device Yellow Partial fault has been developed in the device Extinguished Occurrence of partial fault is not detected Including the device power supply being turned off LED Red Shows occurrence of fault in the device Red blinking Partial fault has occurred in the device Extinguished Operation possible Including the device power supply being turned off LAMP TEST Switch Non Lock LED test Press LED s on all the boards are lit Table 3 7 Specifications of 9 pin D sub Connector on AUX RS232C Port Specifications Request to send RS output Clear to send CS input Data set ready DR input Data terminal ready ER output Carrier detect of data channel receive CD input Called indicator Cl input Signal ground or common line SG Send data SD output M amp A o DM oi Receive data RD input GR2K GA 1002 Rev 6 03 3 9 GR2000 Installation Guide 3 3 4 RM CPU S RM CPU M RM CPU MC2 and RM CPU L The RM CPU S for GR2000 4 the RM CPU M for GR2000 10 and the RM CPU L for GR2000 20 physically appear as Figure 3 10 a
24. ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE GR2K GA 1002 xix Rev 6 03 GR2000 Installation Guide Abbreviations AAL ABR ACK AIS ANSI AS ATM BECN BGP BGP4 BGP4 BOD BPDU bps BRI BSR CATV CBR CIDR CIR CLLM CLNP CLP CNTL CRC CR LDP CSMA CD DA DCC DCE ATM Adaptation Layer Available Bit Rate ACKnowledge Authority and Format Indicator Alarm Indication Signal American National Standards Institute Automatic Protection Switching Address Resolution Protocol Autonomous System Asynchronous Transfer Mode Backward Explicit Congestion Notification Border Gateway Protocol Border Gateway Protocol 4 Multiprotocol Extensions for Border Gateway Protocol version 4 Bandwidth On Demand Bridge Protocol Data Unit bits per second Basic Rate Interface BootStrap Router Cable Television Constant Bit Rate Classless Inter Domain Routing Committed Information Rate Consolidated Link Layer Management Connectionless Network Protocol Cell Loss Priority CoNTrol Cyclic Redundancy Check Constraint Based Label Distribution Protocol Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection Destination Address Data Country Code Data Circuit terminating Equipment XX GR2K GA 1002 Rev 6 03 DDP DHCP DLCI DR DSAP D
25. Primary Japan only 200m NWMxX1 4 Half size 30mm wide Basic primary Japan only 200m NWT1 4 Half size 30mm wide Primary North America 1800m NWE1 4 Half size 30mm wide Primary Europe Asia 1800m NWE1 8 Halfsize 30mm wide MPLS support NWJ2 1U Half size 30mm wide Secondary Japan only 16m NWT3 2U Half size 30mm wide Tertiary North America 137m NWE3 1C Half size 30mm wide 34 MB Multiplexed 137m NWE3 2U Half size 30mm wide Tertiary Europe 137m OC 3c STM 1 POS NWOC3C 2M Half size 30mm wide MMF 2km NWOC83C 2S Half size 30mm wide SMF 15km NWOC3C 2MD Half size 30mm wide MPLS support 2km NWOC3C 8M Full size 30mm wide 2km NWOC83C 2SD Half size 30mm wide MPLS support 15km NWOC83C 8S Full size 30mm wide 15km OC 12c STM 4 POS NWOC12C 1S_ Full size 30mm wide 15km NWOC12 4M Full size 30mm wide 500m NWO0C12 1SD_ Full size 30mm wide MPLS supoort 15km NWOC12 4S Full size 30mm wide 15 km 3 18 GR2K GA 1002 Rev 6 03 Component Details Table 3 15 NIF Models continued OC 48c STM 16 POS NWOC48 1S Full size 30mm wide 2 km NWOC48 1S4 Full size 30mm wide 40 km NWOC48 1S8 Full size 30mm wide 80 km NWOC48 1A Full size 30mm wide 2km NWOC48 1A4_ Full size 30mm wide 40km NWOC48 1A8 Full size 30mm wide 80km ATM OC 3c STM 1 ATM NAOC3 1M Half size 30mm wide MMF 2km OC 3c STM 1 ATM NAOC3 1S Half size
26. ccceseseeceeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeesneeeeeeesseeneeeeneas 4 69 Configuration to use the device for communication between IPv6 terminals on the same link 4 70 Configuration to become object of ICMPv6 re direct message transmission ss seeeeereee 4 70 Typical Frame Relay Network with Bridge COmMection csscccceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeseneeseeeeeneneeeenees 4 77 BPDU Frame Format Supported cccccceeceeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeenneeeeeeensneeeeeeenseaeeeeenseeeeensaeeeeeseaseeeeeeenseeeneeees 4 77 Normal QoS Operations o cic cciecccetceceecchicecned htt dense chced evsec deed cncedddeeuesescubindessaueiedensceddedeasstdedonessnaubusetacbades 4 79 Failing QoS Operation with Heavy Load on RP eccssseseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeseeeeeeeesneeeeeseeseeneeeeeseeenenees 4 80 Failing QoS on ATM Interface Transmitting Inbound QoS Defined Packets onto ATM Interface ects cs cecceccececeeis speck a aa nia anrea a aaae iaa a eaaa Eda a aaaea cadtwedesdstbastuseucessteveesadeeducctedecectes 4 80 Network Configuration Eed eeg ananena aanname aaa anaana aa aaa ainaani anaana aaa 4 82 Network patterns applicable to PIM DM and PIM SM ccccsssseeeeesseeeeeeenseeeeeeeeeseeneesseneeeeenseeeenees 4 85 inapplicable network pattern in PIM DM ssss1nnnssununnunnnnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nunne nnmnnn mennene nnmnnn 4 86 Applicable PIM SM network pattern cccssecccceseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeneeeseeeen
27. connector for AUX s None in e case of Placement of fans in fan tray top view ege front front front front Fan2 Fan 4 Fan 2 Fan 4 power main power main FAN2 FANO Fan 1 Fan 3 Fan 1 Fan 3 power main power main rear rear rear rear FAN3 FANI FAN2 FANO Upper fan tray Lower fan tray Figure 2 8 Rear View of GR2000 10H with AC Input TOLUILO Ur UOT O O Placement of RM IO and NIF boards and power supply units RM PS 100 101 INPUT1 LED status DC indicator Memory PS card slot PIT of of of stot sfotgy DC RS 232C connector for console Two CONSOLE y oT amp AUX in case l of RMB 10 Terminal block Power breaker Figure 2 9 Front View of GR2000 10H with DC Input 2 6 GR2K GA 1002 Rev 6 03 Product Overview FANS FAN1 RS 232C connector for AUX None in case of RMB CPU FAN2 Figure 2 10 Rear View of GR2000 10H with DC Input front Fan2 power Fan 1 power rear FAN3 front Fan 4 main Fan 3 main rear FAN1 Upper fan tray Placement of fans in fan tray top view FAN2 Placement of RM CPU and RP boards and power supply units FANO Lower fan tray GR2K GA 1002 Rev 6 03 GR2000 Installation Guide LED statu
28. 000 1 000 000 Unused Unused Unused Unused Note 9 1 500 000 30 000 1 500 000 Unused Unused Unused Unused Note 10 2 000 000 30 000 2 000 000 Unused Unused Unused Unused Note 10 Remark Note 1 Note 2 Note 3 Note 1 Note 3 Note 1 Note 5 Note 6 Note 6 Note 7 Note 4 Note 1 If the basic control unit is duplicated it is necessary to expand the memory so as to achieve the minimum required memory amount for both the operating RM and the standby RM Note 2 The number of route entries includes the number of static routes direct routes summarized routes and default routes The maximum number of active entries is 250 000 Note 3 The number of route entries and S G entry count includes that of the alternate route Note 4 For the accommodating conditions regarding the number of VCs refer to Table 3 29 The number of VCs in iP multicast path entry count ARP static entry count ATM VC count per NIF Min guara Routing processor IP unicast PIM DVMRP module path entry am GO e RP count nterface nterface S G entry count entry memory count count count 64MB 10 000 1 000 64 or more or less or less or less 1 000 32 or less or less 96MB 250 000 DM 10 000 32 or more or less or less or less 5 000 64 or less or less 2 500 128 or less or less 1 250 256 or less or less SM 1 000 31 or less or less 10 000 32 or less or les
29. 1 Fixation of Located Router c ccccccccecceeeeeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaeaeeeeeeeeeeeeesecieeeeeeeeeeeees 6 17 6 3 3 2 Optional Fixation Using UNDER SUPPORT GR2000 20 Only cece 6 21 6 3 3 3 How To Move Floor Installed Router sssssenssseessnnnnennenssessernnnnnnnsnnssrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnn 6 22 6 3 4 Hack Mount Installation of Chassis 6 23 6 3 4 1 Rack Mount Installation of Small Scale Chassis GR2000 2S GR2000 4 GR2000 4S EIS lee BEE 6 23 6 3 4 2 Rack Mount Installation of Medium Scale Chassis GR2000 10H and GR2000 10 6 28 6 3 4 3 Rack Mount Installation of Large Scale Chassis GR2000 20H and GR2000 20 6 33 6 3 4 4 Rack mount fitiNGS ienke aiea aE A Ai 6 37 6 4 Routing and Connection of Cables ssssssssuunnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn ennnen nnmnnn 6 40 6 4 1 General Rules for Routing and Connection of Cables A 6 40 6 4 2 Connection of Input Power Cables cceccesececeeeceeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeeaeeeeeesaaeeeeeseenaeeeeeseaaees 6 44 E NEEN 6 44 042 EE LEE 6 44 642 3 G R20002B A TEEN 6 45 0 42 a GR2000 TOH a rae a AR Aaaa EE a ated tava A ATOA N i ANE ARE E 6 47 6425 OR2000 20H EE 6 49 E ET EEN 6 52 6452 7 GR2000 1 On EE 6 53 6 428 GR2000220 NEE 6 56 6 4 3 Connection of Interface Cables sssnsssenseessseeestnrr tr nsesssttttnnntnn nennst rntn nnn nnnnsnntnn nnman nnmnnn 6 58 6 4 3 1 LAN 10BASE T and IO0ODBAGETIN ttnnnnttnnnnntttnnnnnenn nenne en
30. 2 000 device 500 device Note 1 The number of entries per router varies depending on each model It corresponds to the multiplier of th number of RPs that can be implemented 4 2 13 Tag VLAN The accommodation conditions in which Tag VLAN is used are described below 4 2 13 1 Routing Processor Module RP and NIF Number of Tag VLAN Per RP Per Router GR2000 2S Tag VLAN cannot be set GR2000 4S 256 256 GR2000 6H BCU H300H 256 256 BCU H850H 256 x RP Router Model GR2000 10H BCU M300H 256 BCU M850H 256 x RP GR2000 20H BCU L300H 256 BCU L850H 256 x RP 4 2 13 3 Number of Tag VLANs to be Set in Multi Home Like an IP address Tag VLAN can be set to the multi home connection of LAN Therefore the maximum number of Tag VLANs to be set decreases when an IP address is assigned to an interface for the purpose except Tag VLAN The maximum number of Tag VLANs to be set at that time is shown in Table 4 75 conditions when utilizing the COPS function In the COPS function the accommodating conditions for the maximum flow entry number and the maximu QoS queue attribute entry are applied in order to realize the policy set from the po server by utilizing the QoS control function of the device Table 4 76 COPS agent accommodating conditions Item Description Cabinet All model RP Memory size of 96 MB or greater RM Memory size of 256 MB or greater Maximum number of interfaces t
31. 2S Per Router GR2000 4S GR2000 6H GR2000 10H GR2000 20H Note For previous versions the number of settings is 256 in all cases When setting 1024 interfaces use of RP C6 RP D6 is a prerequisite 4 2 12 8 Maximum Number of IPv6 Addresses to be Set The maximum number of IPv6 addresses that can be set using configuration Number of addresses set by configuration definition information Total number of IPv6 settable interface not T nnel interface IPv6 addresses set Number of I including tunnel interface by configuration addresses se z definition router IPv6 link local IPv6 gloval IPv6 link local IPv6 global information address address address address 256 0 0 0 256 256 0 128 0 0 128 384 Note 256 0 256 0 512 512 0 1792 0 256 2048 2560 Note Note1 Note3 Note1 Note4 Note2 Note3 Note2 Note4 Note5 an interface Note 1 The maximum number of interfaces not including a tunnel interface in which an IPv6 address can be s 32 per router irrespective of the model type Note 2 The maximum number of tunnel interfaces is 256 per router irrespective of the model type Note 3 Only one IPv6 link local address can be set to each interface Note 4 A maximum of seven IPv6 addresses can be set to each interface Note 5 The maximum number of IPv6 addresses that can be set using configuration definition information is 32 Note 6 One IPV6 lin
32. 3 Follow the other instructions illustrated in Figure 8 6 Although the figure shows the case of AC input the same instructions apply to the case of DC input except the cover mentioned above 4 If the Input Unit is for AC input attach the cover detached in step 2 above 2 Follow the instruction illustrated in Figure 8 7 DC DC unit power switch Figure 8 8 illustrates how to remove a POW from GR2000 4 The steps are as follows 1 Turn off the power switch on the POW and unplug the power cord from the POW 2 Demount the screws 3 Remove the POW Power Switch 8 2 6 1 POW for AC Input 1 Turn off the power switch on the POW and unplug the power cord from the P 2 Follow the instructions illustrated in Figure 8 9 Using the Latches POW 2 Follow the instructions illustrated in Figure 8 10 Using the latches 8 2 7 1 POW for AC Input 1 Turn off the power switch on the POW and unplug the power cord from the P 2 Follow the instructions illustrated in Figure 8 11 Adjust the projections POW 2 Follow the instructions illustrated in Figure 8 12 Power off the four pairs of circuit breakers and remove the power connection code Procedures of install remove ar
33. 4 2 8 IP Multicast Accommodation Lime 4 25 4 2 9 IPX and Bridge Accommocdaton Limits eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeaeees 4 26 4 2 10 Maximum Number of Dynamic Entries and Static Entries eeeeceeeeeeeeneeeeeeenteeeeeeees 4 26 4 2 11 MPLS IP VPN IPROUTE OG3l AA 4 27 4 2 11 1 Applicable Device and Software o ee ceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeaeeeeseeaaaeeesneeaeeeeeeeaaas 4 27 4 2 11 2 Routing Processor Modules RP and NIE 4 28 4 2 11 3 Memory Card Unit IMC 4 30 4 2 11 4 Minimum Memory Requirements ssesseseeeeeesereeserrrssrirrrssirttnsttinnnsttnrnnsttunnssttnnnnnt 4 30 4 2 11 5 Accommodating conditions for the MPLS fumcton 4 35 4 2 11 6 MPLS policy routing Tuncion eee e a E RA 4 38 4 2 11 7 Dynamic Entry and Static Entry Maximum Entry Coumt 4 38 4 2 11 8 COPS TUNCHON riei ua aaas E ec ceed ec E EEN vey a a A e a aE 4 39 4212 Py le RRE 4 39 4 2 12 1 Applied Router and Software 00 0 ecccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaaas 4 39 xxxiv GR2K GA 1002 Rev 6 03 4 2 12 2 IPv6 function restrictions regarding the routing processing mechanism RP mounting ele te ENEE EE 4 40 4 2 12 3 Minimum Required Memory ccecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeseeeaaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeaeeeeesenaees 4 41 4 2124 Number or NDP Entries EEN ENEE ite einer eared es 4 42 4 2 12 5 Number of Intertaces uk EEN 4 43 4 2 12 6 Maximum Number of Addresses to be Set in
34. 76 V 24 Interface Cable Appearance ccccceseeeeceeeeseeeeeeeeseneeseeeesueeseesuaesaeeesnneeeeeeesnaeseeseseeaeeeeeesneesenensaes 3 77 V 24 Interface Cable Specifications cccecceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeneeseeeeseeeeeesneaeeeeeesneeseeeesneeeeeeeesneeeeeenses 3 77 Relationship between connection of cables supplied with VX 8 and LINE numbet 000 3 79 Line numbers for the cables attached to NWVX 8 c seeceeseeeeeeenseeeeeeeenseeeeeeenseneeeeeeseeneeeeenseeeenenes 3 80 Precautions when using the cables attached to VX 8 scccseseeeeeseeeneeeeeseeneeeeeseeeneeseseeeneeeenseeenenenes 3 80 Precautions when using the supplied cable for NWVX 8 eccseseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeneeeeseeeeeeenseeenenenes 3 81 Size of 50 pin half pitch connector for NWVX 8 cccccccseeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeseeeeseeeeeeeeenneneeeensees 3 81 V 35 Interface Cable Appearance sccccceceeeeceeeeeeenseeeeeeeeeseeennueesenneeeseeeesnueeeeeensueeseeeeseeaeaeseeseeneeeennees 3 82 V 35 Interface Cable Specifications cccecceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeseeeesneeseeeeseeseeesneaeeeeeeseaeseeeeneeaeeeeeeneenseeensnes 3 82 X 21 Interface Cable Appearance sccccceseeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenueeseeseeeseeeesnueeseseesueeseeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeennees 3 83 X 21 Interface Cable Specifications cccecceeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeseeeeseenseeeeseeeeeeseneeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseceeeeeeeseeeseeenses 3 83 LAN Interface Cable Conn
35. 8 3 Addition Removal Of Guide Rail cccceseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseseneneeseeseeeeeeeeseseeaesesaeeneseseeneaeeesesenaeenseeenenees 8 4 Addition Removal of Input Unit AC or DC for GR2000 10H ccsccsseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeneeeeeneeeseeseeeeneneeeeas 8 8 Addition Removal of DC DC Unit for GR2000 10OH c ccceesceesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeseaeesnseeeeseneseeseeeeneeeeneas 8 9 Addition Removal of Input Unit AC or DC for GR2000 20H 2 2 cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 8 10 Addition Removal of DC DC Unit for GR2000 20H cccessceseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeneeeeeseaesenseeeenenenas 8 11 Removal of POW for GR2000 4 ceccccecceeeeeeeseeseeeeseeeaeeeacesseeesecenseeeseeenseeeseeeesaesesesenaesesaeeeeeeeeanees 8 12 Addition Removal of POW for AC Input on GR2000 10 ccsseeeeeseeseeeeseeeeeeeenaeseseeeeeeneeseneeeeeeeeees 8 13 Addition Removal of POW for DC Input on GR2000 10 ccccecesteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeensneeeeeeeeseeeeeeeneas 8 14 Addition Removal of POW for AC Input on GR2000 20 scccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeensneeeeeeeeneeeeeeenees 8 15 Addition Removal of POW for DC Input on GR2000 20 ccccsseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeneeesesaeseseeeeeeeeesenneeeeeeeees 8 16 Addition Removal of Fan Tray for GR2000 10H ccseeececeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeseeeeeeensneeeeeeeeseeneeeeneas 8 17 Addition Removal of Fan Tray for GR2000 20H ccseecceceseeeeeeeeee
36. Blocking and the board replaceable state Green blinking Under preparation Program being loaded Red Fault Extinguished Operation not possible Including the device power supply being turned off LED Green Shows the operating LED Green condition of each line Green State of transmission and reception signals in line LED Green Line operation open state LED Yellow Yellow Line fault detection 3 22 GR2K GA 1002 Rev 6 03 Component Details Table 3 22 NWVX 4 LINE LED indication Line state Detail of state Being initialized Line state indication in MMI and browser State as seen by SXMP Being initialized 3 initialize Being operated In normal operation In standby 3 active up Line fault being occurred In operation line fault active down being occurred 8 Line test Line being tested 9 test In fault In fault 4 fault Command being blocked In maintenance 7 closed Not used Configuration definition not set yet Not used unused Configuration definition not set yet 10 Configuration definitions not agreed 1 G Lights in green Y Lights in yellow Goes off 2 Meaning and value of SMNP private MIB and gr2kPhysLineOperStatus 3 The T R LED lights and goes off by H W In lighting conditions this LED lights in green when the logical value of send and receive data is
37. CMU DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS IN NO EVENT SHALL CMU BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE SRS AR 2A E E RO OR eR Oe RR OR RO ORR RR KR RR RK RK RK EK RK REE KE RRR k k k k k k k k k k kkk Some of this software has been modified by BBN Corporation and is a derivative of software developed by Carnegie Mellon University Use of the software remains subject to the original conditions set forth above SRR AR 2H E Ae 2 Ae AR AR A AR OK Oe RO RR RO RO OR RR RR KR RR RK RK RK RK RK RK REE RRR k k k k k k k k k k kkk Some of this software is Copyright 1989 by TGV Incorporated but subject to the original conditions set forth above eE AR eR A Ae AG AR RR OK OR RO RR OR RK BRK RE RK RK RK RE RK RE RR KER ERE k k k k k k k k k k k k k kkk Some of this software is Copyright 1983 1988 Regents of the University of California All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms are permitted provided that this notice is preserved and that due credit is given to the University of California at Berkeley The name of the University may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software wi
38. GR2K GA 1002 3 19 Rev 6 03 GR2000 Installation Guide 3 5 2 NE100 4F NE100 4FS and NE100 4FS4 The NE100 4F NE100 4FS and NE100 4FS4 physically appear as Figure 3 23 These NIFs each have four ports for connection with pairs of SC 2 core optical fiber connectors transmit and receive Table 3 18 shows the connector specifications 100BASE FX t ip OU Ww Ww 4 vt H LINEERRQ IX o IX IX BX 5 Slals OQ Oto ool tooo E BC E E SC ro LO LINE 3 LINE 2 LINE 1 LINE 0 Figure 3 23 NE100 4F NE100 4FS and NE100 4FS4 Front Panel View Switch and LED indication Table 3 17 NE100 4F NE100 4FS NE100 4FS4 switch and function of LED indications Nam betes Switch Status Content LED Green Shows the operating Green Operable operation Yellow Red condition of RP Yellow Blocking and cock insertion and removal possible Green blinking Under preparation being started up Red Fault Extinguished Operation not possible Including the device power supply being turned off LED Green Shows the operating Ring pulse of 100BASE FX FX middle FX long is condition of each line being established LED Red LED Green Table 3 18 Connector Specifications for NE100 4F NE100 4FS and NE100 4FS4 Connector Specifications NE100 4F SC 2 core flat connector multimode fiber 1300 nm wavelength NE100 4FS SC 2 core flat connector single mode fiber 1300 nm wavelength NE100 4
39. INE ERR o TR S LINE 3 LINE 2 LINE 1 LINE 0 Figure 3 34 NWMX1 4 Front Panel View Switch and LED indication Table 3 35 WMX 1 4 switch and function of LED indications LED Color Status Content STATUS LED Green Shows the operating Green Operable operation Yellow Red condition of NIF Yellow Blocking and the board replaceable state The NWJ1 8U physically appear as Figure 3 35 ISDN HSD 1 5Mbps JAPAN STATUS NWJ1 8U LINE3 LINE2 LINE 1 LINE7 LINE6 LINE5 LINE4 LINE 0 Figure 3 35 NWJ1 8U Front Panel View Switch and LED indication Table 3 37 NWJ1 8U switch and function of LED indications The NWT1 4 physically appears as Figure 3 36 This NIF has four ports for connection with 8 pin modular connectors of RJ 48 Table 3 38 shows the connector specifications T1 1 5Mbps INK T R Coe LosO ee TI LINE 3 LINE 2 LINE 1 LINE 0 Figure 3 36 NWT1 4 Front Panel View Switch and LED indication Table 3 39 NWT1 4 switch and function of LED indications LED Color Status Content STATUS LED Green Shows the operating Green Operable operation Yellow Red condition of NIF Yellow Blocking and the board replaceable state Green blinking Under preparation Program being State as seen by Line state Line state Detail of state SXMP indication in MMI and browser 3 Being Being initialized 3 initialize initialized 3 Being In normal
40. In standby 3 active up operated operation 3 Y Line fault being In operation line fault active down occurred being occurred 8 3 Line test Line being tested 9 test 3 In loop upon In loop upon request Looped by remote request from from counterpart 12 counterpart In fault In fault 4 fault Command In maintenance 10 closed being blocked Not used Configuration Not used unused definition not Configuration set yet definition not set yet 10 Configuration Configuration mismatch The NWE1 4 physically appears as Figure 3 37 This NIF has four ports for connection with 8 pin modular connectors of RJ 48 Table 3 44 shows the connector specifications E1 2Mbps LOOP LINK T R SS LosO RALO STATUS OOO E OOO OOO Ld NWE1 4 LINE 3 Figure 3 37 NWE1 4 Front Panel View Switch and LED indication Table 3 42 NWE1 4 switch and function of LED indications LED Color Status Content STATUS LED Green Shows the operating Green Operable operation Yellow Red condition of NIF Yellow Blocking and the board replaceable state Line state Being initialized Detail of state State as seen by SXMP Being initialized 3 Line state indication in MMI and browser initialize Being operated In normal operation In standby 3 active up Line fault being occurred In operation line
41. Installation Guide Accommodation Conditions in the Same RP and Different NIF ccss seeccssesseeeeesseeeeeeeeseeeeeeenes 4 19 Accommodation Conditions in the Same NIF and Different LineP c sccceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 19 Accommodation Conditions in the Same Lite ccssecccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenseeeeeeesneeeeeeeeseceeeeensneeeeeeeenees 4 19 Maximum Number of VEANS eege EE a ra ENEE ENEE a aeaa e Ama a aa aa eaaa aaa aaraa a adandan iaaa 4 20 Accommodating conditions for NAOC12 2M and NAOC12 2S ssssssnnnesnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn 4 20 Accommodating conditions when using the service category GFR for ATM cccessseeeeeeeees 4 20 Maximum Number of ARP Entries eeeceeeeeeeeeeeneeneeeeeeee eee eeee eee seneeaneeeeeeeeeeseeeseseeseeeseeseeeeeneees 4 21 Maximum Number of DLCls for Frame Relay Network ccsessseessseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeneesneeneeeeeseeneeeenss 4 21 Maximum Number of VCs for ATM Network cccccceceseeeeeeeeeee eee eeee senses neeeeeeeeseeeeeeseseeseseaeeeeeseeeeas 4 22 Maximum Number of Interfaces ccsceeeeeeeee cence eee ee eenee ee eeeaeee REENEN EEEEEE EEN 4 22 Maximum Number of Multihome Subnet eeccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeesneeneeseeseseneesesneeneeeeeseeeeeenes 4 22 Maximum Number of Neighbor Routers ccccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeseeeeeneeseeeesneeeseeeenneeseeseseneeeeessnnes 4 23 Relationships between
42. Interface Cables and Connectors cccceseeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeesneeseeenseeeeeeenseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeens 2 40 Chapter 3 Component Details s seeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 1 Installed Dimensions Masses and Minimum Service Clearances ccccssssssseeeseeseseeeeseseeeeenees 3 1 BGH Gormmponente eessen eeh EECH 3 4 RMP switch and function of LED indications ccccesseeeeee eee cece eee eeeneeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseaseneeeeaneeeeeeeeeees 3 6 Specifications of 9 pin D sub Connector on CONSOLE RS232C Port ee 3 7 Specifications of 8 pin RJ45 Connector on 10BASE T 100BASE TX Port eceeeeeeeeeeeneeeees 3 7 RM CPU switch and function of LED indications cecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeneeeeaeeeseeeeeeeeneeenees 3 9 Specifications of 9 pin D sub Connector on AUX RS232C Port cesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesnenseeeeenees 3 9 RM lO switch and function of LED indications cseceseeeeeee cece eee eeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeneeeeeeeees 3 12 Specifications of 9 pin D sub Connector on CONSOLE RS232C Port ccccceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 13 Specifications of 8 pin RJ45 Connector on CONSOLE 10BASE T 100BASE TX Port 3 14 BCU switch and function of LED indications ccsseseeeeeeee eee eeeeeee ene eeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseseeeeseeeeeeees 3 15 RP Models e Neie Nee ENEE Ne eee hes learn EENS 3 16 BCU switch and fu
43. It willbe 1000 device in the case of PIM SM up the MPLS network must be RP D RP DV or RP C RP CV RP A and RP A1 will not operate In addition in regard to the conditions of NIFs that support MPLS functions NIF conditions that accommodate MPLS backbone circuits are shown in Table 4 47 and NIF conditions that accommodate MPLS access circuits are shown in Table 4 51 Refer to Figure 4 7 for the location of MPLS backbone and access circuits There are non utilizable RP types depending on the mode of the MPLS protocol used These are shown in the table below Table 4 46 Protocol types in MPLS and non utilizable RP types MPLS protocol mode and IP VPN system Configuration defining mpls information protocol parameter setting RP C RP D RP CV RP DV LDP DoD CR LDP mode cr Idp O O LSP allocation system for Usable Usable each VPN LDP DU mode RFC2547 Idp unsolicited X O bis system Not usable Usable mPLS Support 1 Category NIF Name RP Backbone circuit Access circuit LAN NE100 8TA x y D DV NE1G 1LA x y D DV NE1G 1SA x K D DV NE1G 1LHA x V D DV NE1G 1LHA8 x K D DV NE100 8TB V K D DV NE1G 1LB V y D DV NE1G 1SB K V D DV NE1G 1LHBA K V D DV NE100 4F 4FS 4FS4 x V D DV NE1G 4C V K C CV WAN NWVX 4 x V D DV NWVX 8 x N D DV NWJB 8 x y D DV NWJ1 4U x V D DV NW4J1 8U x V D DV NAOC3 8M x v C CV NA
44. LX or 1000BASE LH Cable Connector SCO 2 COME E 6 59 Connection of V 24 V 35 or X 21 Cable Connector 50 pin Half Pitch cecceeeeeseeseeeeeees 6 59 Connection of BRI or PRI Cable Connector RJ 45 188877 or RA ee 6 60 Connection of BRI or PRI Cable Connector RJ 45 188877 or RA ees 6 60 Connection of OC 3c POS OC 12c POS or OC 48c POS Cable Connector SC 2 core 0 6 61 Connection of OC 3c ATM Cable Connector SC 2 COre eeeceeeeeeeeeeeneeneeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeeeneees 6 61 Connection of 25Mbps ATM Cable Connector RJ 45 ecceceeeeeeeeneeeneceaeeeeeeeeeesnesaeeeeeeseeeeeneees 6 62 Mounting Of ME eetese eeegeageeeeg ege SSES SEENEN SEENEN 6 62 GR2K GA 1002 xlvii Rev 6 03 GR2000 Installation Guide UNMOUNTING Of d 6 63 Connection of Setup COMSOLEC ceeccecceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeseeeeeeeeseseeeesseeeeeseeseeneeeeeseseeenees 6 65 Chapter 7 Starting Setting Up and Stopping ee 7 1 Sequence of Device Operation cccseseeeeceseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeesenseeeseeseeneneeeseseeeeeeseeeeeeeesseseeeesnsneeneeeeeenenees 7 1 Chapter 8 Adding and Removing Componentts cceeeeeeeeeees 8 1 Addition Removal of Full Size and Half Size Modules ecccsseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeneeeeseeeeeeeenseeenes 8 2 Addition Removal of Full Size and Half Size Dummy Panel s ccseseeeccsseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeneeensneeenees
45. Max No of Route Entries and Max No of Neighbor Routers 4 23 Relationships between Max No of Route Entries and Max No of Neighbor Peers 00 4 24 Relationships between Line Speed and Max No of Route Entries 2 ccccccsesseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 24 IP Multicast Accommodation Limits cecseeeee eee eeeee ee eeeeeee eee eeneeee eee eneee anes seen eee ensseeeee eee seeeeeeeeseeenenes 4 25 IPX ACCOMMOAtION Limite 2 20cccccceseenneeneeeee cee ceesenssnenneceeeeeeesdeeeesseannaneeceeeeeesseeeeasenanecaeeeestesenas 4 26 Bridge Accommodation Limits ceceeeeeeeeeeeee eee eeeeeee eee eeeeee see neeenee ees eeeneeseeseeeeeeseseeeneeseeseeneneenteeenenes 4 26 Maximum Number of Dynamic and Static Entries ccecccceseeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeneeseeeeeneneeeeeeseenes 4 26 Maximum Number of Dynamic and Static Entries cseeccceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeneeseeeeeeeeeseneesnenes 4 27 Applicable Models for ROUTE OSS cecseececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeseeeeseeeseeesnaeeeeenseaeeeeeesneeeeeeenseenseeenss 4 27 Protocol types in MPLS and non utilizable RP types cccsesseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeneeeeeseeeneesesneeneeeeeseeeneenes 4 28 NIF Conditions that Accommodate MPLS Backbone and Access Circuits ccsssseeeeeseeteeeeees 4 29 The minimum required BCU memory in the case of LDP DU mode RFC2547 bis system 4 31 Minimum required BCU memory amount in the ca
46. Metal Brackets ccccceseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeseeeesneeseeeeeneeseeeeeseeeeeeeeenenes 6 36 GR2000 20 Dimensions with Metal Brackets eccccsseeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeneeeeeseeeeeeseseeeneeseseeeeeeeeeseeenenenes 6 37 Use of Hand Lift in Rack Mount Installation of GR2000 20H and GR2000 20 s eeeeseeeeereees 6 39 Prohibited vs Preferred Cable Routing on Floor Installed GR2000 ssecccseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeseenes 6 41 Prohibited vs Preferred Cable Routing on Rack Mounted GR2000 eccseseeeneeseeeeeeenseesteenes 6 41 Fixation of Cables on Large Scale Models Using Metal Fittings GR2000 20 eecsesseerees 6 42 Fixation of Cables on Large Scale Models Using Metal Fittings GR2000 6H sssecesseeeees 6 42 Fixation of Cables on Large Scale Models Using Metal Fittings GR2000 10H ecceseeeee 6 43 Fixation of Cables on Large Scale Models Using Metal Fittings GR2000 20H ecceeeeeeee 6 43 Connection of AC Input Power Cable to GR2000 2S ceceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeneeseeeeeeeeeeeseneseeeeenenes 6 44 Connection of AC Input Power Cable to GR2000 10H ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeneeseeseeeeeseseeeneeeeeeeenes 6 47 Connection of DC Input Power Cable to GR2000 10H ecccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeseeneneseeseenseeeesnnes 6 48 Terminal Board Wire Dimensions for DC Input to GR2000 10H c sseseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeenseee
47. Modules NWE83 2U High speed digital non multiplex 35M 2 ports half NWE3 1C High speed digital mutiplex 34M 1 port half NWOC3C 2M SONET SDH OC 3c STM 1 150M POS 2 ports multimode fiber half NWOC3C 2MD SONET SDH OC 3c STM 1 150M POS 2 ports half multimode fiber MPLS supported NWOC3C 8M SONET SDH OC 3c STM 1 150M POS 8 ports multimode fiber 2km full NWOC3C 2S SONET SDH OC 3c STM 1 150M POS 2 ports single mode fiber half NWOC3C 2SD SONET SDH OC 3c STM 1 150M POS 2 ports single mode fiber half MPLS supported NWOC3C 8S SONET SDH OC 3c STM 1 150M POS 8 ports single mode fiber full 15km NWOC12 4M SONET SDH OC 12c STM 4 600M POS 4 ports multimode fiber full 500m NWOC12C 1S SONET SDH OC 12c STM 4 600M POS 1 port single mode fiber full NWOC12 1SD_ SONET SDH OC 12c STM 4 600M POS 1 port single mode fiber full MPLS supported NWOC12 4S SONET SDH OC 12c STM 4 600M POS 4 ports single mode fiber full 15km NWOC48 1S SONET SDH OC 48c STM 16 2 4G POS 1 port single mode fiber 2km full NWOC48 1S4 SONET SDH OC 48c STM 16 2 4G POS 1 port single mode fiber full 40km NWOC48 1S8 SONET SDH OC 48c STM 16 2 4G POS 1 port single mode fiber full 80km NWOC48 1A SONET SDH OC 48c STM 16 2 4G POS 1 port single mode fiber full 2km APS supported NWOC48 1A4 SONET SDH OC 48c STM 16 2 4G POS 1 port single mode fiber full 40km APS supported NWOC48 1A8 SONET SDH OC 48c STM 1
48. OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE tcpd Copyright 1995 by Wietse Venema All rights reserved Some individual files may be covered by other copyrights This material was originally written and compiled by Wietse Venema at Eindhoven University of Technology The Netherlands in 1990 1991 1992 1993 1994 and 1995 Redistribution and use in source and binary forms are permitted provided that this entire copyright notice is duplicated in all such copies This software is provided as is and without any expressed or implied warranties including without limitation the implied warranties of merchantibility and fitness for any particular purpose tcpdump Copyright 1989 Carnegie Mellon University All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms are permitted provided that the above copyright notice and this paragraph are duplicated in all such forms and that any documentation advertising materials and other materials related to such distribution and use acknowledge that the software was developed by Carnegie Mellon University The name of the University may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific
49. Speed 25 Don t care Port OAM Cell None Forwarding Port ILMI Disable Execution default traffic cbr vbr abr cbr Traffic Service CBR 4 6 4 4 6 4 1 4 6 4 2 This information is for Japan only If you need this information contact our sale representative Function wise Conditions for ATM Connection ATM Connection with IPX Devices Ensure that the IPX device connected over the ATM network satisfies the followin conditions Hitachi s multiprotocol routers NP200 and NP220 satisfy these conditions H Connection based on PVC is available E The encapsulation method for IPX packets uses LLC SNAP in compliance wit RFC1483 ATM Connection with Bridge Devices Ensure that the Bridge device e g bridge router bridge or LAN switch connect over the ATM network satisfies the following conditions Hitachi s multiprotocol routers NP200 and NP220 satisfy these conditions When you connect GR2000 with devices other than GR2000 based on the IP routing pay attention to the following 4 7 1 Interface Address in Point to Point Line Connection GR2000 regards the route information in the point to point line connection direct connection as two host routes This method is also adopted in Hitachi routers NP220 NP200 and NP150 Accordingly when a network only consists of these routing devices you can assign interface addresses to the point to point line as follows Be careful not to use this method
50. Table 4 15 E3 Multiplex Line Accommodation per RP D at Line Speed of 34 Mbps Condition Max Throughput kbps per 4 2 4 5 Table 4 17 WAN ISDN Line Accommodation Limit Condition QoS Max Throughput kbps per RP Must be disabled 12 288 Calculations are based on 128 byte packets Line Accommodation with WAN Overload Line accommodation with WAN overload is limited as shown in Table 4 18 For the multilink protocol type the line accommodation varies with the overload configurations illustrated in Figure 4 2 and the resulting accommodations are shown in Table 4 19 through Table 4 22 Table 4 18 WAN Overload Line Accommodation Limits Protocol Type Throughput at Inter RP Overload Throughput at Intra RP Overload Full Duplex Half Duplex Full Duplex Half Duplex Number of Links per Bundle Throughput pps No of Bundles per RP 128 byte Convers 2 1 384 13 3 1 128 7 4 920 5 5 860 4 6 750 3 Note An overhead of 12 bytes is to be added to each link Table 4 20 Multilink Overload Line Accommodation Limit Inter RP Half Duplex 64kbps Bundled Number of Links per Bundle Throughput pps No of Bundles per RP 128 byte Conversi 2 2 600 24 3 1 824 12 4 1 700 9 5 1 680 7 connected using the same bus Accommodate in the range where the total of each line speed does not exceed 600M bits s NIF1 is not restricted by a bus and each NIF can be accommodated to the
51. WAN interface cables except those supplied as fittings V 24 V 35 and X 21 cables are customer responsibilities Depending on the type of WAN and the distance as shown in Figure 3 86 and Table 3 100 an appropriate WAN interface cable needs to be procured Boundary with network Router Customer setup WAN setup a E a yas GIE 2 r a E A NW4B 8 or li i Basic 1 430 1 430 a i Modular li DSU k rosette l Primary 1 431 p d H 431 a DSU i ee es O Primary 1 431 fee H 1 431 a DSU d NWT1 4 or lj ae NWE1 4 H L 0 g Primary G703 ANSI NWT1 8 NWE1 8 iP 11 403 DSU d EEN NWJ2 1U HIE C Secondary G703 connection Length m Interface ate x T Cable Type From To I mm Min Max Basic 1 430 Router Modular 6 16 1 8 UTP 1 480 a rosette Primary 1 431 Router Modular 6 16 1 4 UTP 1 431 a rosette DSU Primary T1 E1 Router DSU 1800 1 4 UTP Secondary Router DSU 16 2 Metal coaxial G 703 Tertiary T3 E3 Router DSU 6 137 2 or 4 Metal coaxial OC 3c STM 1 Router Device 6 long 0 5 2k 1 Multimode optical fiber POS MMF Box 4 short OC 3c STM 1 Router Device 8 long 0 5 15k 1 Single mode optical fiber POS SMF DSU 5 short OC 12c STM 4 Router Device 8 long 0 5 15k 1 Single mo
52. a DTE attached cable on X 21 interface an HN F9355 77H cable 5m is applicable This direct connection allows the line speed of 768 kbps or less and the maximum cable length of 16 m between the DCE and the DTE Line speed range XR bit S Cable length limitation 9 6 lt X lt 1024 Note 1 16m or shorter Coordinating cable HN F9355 72H 5m Cables other than 5m are coordinated individually 1024 lt X lt 1536 10m or shorter HN F9355 72H 5m Cables other than 5m are coordinated individually 1536 lt X lt 6144 Note 2 1m or shorter Coordinated individually Note 1 It is 2 4 lt x lt 1024 in NWVX 8 Note 2 It is 1536 lt x lt 2048 in NWVX 8 This section provides detailed specifications and recommended products for the customer responsibility interface cables For the V 24 V 35 X 21 cables provided as fittings see Subsection 3 9 3 E Note For direct connection between the router and the other end device make sure of the connector type on the other end device which may require a different cable k Note The customer responsibility interface cables include multimode and single mode optical fiber cables Since the optical fiber cable may take various routes e g outdoor pipes ducts troughs bitts on utility poles and buildings pipeshafts racks and garrets special attention has to be paid for the physical structure of the optical fiber cables to be procu
53. aaa a Ra aai 3 72 3 06 9 POW S100 EE 3 73 S610 POW M 100 and POW E200 sare ninia e rA A EAE eE Bee 3 73 SD POW MDC and RONDE menpea a E S EE ERR 3 74 3 7 Memory Module MS64 MS128 and MS2bel sseeeeRREREEERREREEEEEEREEREEEEEEEEREEEEEEEEREEREEEEEEREEEEEEEER Een 3 74 3 8 Memory Card Module MC30 and MC64 cccceceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeensesneneaceaeeeseeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeesees 3 75 CA a e DEE 3 75 STAC MOUP Ower C Od EE 3 75 39 2 WAN Loop CONNECCION tee a DEE EE ale a ee eebe e 3 76 3 9 3 V 24 V 35 and X 21 Interface Cables 2 0 0 0 ccccccccceesesscecececeeeescececesensseseeeeessenseseeeseanaeseeeees 3 76 3 9 3 1 M24 Interface Cable miniset iaiia i aadi iakaat 3 77 3 9 3 2 V35 Interface Gable oinnes eaa ae aaaea aa Ea a aa E Ee 3 82 38 9 9 9 X21 Interface Ca Dle E aa dees Eden een iiaia 3 83 3 10 Customer Responsibility Interface Cables ccsecccceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeneeeeeseeeeeeensnneeeeeenneeneeeeess 3 84 3 1031 EAN Interface Cables ciesicecctedecet aaeain a a aaa Regeet ebaldeetilendiees ith 3 85 3 10 1 1 UTP Cable for 10BASE T and 1IOOBAGE IN 3 86 3 10 1 2 Multimode Optical Fiber Cable for 1OOBASE FX 1000BASE SX and 1000BASE LX ET 3 87 3 10 1 3 Single Mode Optical Fiber for 1OOBASE FX 1000BASE LX and 1000BASE LH 3 88 3 10 2 WAN Interface Cables 040i ee EA due ek et al Ae ee he GEN beets 3 89 3 10 2 1 UTP Cable for Basic A20orLA20 al ee eeceeee eee eene eee ee eeeeee tenes eeeeeneeeeeeeeee
54. and RM IO modules in the RM CPU1 and RM IO1 slots otherwise only the base RM CPU and RM IO modules are mounted in the RM CPUO and RM IOO slots Similarly the power supply redundancy is made available by mounting the optional POW in the POW1 slot otherwise only the base POW is mounted in the POWO slot The front view is shown in Figure 2 33 the front appearance view of GR2000 6H and the rear view in Figure 2 34 the rear appearance view of GR2000 6H GR2K GA 1002 2 23 Rev 6 03 GR2000 Installation Guide Acrylic Cover gt RM CPU1 C RM IO1 RM CPUO d RM IOO RS 232C port fol RPO for AUX 9 NIF1 NIFO SG RP1 LED status i NIF3 NIF2 indicator H RP2 ell 2s CH Jegen ee a ess NIF5 NIF4 Memory card slot RS 232C port for console The RP NIF number starts from 0 1 on the upper tier being different from 4S Figure 2 33 Front View of GR2000 6H Mounting position of power supply unit POW1 POWO Power switch Power cord receptacle Figure 2 34 Rear View of GR2000 6H GR2000 10H This model incorporates one BCU one RP and two POWs the BCU consists of one RM and one CSW and is physically packaged in one RM CPU module and one RM IO module One BCU for redundancy up to four additional RPs and two POWs for redundancy can be installed as options independently o
55. arise decreasing the cooling efficienc this router Should such adverse effects take place on this router malfunction or failure may result Take necessary measures e g place these devices duly apart from each ot or put a partition between them so that their airflows do not interfere with each other Cooling Requirements for Rack Mount Installation To guarantee the airflow through the router for cooling secure enough space between the router and the structure of the rack as shown below If not malfunct or failure may result H GR2000 4 GR2000 2S GR2000 4S and GR2000 6H 50 mm or greater each from the left side and the right side of the chassis H GR2000 10H GR2000 20H GR2000 10 and GR2000 20 50 mm or greater each from the left side and the right side of the chassis and 300 mm or great 6 1 6 1 1 Hardware Installatio Unpacking The GR2000 and any accessories will be delivered with a packing list In each unpacking process be sure to confirm the contents with the packing list Chassis GR2000 2S When unpacking this model see Figure 6 1 Make sure that all the parts in the bi Caution This model weighs up to 25 kg Handle with care Work with another person when you handle this model Vinyl bag or air cap Router chassis Carton packing list are obtained from the cargo bi Caution This model weighs up to 55 kg Handle with care Work with another person when you handle this model
56. bearing guide rail accessory of the rack on the rack Make sure that the guide rail can sustain the mass of the chassis max 120kg per GR2000 10H and max 85kg per GR2000 10 Align the guide rails to support the bottom of the chassis and if another router is to be mounted above this router to secure a space of 1U 44 45 mm or more on top of the router when mounted 30 600 70 Rear Front Interface Gable Guide rail Chassis Power cable 19 inch rack Metal bracket accessory of l Approx dimensions H x W x D 750mm including caster x 430mm x 600mm 30 600 70 70 600 30 Front Front Interface cable Power cable Interface cable Guide rail e RK SH H i Each POW is long and heavy approx 520mm deep 8 kg Removing Removing Hold the handle and support the Fan Tray POW bottom GR2000 20 unit mm The steps are as follows l Prepare the 19 inch rack considering the dimensions of the router chassis The inner depth of the rack must accommodate the depth of the router chassis plus minimum cable clearance 30mm for interface cables and 70m for power cables and minimum airway clearance 30mm For GR2000 20 and GR2000 20 depth 600 mm the inner depth of the rack must be at le 700mm If a rack with a door is selected make sure that the distance between the chassis front end and the inner surfac
57. being In operation line fault active down occurred being occurred 8 3 Line test Line being tested 9 test 3 Y In loop upon In loop upon request looped by rem request from from counterpart 12 counterpart In fault In fault 4 fault Command In maintenance 10 closed being blocked 5 Not used Configuration Not used unused definition not Configuration set yet definition not set yet 10 Configuration Configuration mismatch The NWE3 2U physically appears as Figure 3 40 This NIF has two ports for connection with pairs of BNC connectors receive and transmit Table 3 53 shows the connector specifications UNCHANNELIZED E3 34Mbps LINE ERROQ OLOOP R T OO R L O ACTQ OLos OO D TRO ORAI Figure 3 40 NWE3 2U Front Panel View NWE3 2U Switch and LED indication Table 3 51 NWE3 2U switch and function of LED indications LED Color Status Content STATUS LED Green Shows the operating Green Operable operation Yellow Red condition of NIF Yellow Blocking and the board replaceable state LINE Line state ERR a Ge dn ene Line state Detail of state sate SS by indication in M 1 and browse Se 3 Ss Ss Being Being initialized 3 initialize initialized 3 Y Y Being In normal In standby 3 active up operated operation Y 3 Y Y Line fault being In operati
58. connecting cable to NWVX 8 is used Cable for DCE be prepared by the client DCE side DCE side GR2000 i WS PC etc Connection of connector to connector Supplied cable 1m is not included Cable length 5 m Cable length X m in the length restrictions i 10 m or less for greater than P Cable length 16 mor less 1024 kbit s shows the cable specifications When connecting to a TA or modem on the V 35 interface an HN F9355 72H cable 5m or its option for 1m to 16m request for price quotation basis is applicable The latter is required when the line speed is 6 Mbps As illustrated the other end connector has a skirt for protection of pin bends Ensure the shape of the mating receptacle Line speed range XR bit S Cable length limitation Coordinating cable 9 6 lt X lt 1024 16m or shorter HN F9355 72H 5m Cables other than 5m are coordinated individually 1024 lt X lt 1536 10m or shorter HN F9355 72H 5m Cables other than 5m are coordinated individually 1536 lt X lt 6144 1m or shorter Coordinated individually Note 1 It is 1536 lt x lt 2048 in NWVX 8 shows the cable specifications When connecting to a TA or modem on the X 21 interface an HN F9355 73H cab 5m or its option for 1m to 16m request for price quotation basis is applicable T latter is required when the line speed is 6 Mbps When using the own router as a DCE and connecting to
59. core 1 core core clad OC 3c STM 1 NAOC3 1M Multimode optical fiber of 50 125 or 62 5 0 5 2k SC 2 core 1 core ATM MMF NAOC3 8M 125 mm core clad OC 3c STM 1 NAOC3 1S Single mode optical fiber of 10 125 um 0 5 15k SC 2 core 1 core ATM SMF NAOC3 8S core clad GR2K GA 1002 2 41 Rev 6 03 GR2000 Installation Guide Table 2 10 Specifications of Interface Cables and Connectors continued 25Mbps ATM NA25M 1 UTP category 3 4 5 4 core 8 core 2 pair 90 RJ 45 straight OC 12c STM 4 NAOC12 2M Multimode optical fiber of 50 125 or 62 5 0 5 500 SC 2 core 1 core ATM MMF 125 um cre clad OC 12c STM 4 NAOC12 2S Single mode optical fiber of 10 125 um 0 5 1 5k_ SC 2 core 1 core ATM SMF cre clad Used only in Japan Pay attention to the tertiary group cable Connect NWVX 8 with the cables supplied separately For details refer to Facility plan and Hardware Operation Manual 2 5 1 1 LAN Illustrated below are the LAN interface cables and connectors All these interface cables are to be procured by the customer 10BASE T RJ 45 RJ 45 Device SS UTP category 3 4 5 4 core 2 pair straight 100BASE TX RJ 45 RJ 45 Device _ e UTP category 5 8 core 4 pair straight 100BASE FX SC 2 core SC 2 core Multimode or single mode optical fiber of 1300 nm wavelength 1000BASE SX SC 2 core SC 2 core Multimode optical fiber of 850 or 1300 nm wavelength 1000BASE LX
60. dB km max 15 km Boundary with network router s connector Figure 3 103 shows the cable specifications 8 pole modular 8 pole modular connector RJ 45 connector RJ 45 l t d UTP category 3 4 5 4 core 8 core 2 pair straight Recommended model name Hitachi UTP Cable CS5E PCTA P8 P8 JM cord length in brackets Boundary with network router s connector Figure 3 103 UTP Cable Specifications for 25Mbps ATM 4 1 Precautions in Planning Installatio Prerequisites Local Setup Console and Remote Operation Terminal Figure 4 1 illustrates the local setup console and remote operation terminals to b procured by the user Description of each type follows Console For the operation thereafter a console or a remote operation terminal is required The console shall use a terminal connected to RS232C and the remote operation terminal shall use a terminal connected via IP network to remotely log in with this device by using telnet or rlogin or log in connected through the web browser In addition it is coordinated also with the network management by using the SNMP manager via the IP network The connection patterns of the operation terminal are shown in Fig 27 1 The connection patterns of the operation terminal and the conditions for the remote operation terminal connection port and the operation terminal are shown in Table 27 2 The operation terminal conditions Table 4 1 The operation terminal conditions Term
61. duplication 2 4 2 Basic Control Unit BCU The components of the BCU vary depending on the GR2000 models as shown below Table 2 3 Abbreviation for BCU model names and configuration of each device Device cabinet 5 a ee Configuration GR2000 2S Built in cabinet RM CPU 2S board RMP boards to handle RM IO RP A1 10BASE T 100BASE TX 4 boards are built in GR2000 4S BDU S300S RM CPU 4S board RM IO 4S board GR2000 6H BCU H300H RM CPU HH board RM IO H board Built in 4x4 cross bar switch BCU H850H RMB CPU HH board RMB IO H board Built in 4x4 cross bar switch GR2K GA 1002 2 29 Rev 6 03 GR2000 Installation Guide Table 2 3 Abbreviation for BCU model names and configuration of each device g R Abbreviation for a i Device cabinet BCU model name Configuration BCU M300H RM CPU MH board RM IO H board Built in 6x6 cross bar switch BCU M850H RMB CPU MH board RMB IO H board Built in 6x6 cross bar switch GR2000 20H BCU L300H RM CPU LH board RM IO H board BCU L850H RMB CPU LH board RMB IO H board 2 4 2 1 RM CPU Each RM CPU contains one K6 2 300 MHz processor and two main memory slots Each memory slot accepts a 64 MB memory module MS64 and a 128 MB memory module MS128 thus being able to configure up to 256 MB of memory In addition each RM CPU of GR2000 4S GR2000 6H GR2000 10H and GR2000 20H includes one RS 232C AUX port 2 4 2 2 RM I0 Each RM IO has one RS232 cons
62. fault active down occurred being occurred 8 G 3 4 Line test Line being tested 9 test In fault In fault 4 fault Command In maintenance 10 closed being blocked Not used Configuration Not used unused definition not Configuration set yet definition not set yet 10 Configuration Configuration mismatch definitions not agreed 1 G Lights in green Y Lights in yellow Goes off definitions not agreed 11 The NWTS3 2U physically appears as Figure 3 39 This NIF has two ports for connection with pairs of BNC connectors receive and transmit Table 3 50 shows the connector specifications UNCHANNELIZED T3 45Mbps LINE ERR O OLOOP S OO R T Sees OO8 OO T R OQ ORAI OO LINE 1 LINE 0 STATUS NWT3 2U Figure 3 39 NWT3 2U Front Panel View Switch and LED indication Table 3 48 NWT3 2U switch and function of LED indications LED Color Status Content STATUS LED Green Shows the operating Green Operable operation Yellow Red condition of NIF Yellow Blocking and the board replaceable state LINE Line state ERR a Ge dn ene Line state Detail of state sate SS by indication in M 1 and browse Se 3 Ss Ss Being Being initialized 3 initialize initialized 3 Being In normal In standby 3 active up operated operation Y 3 Y Y Line fault
63. fault being occurred 8 active down Line test Line being tested 9 test In fault In fault 4 fault Command being blocked In maintenance 10 closed Not used Configuration definition not set yet Not used Configuration definition not set yet 10 unused Configuration definitions not agreed 1 G Lights in green Y Lights in yellow Goes off Configuration definitions not agreed 11 mismatch The NWJ2 1U physically appears as Figure 3 38 This NIF has one port for connection with a pair of BNC connectors receive and transmit Table 3 47 shows the connector specifications HSD 6 3Mbps UNCHANNELIZED JAPAN T LINE ERR Q ORAI R O ACTOOLOS C C TROOAIS LINE 0 STATUS NWJ2 1U Figure 3 38 NWJ2 1U Front Panel View Switch and LED indication Table 3 45 NW2J 1U switch and function of LED indications LED Color Status Content STATUS LED Green Shows the operating Green Operable operation Yellow Red condition of NIF Yellow Blocking and the board replaceable state LINE Line state an ERR a oh a e Line state Detail of state SR See by indication in M 1 and browse 3 z SS Being Being initialized 3 initialize initialized G 3 Y Being In normal In standby 3 active up operated operation Y 3 Y Y Y Line fault being In operation line
64. from the RP to perform packet relay ARP and ICMP processing NIF control protocol handling on the data link layers for PPP frame relay and ATM statistics and fault handling etc The GR2000 6H GR2000 10H and GR2000 20H use the load distribution method to allow the use of more than one RP simultaneously The RP contains a packet forwarding engine implemented by an ASIC a routing QoS and filtering table lookup engine implemented by an ASIC that performs hardware based routing table lookup and a filtering table and QoS table lookup This hardware based method allows faster IP forwarding and QoS services The RP uses software for network layer handling for PPP frame relay ATM etc IPX packet relay on bridges statistics and fault handling The RP has two types of RPs RP Al and RP D for low to high speed line control and RP C for ultrahigh speed line control Table 2 4 shows the specifications for each RP The GR2000 2S contains an RP Al equivalent GR2K GA 1002 2 31 Rev 6 03 GR2000 Installation Guide RP name Table 2 4 RP Specifications Specification RP A1 Backup QoS Diff serv and multicasting GR2000 2S Not Packet transfer rate Approx 1M packets s mountable MS 32MB standard 96MB max RP DV RP DV is a routing processor to which the label stack H W transfer function has GR2000 48S 2S been enhanced Not mountable Packet transfer rate Approx 4M packets s GR2000 10 20
65. i 10 m or less for greater than P Cable length 16 mor less 1024 kbit s LINE 0 to 7 50 pin half pitch connectors on the tips of the conversion cables are the connectors to connect V 24 X 21 V 35 which require dedicated cables to match each interface Specification of the pins including the cable is shown below the same as that for NWVX 4U Table 3 28 Connector Specifications for NWVX 8 Pin Assignment for V 24 WAN 25 pin Male Connection Router 50 pin Specifications 2 9 SD send data output 3 10 RD receive data input 4 15 RS request to send output 5 16 CS clear to send input 6 12 DR date set ready input 7 34 SG signal ground 8 30 CD carrier detect of data channel receive input 15 22 ST2 send element timing 2 input 17 32 RT receive element timing input 18 13 LLB output 20 11 ER data terminal ready output WAN 15 pin Male Connection Router 50 Pin Specifications 5 2 A J indication input 12 4 I B 4 26 R A J receive input 11 __ 28 R B 8 34 G signal ground 6 50 S A a signal element timing input 13 48 S B 3 1 C A control output 10 3 C B 2 25 T A transmit output 9 27 T B 4 Note When the router side is X21DTE connect the 45 46 5 6 pins for the 50 pin half pitch connecto on
66. in Figure 5 7 Figure 5 8 shows its redundant power feeding counterpart I I 48V or LN 60V dc T T NEMA 5 15R convenience 100 Vac outlet single phase KE 50 60 Hz Ground Power distribution panel I CB Circuit breaker LP Terminal plug 6H 10 10H 20 M5 20H M6 for device input power HUB W 1 for non redundant input The branch circuit to be installed on the customer s power distribution panel must be a circuit breaker CB in compliance with the requirements in Table 5 5 In addition follow the guidelines below Do not connect other electrical devices to this branch circuit m Total load of the branch circuit must be under 80 90 percent of the rating m Prepare a backup circuit to the power distribution panel based on possible device additions in future Locate the device as close as possible to the power distribution panel for ease of maintenance Table 5 5 Requirements for Circuit Breaker on Power Distribution Panel Router Model AC Input DC Input Phase Rating Phase Rating GR2000 2S 15AT Single 100 V ac 15A 15AT Single 200 V ac 15A GR2000 4S 15AT Single 100V ac 15A 15AT Single 200V ac 15A Depending on the ac supply voltage and ampacity the receptacle to mate the inp power plug must meet the requirements in Table 5 6 Table 5 6 Receptacle Types for AC Input Nominal Input Receptacle Applicable e i Voltage V ac Type Fa
67. in case of RMB 10 NIF NIE NIEINIEINIE CSW RM CSW RM NIF NIF NIF NIF NIF 1 131 15 7 9 0 le 1 101 11 13 15 17 19 Terminal block NIF NIF NIF NIF NIF NIF NIF NIF NIF NIF ol2 4l6l8 10 12 14 16 18 PS INPUTO DC PS INPUT1 DC Power breaker Figure 2 13 Front View of GR2000 20H with DC Input 2 10 GR2K GA 1002 Rev 6 03 Product Overview FAN3 FAN1 RS 232C connector for AUX None in case of RMB CPU FAN2 Figure 2 14 Rear View of GR2000 20H with DC Input DC DC DC DC DC DC DC DC DC DC DC DC 5 4 3 2 1 0 Placement of RM CPU and RP boards and power supply units Placement of fans in fan tray top view front front Fan 2 Fan 4 power main Fan 1 Fan3 power main rear rear FAN3 FAN Upper fan tray front Fan 2 power Fan 1 power rear FAN2 front Fan 4 main Fan 3 main rear FANO Lower fan tray GR2K GA 1002 Rev 6 03 2 11 GR2000 Installation Guide Acrylic Cover ae Cl Drot Hee ad rE Memory card slot LED status indicator Figur
68. incorporates one BCU one RP and one POW the BCU consists of one RM physically packaged in one RM CPU module and one RM IO module Up to four NIFs can be installed on this model Power supply redundancy is made available by mounting one optional POW in the POW1 slot otherwise only the base POW is mounted in the POWO slot BCU redundancy available on higher models is not available on this model The front view is shown in Figure 2 31 the front appearance view of GR2000 4S and the rear view in Figure 2 32 the rear appearance view of GR200 4S 2 22 GR2K GA 1002 Rev 6 03 Product Overview Memory card slot RS 232C port for console LED status indicator Mounting position of RMP IO RP and NIF board Figure 2 31 Front View of GR2000 4S RS 232C port for AUX Mounting position of RM CPU board and power supply unit device integrated type RM CPU POW1 POWO Power switch Power cord receptacle Figure 2 32 Rear View of GR2000 4S GR2000 6H This model incorporates one BCU one RP and one POW the BCU consists of one RM and one CSW and is physically packaged in one RM CPU module and one RM IO module One BCU for redundancy up to two additional RPs and one POW for redundancy can be installed as options independently of one another Since one RP can handle up to two NIFs a total of six NIFs can be installed on this model The BCU redundancy is made available by mounting the optional RM CPU
69. kg 264 Ibs a GR2000 20 Approx 190 kg 418 lbs a GR2000 20H Approx 160 kg 352 Ibs GR2K GA 1002 GA Rev 6 03 GR2000 Installation Guide Other Instructions Cleaning m Clean the device only with a clean dry cloth or use a cloth that has been dampened with water or another pH neutral liquid and thoroughly wrung out Do not use volatile organic solutions such as benzene or paint thinner chemicals chemically treated cloths or pesticides which may deform discolor or damage the device Storage Unplug the power cable from the outlet when the device is not used for long periods XXX GR2K GA 1002 Rev 6 03 Table of Contents Chapter 1 General Information ccesseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeseeeneeneeeeess 1 1 1 1 Purpose and Organization of This Manual ccccsseeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseseneeeesseeneeseeseeeneneneneeneneens 1 1 1 2 Outline of Installation Process ccccesseeeeesseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeenseceeeeensneeeeeeenseceeeeeesseneeesedseeeeeeenseeeeeneees 1 2 Chapter 2 Product Overview cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeesseeeeseeeenes 2 1 KANN EE 2 1 2 2 Physical App arance eege EEN 2 2 2 3 Device Config TC EE 2 20 24 Device ET 2 28 2 4 1 Cabinet Network Processor Unit Chassis 2 29 2 4 2 Basic Control Unit DCH 2 29 2A 2 RMEG PU winna a aa aa a aaea anaa eaa eaa i ea dee r aeaa 2 30 24 212 RMO Aaea e a a a Aa e a a a E a eai 2 30 2 4 2
70. memory amount for both the operating RM and the standby RM Note 2 The minimum required memory to operate the MPLS and the BGP4 simultaneously is 256 MB for BCU 128 MB for RP If the VPN function of RFC2547 bis system is used it is necessary to operate the BGP4 simultaneously because the route information of VPN is carried through the MPLS backbone net by using the BG Note 3 The number of route entries includes that of the static route direct route summarization route default ro Note 4 The number of route entries includes that of the alternate route Note 5 For the relationship between the number of route entries and the number of adjacent router adjacent pe Routing Min band MPLS protocol processor IPv4 unicast IPv4 multicast ATM VC count guarantee with mode module RP path entry count path entry count per NIF kbit s memory designated LDP DU Mode 64MB or more 2 000 or less unused 256 or less no 128MB 125 000 or less unused 2 048 or less yes LDP DoD 64MB or more 2 000 or less unused 256 or less no CR LDP Mode 128MB 90 000 or less unused 2 048 or less yes Note 1 Note 4 Note 2 Note 2 Note 3 1 It is necessary to increase the memory of all RPs installed in the device 2 It is necessary to increase memory so that the minimum required memory is provided only for the relevant RPs the memory required for each RP differs 3 Min band guarantee with kbit s designated is a QoS queue at
71. on QoS Control ssennssnnssnnnrsnnrrnnnennnnennnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nunne nnnnn ennen nnne nnee 4 79 4 12 1 Relationship Between Load on RP and Oo 4 79 4 12 2 Transmitting Inbound QoS Defined Packets onto ATM Interface 0 00 0 eeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeees 4 80 4 13 Caution on Use of Tag VLAN cccceceeeeeeeeeneeseeeeeeeeeseeeenneeseeeeseeeeeeeeneeeeeeesuaeseeeaseeaeeeeenseenseeennees 4 81 4 13 1 Connection with LAN SWItch ec eeeeee eee eenee ee eee A O ERRA 4 81 AVS VEAN ty PO neieiet a a e aidi aiita awian eege 4 81 4 13 1 2 Tag VLAN Setting EE 4 81 4 13 1 3 Packets That Can be Relayed 00 eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeneeeeeeeeeeeees 4 81 4 43 1 A VEANGID EE 4 81 4 13 2 Connection with Terminal DC 4 82 4 13 21 Tag VLAN SUPPOMt ensia A ene deeded needed eee 4 82 4 13 2 52 Layer 2 REA 2 deet eta EE acl eed 4 82 4 14 Precautions for using IP multicast cccceeeeee cece eeeee ee eee nee eee enseeeeee eee seeeeeenseeeeeeensseeeeeeensesenenens 4 83 4 14 1 Multicast relay oosina aa a iaa dedecvteseusedevesdesceliervess 4 83 44411 Common to prototo e a eet ee Gee 4 83 4 14 1 2 When using PIM DM and PIM SM eeeccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeneaaees 4 83 4 14 1 3 When using DYMRP eceania ninian or E A AT a i aa 4 83 4 14 1 4 When using DIMMER ENEE 4 83 4 14 2 Redundant route route switching due to impediment AA 4 84 41421 When usin
72. permission notice appear in all copies THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS AND INTERNET SOFTWARE CONSORTIUM DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS IN NO EVENT SHALL INTERNET SOFTWARE CONSORTIUM BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL DIRECT INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE SIGMASOFT TH LOCKERT Copyright 1994 SigmaSoft Th Lockert lt tholo sigmasoft com gt All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILIT
73. personnel 8 4 1 Addition Removal of Main Memory Module for RM BCU To add or remove the main memory module for RM BCU follow the instructions illustrated in Figure 8 16 Main Memory Installed connector To add or remove the main memory module for RP follow the instructions illustra in Figure 8 17 Installed connector on or off After completing this procedure start up duplex mode from your terminal by entering config modeset duplex CR because duplex mode is automatically detected and power turned on unless you k Note When adding a standby BCU with power off the above command is unnecessary change duplex mode to simplex mode or press the EMA SUPRESS button 8 5 1 2 Removing a BCU The procedure is different depending on the purpose of removing a BCU one is termination of duplex mode and the other is temporary maintenance stop For termination of duplex mode To quit duplex mode and remove the standby BCU change the operating mode first From your terminal enter config modeset simplex CR 8 5 2 1 8 5 2 2 8 5 3 Adding an RP To add an RP l 2 Mount the RP board in an empty RP slot To start the RP enter the following command from your terminal config maintenance free rp lt rp_no gt CR Removing an RP To remove an RP 1 2 3 4 Stop the RP by entering the following command config maintenance close rp lt rp_no gt CR
74. prior written permission GR2K GA 1002 xiii Rev 6 03 GR2000 Installation Guide THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE Copyright 1990 1991 1993 1994 John Robert LoVerso All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms are permitted provided that the above copyright notice and this paragraph are duplicated in all such forms and that any documentation advertising materials and other materials related to such distribution and use acknowledge that the software was developed by John Robert LoVerso THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE This implementation has been influenced by the CMU SNMP release by Steve Waldbusser However this shares no code with that system Additional ASN 1 insight gained from Marshall T Rose s _The_Open_Book_ Earlier forms of this implementation were derived and or inspired by an awk script originally written by C Philip Wood of LANL but later heavily modified by John Robert LoVerso The copyright notice for that work is preserved below even though it may not rightly apply to this file This started out as a very simple program but the incremental decoding in
75. s ecccseseeeeeeseseeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeneeseseeeneneeeseeenenens 3 63 NEW1 8 switch and function of LED indication cccceseeeeceseeeeeeseeeeeneeeeeeeeeneeseeeeeneeseeseeenenseeeesees 3 64 Connector Specification for NWE1 8 ccceseeeneeseseeeeeeeseeeeeesesenseeeeeseeseeeeeeseseneesesseeeeeseeseseeeeenseeenees 3 64 Se OR EE 3 65 Locations for Components of POW M100H and POW M100HA cccssseeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeenseeeeenens 3 68 Locations for Components of POW M200H and POW M200HA cccssseeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeenseeetenens 3 69 Locations for Components of POW MDCH and POW MDCHA 0ccccseseeeeesseeeeeeseeneeeeeseeenenensennens 3 70 Locations for Components of POW L200H and POW L200HA ecccseseeeeeeseeeneeeeseesteeeenteeenenens 3 71 Locations for Components of POW LDCH and POW LDCHA ccccsesseeeeesseeeesseeeeeeeeseeeeeeneeenens 3 72 V 24 V 35 X 21 Interface Cable Selection ssc eeeeeeeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeceeeeee een seneeneeeeeceeseeeeeeseseeseeeaeeeees 3 76 Restrictions on cable length according to line SPC d 1 cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseseeeneeseeeeeneeseeseseneeseeeesees 3 78 LAN Interface Cable Selection ccccseeeccsseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeesesneneeeseneneeeeseeeneeeensesenenseeenaeeesseseeeenseeeeeens 3 85 Pin arrangement on the device side 1OMBASE 100MBASE interface c ccssceesssesseeeeeeees 3 86 Pin arrangement on the device side 1OMBASE 100MBASE interface
76. the power supply is duplexed Figure 2 26 Figure 2 27 and Figure 2 28 show the block diagrams of the GR2000 models A brief explanation of each model follows 2 20 GR2K GA 1002 Rev 6 03 Product Overview RMP RM RP EE Bunn i f 140M 100M Ethernet 4 ports L Option for redundant configuration CT Option for redundant configuration Figure 2 28 Block Diagram of GR2000 6H GR2000 10H and GR2000 20H GR2K GA 1002 2 21 Rev 6 03 GR2000 Installation Guide GR2000 2S The GR2000 2S incorporates one BCU with one 10M 100M Ethernet 4 ports and one POW The BCU consists of one RMP equivalent of RM and RP physically packaged in one RM CPU module and one RMP module with one 10M 100M Ethernet 4 ports Up to two NIFs can be installed on the GR2000 2S Power supply redundancy is not available on this model The front view is shown in Fig 2 10 the front appearance view of GR2000 2S and the rear view in Fig 2 11 the rear appearance view of GR2000 2S Memory card slot LED status indicator FAN Mounting position of RMP and NIF board RMP DE RS 232C port for console Integrated Ethernet port 10M 100M x 4 Figure 2 29 Front View of GR2000 2S FAN1 Power switch Mounting position of RM CPU and power supply unit device integrated type Power cord receptacle Figure 2 30 Rear View of GR2000 2S GR2000 4S This model
77. the POW L200 The dimensions are approximate in mm and the drawing is not to scale Figure 3 65 illustrates the DC power unit of the POW MDC and the POW LDC The dimensions are approximate in mm and the drawing is not to scale Figure 3 67 commonly illustrates the MC30 a 30 M byte memory card module an the MC64 a 64 M byte memory card module The dimensions are in mm and the drawing is not to scale Part Name Figure 3 67 MC30 and MC64 Flash Memory Card Module 3 9 Fittings A loop connector for the WAN line is suppled by each router model Figure 3 69 shows this WAN Loop Connector 50 Pin Half Pitch Connector Figure 3 69 WAN Loop Connector 3 9 3 V 24 V 35 and X 21 Interface Cables These interface cables are supplied as fittings while the other interface cables are the customer responsibilities Depending on the type of connection indirect or direct and the distance as shown in Figure 3 70 and Table 3 93 a cable with an appropriate part number needs to be specified Subsection 3 9 3 1 through The appearance of the V 24 interface cable is as shown in Figure 3 71 Figure 3 72 shows the cable specifications When connecting to a TA or modem on the V 24 interface an HN F9355 71H cabl 5m its option for 1m to 16m request for price quotation basis or an HN F9355 71F cable 8m is applicable The HN F9355 71F is required for connection to a 28 8kbps modem When usin
78. the router side Table 3 30 Connector Specifications for NWVX 8 Pin Assignment for V 35 WAN 35 pin Male Router 50 Pin Specifications The NWJB 8 physically appears as Figure 3 32 This NIF has eight ports for connection with 8 pin modular connectors of RJ 45 in compliance with IS8877 Table 3 32 shows the connector specifications ISDN HSD I 64k 128kbps JAPAN ACT G LINE ERR Y _T R STATUS 9 LINE7 LINE6 LINE5 LINE4 LINE3 LINE2 LINE1 LINEO Figure 3 32 NWJB 8 Front Panel View Switch and LED indication Table 3 31 NWJB 8 switch and function of LED indications The NWJ1 4U physically appears as Figure 3 33 This NIF has four ports for connection with 8 pin modular connectors of RJ 45 in compliance with IS8877 Table 3 34 shows the connector specifications ISDN HSD 1 5Mbps UNCHANNELIZED JAPAN LINE ERR O ae va OC TR O O O O LINE 3 LINE 2 LINE 1 LINE 0 2D 2 Z deg 3 33 NWJ1 4U Front Panel View Switch and LED indication Table 3 33 NWJ1 4U switch and function of LED indications LED Color Status Content STATUS LED Green Shows the operating Green Operable operation Yellow Red condition of NIF Yellow Blocking and the board replaceable state The NWMX1 4 physically appears as Figure 3 34 This NIF has four ports for connection with 8 pin modular connectors of RJ 45 in compliance with IS8877 Table 3 36 shows the connector specifications EH APAN e 1 5Mbps J APAN
79. way of example but not limitation STANFORD MAKES NO REPRESENTATION OR WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR THAT THE USE OF THE LICENSED PROGRAM WILL NOT INFRINGE ANY PATENTS COPYRIGHTS TRADEMARKS OR OTHER RIGHTS STANFORD shall not be held liable for any liability nor for any direct indirect or consequential damages with respect to any claim by LICENSEE or any third party on account of or arising from this Agreement or use of the Program 6 This agreement shall be construed interpreted and applied in accordance with the State of California and any legal action arising out of this Agreement or use of the Program shall be filed in a court in the State of California 7 Nothing in this Agreement shall be construed as conferring rights to use in advertising publicity or otherwise any trademark or the name of Stanford The mrouted program is COPYRIGHT 1989 by The Board of Trustees of Leland Stanford Junior University PIM sparse mode pimd Copyright 1998 by the University of Southern California All rights reserved Permission to use copy modify and distribute this software and its documentation in source and binary forms for lawful purposes and without fee is hereby granted provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both the copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation and that any documentation advertising materials and other
80. with any other routing device m You can assign the same network IP address or subnetwork IP address to multiple point to point lines m You can assign two different network IP addresses or subnetwork IP addresses to both ends of a point to point line routes Cisco Systems routers treat such information as one network route This k Note Although GR2000 treats the route information of a point to point line as two host causes a discrepancy in the route information advertised by the routing protocol 4 7 6 When forwarding RIP packets with this device on point to point circuits destinat addresses are sent by unicast addresses interface address of the other device I addition when receiving RIP packets from point to point circuits they are receiv with a unicast address one s own interface address or limited broadcast address address of all 1 s as the destination address With Cisco routers the RIP packet destination address is different because of the broadcast address setting Do not make the ip broadcast address setting if th device is connected to Cisco routers Cautions When Using OSPF on Point to Point Circuits When using OSPF on point to point circuits with this device the HelloInterval default value becomes 10 seconds and the Routerdeadinterval default value becom 40 seconds With the devices shown in Table 4 84 the HelloInterval default valu becomes 40 seconds and the Routerdeadinterval default value beco
81. 0 ccssseccesseeeceeeeseeeeeeeesseeeeeeenees 4 62 Examples of devices in which the Hellolnterval value and the Routerdeadinterval are different WIth OSPF seess ege EENS 4 65 List of IPv6 function supports by Software processing c ssseeeecesesseeeeeeseeeeeeseseeeneeseseeeeeeeeeseeenenens 4 72 Range of values in VPN ID cessseceeessnneeeeeeesneeeeeenseeeeeeeeesueeeeeenseaaeeeensneeeeeeeeseaeeeesnsseeeeesenseseeeeenseeeeens 4 90 Contents of the TLV USC vivs scsecccceccsscccceessseecetiesesceccetessecderreseaccarresetbeereecetecedtrecebecddresicccuvivesstbectecencert es 4 91 Chapter 5 Installation Site Conditions ccs ceeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 1 Temperature and Humidity Requirement cccseccccceseeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeneeseeeneeseesesneneseeeeseenseeeesnees 5 1 IT gd Ee UE 5 2 Input Power RequirementS AC IN put ccceseeecceeeseeeeee eee seeeeeeenseeeeeeensneeeeeenseeeeeeensneeneeeeaseeeeeneeseeeeeeees 5 6 Input Power RequirementS DC Input ceseeecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeseaeeeeensseeeensneenseeenseceeeeeneas 5 6 Requirements for Circuit Breaker on Power Distribution Panel ccccccesesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 10 Receptacle Types for AC Input cccccsseeccesseseeeeeeseseeeeeeseeeneeeessenneeeesseseneesenseeneeeenseseeeeeesseeeeeeenseeenaees 5 11 Typical Power Consumption and Heat Dissipation Figures ccccceseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeee
82. 0 The LED lights in green when lighting conditions are detected irrespective of the line state Configuration definitions mismatch not agreed 11 Table 3 23 Connector Specifications for NWVX 4 Pin Assignment for V 24 WAN 25 pin Male Connection Router 50 pin Specifications SD send data output receive data input RD RS request to send output CS clear to send input date set ready input DR SG signal ground CD carrier detect of data channel receive input ST2 send element timing 2 input RT receive element timing input LLB output ER data terminal ready output RLB output Ci call indicator input ST1 send element timing 1 output Ti test indicator input FG frame ground Connection is required if the router is DTE Separate contact is required if it is DCE GR2K GA 1002 Rev 6 03 3 23 GR2000 Installation Guide Table 3 24 Connector Specifications for NWVX 4 Pin Assignment for X 21 WAN 15 pin Male Connection Router 50 Pin Specifications A indication input I B J S receive input R B G signal ground S A Sg signal element timing input B A S control output B T A transmit output A T B Connection Router 50 Pin Connection is require
83. 1 m When any code other than character is used to represent the server name in the SAP packet SAP static routing according to that code is disabled 4 10 2 2 4 10 2 3 calculated by the following formula n 3 50 n number of RIP entries stored Example When n 50 1 packet When n 1000 maximum 20 packets Model Traffic of Periodic SAP Packets The number of periodic SAP packets 480 bytes per packet broadcast at one time calculated by the following formula n 7 n number of SAP entries stored Example When n 7 1 packet When n 1000 maximum 143 packets Traffic of Periodic RIP and Periodic SAP Packets on Group Defined Interface When IPX is defined on an interface where multiple VCs or multiple DLCIs are grouped periodic RIP and periodic SAP packets are broadcast to all the VCs or DL in the group Consequently it is cautioned that an inadvertent addition of IPX definition to an existing grouped interface may cause unnecessary traffic to flow through the interface if the group includes a VC or DLCI not using protocols othe than IP To avoid such occurrence of unnecessary traffic it is advised to separate group into two one comprising VCs or DLCIs to use IPX and the other not usin 4 11 1 4 11 1 1 When you use the bridge function of GR2000 pay attention to the following Protocol and Topology Restrictions Spanning Tree Protocol When you use the spanning tree protocol ensure that all the bridge
84. 1 April 2000 Conversion to HICAM format All 2 May 2000 Edit Pass prior to release All A June 2000 Final Release All B August 2000 Edit by ESD All C November 2000 Release 3 00 All 3 02 January 2001 Release 3 02 All 4 00 May 2001 Release 4 00 All Preface This manual provides the installation instructions for the GR2000 Gigabit Router The manual is intended for personnel involved in installation planning and setting up of the product Information contained in this manual is subject to change without prior notice GR2K GA 1002 iii Rev 6 03 GR2000 Installation Guide Acknowledgments GateD Copyright 1995 1996 1997 1998 The Regents of the University of Michigan All rights reserved SNMP Gate Daemon was originated and developed through release 3 0 by Cornell University and its collaborators SHR RA AR oe Ae 2 Ae AR AR A RO eR OR RR ORR ORR RR RR RR RK BERK RE RK ARERR RRR KR k k k k k k k k k kkk Copyright 1988 1996 by Carnegie Mellon University All Rights Reserved Permission to use copy modify and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation and that the name of CMU not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific written prior permission
85. 100 8TA Yes No Yes 2 4 6 10 NE100 8TB Yes No Yes 0 4 6 10 NE100 4F Yes No Yes 1 2 6 10 NE100 4FS Yes No Yes 1 2 6 10 NE100 4FS4 Yes No Yes 1 2 6 10 Full NE1G 1S Yes No Yes 0 1 3 5 NE1G 1SA Yes No Yes 0 1 3 5 NE1G 1SB Yes No Yes 0 1 3 5 NE1G 1L Yes No Yes 0 1 3 5 NwW0C12 1SD INO INO 1eS U 1 3 10 NWOC 12 4S No Yes No 0 0 3 5 10 NWOC48 1S No Yes No 0 0 3 5 10 NWOC 48 184 No Yes No 0 0 3 5 10 NWOC 48 188 No Yes No 0 0 3 5 10 NWOC48 1A No Yes No 0 0 3 5 10 NWOC48 1A4 No Yes No 0 0 3 5 10 NWOC48 1A8 No Yes No 0 0 3 5 10 Full NAOC12 2M No Yes No 0 0 3 5 10 NAOC12 2S No Yes No 0 0 3 5 10 NAOC3 8M No Yes No 0 0 3 5 10 NAOC3 8S No Yes No 0 0 3 5 10 ATM Half NAOC3 1M Yes No Yes 1 2 6 10 20 NAOC3 1S Yes No Yes 1 2 6 10 20 NA25M 1 Yes No Yes 1 2 6 10 20 When an NIF is installed with not applicable RP type a log message is output and the NIF s initial setup is not activated Also assumes its equivalent integrated in GR2000 2S if applicable as RP A1 GR2000 4H GR2000 10H GR2000 6H GR2000 20H Increment unit GR2000 2S BCU S300S BCU S850S BCU H300H BCU H850H BCU M300H BCU M850H BCU L300H BCU L850H Base 64MB 128M 256MB Add One MS64 128MB Add One MS128 256MB Add Two MS128s and 256MB det Table 4 9 RP Memory Increment by RP Type RP Type RP A1 or equivalent Remove Base 64MB
86. 1995 1996 Yoichi Shinoda Yoshitaka Tokugawa WIDE Project Wildboar Project and Foretune All rights reserved This code has been contributed to Berkeley Software Design Inc by the Wildboar Project and its contributors The Berkeley Software Design Inc software License Agreement specifies the terms and conditions for redistribution THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE WILDBOAR PROJECT AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE WILDBOAR PROJECT OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY GR2K GA 1002 ix Rev 6 03 GR2000 Installation Guide THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE MARTIN BIRGMEIER Copyright 1993 Martin Birgmeier All rights reserved You may redistribute unmodified or modified versions of this source code provided that the above copyright notice and this and the following conditions are retained This software is provided as is and comes with no
87. 20 000 160 000 120 000 160 000 120 000 160 000 120 000 160 000 120 000 120 000 160 000 1 No of Higher Peers means the number of peers that notifies the own router of the maximum number of route entries 2 Includes alternate routes 3 Max No of Neighbor Peers means the number of peers to which the own router sends the The number of interfaces and routing table entries capable of defining IP multica are shown in Table 4 40 This device supports PIM DM PIM SM and DVMRP as multicast routing protocols Also the PIM DM and DVMRP protocols do not oper simultaneously Table 4 40 IP Multicast Accommodation Limits Item No of PIM DM multicast interface Max Limit 256 per router No of DVMRP multicast interface 32 per router No of PIM SM multicast interface 31 per router No of PIM DM DVMRP multicast routing entries S G S Source IP address G Group address 10 000 per router No of PIM SM multicast routing entries S G and G S Source IP address G Group address 1000 per router kkk No of IGMP member groups 256 per router No of neighbor multicast routers 256 per router kkkk No of static member groups 128 per router No of DVMPP tunnel interface Tunneling interface can be defined only with DVMRP 32 per router Table 4 41 and Table 4 42 show th
88. 3 GR2000 Installation Guide 2 4 12 Table 2 9 The temperature surveillance threshold value for RMB CPU and RMB IO board Temperature Significance threshold value Threshold value name Caution for low Board temperature is lower than the operation guarantee temperature caution temperature for this device Caution for high Board temperature is higher than the operation guarantee temperature caution temperature for this device Warning for high Board temperature is lower than the operation guarantee temperature critical temperature specified in NEBS 1 level 3 High temperature Board temperature is higher than the absolute rated anomaly fault temperature 1 Network Equipment Building System Requirements Software The enhanced models of the GR2000 GR2000 2S GR2000 4S GR2000 6H GR2000 10H and GR2000 20H use the same routing software called Routing Software 2 ROUTE OS2 The conventional models of GR2000 GR2000 4 GR2000 10 and GR2000 20 use the same routing software called Routing Software ROUTE OS With GR2000 6H GR2000 10H and GR2000 20H IP VPN function utilizing the MPLS function and MPLS can be used by applying the basic plus expansion software Routing software3 ROUTE OS3 in place of ROUTE OS2 or ROUTE OS This is in addition to the function provided by the common software Routing software2 ROUTE OS2 or Routing software ROUTE OS Moreover in GR2000 2S GR2000 4
89. 3 RMB GPU niea tates Mae ed ens ee a a ates ei eee AE 2 30 2 4 24 SRMBAlO NEE 2 30 2 4 2 5 Grossbar Switch CSW a 235 cccdiceetactldenconi anders a EES teens 2 31 2 4 3 Routing Processor Module RP Ieier a E T NR A 2 31 2 4 4 Network Interface Module NIF eeececceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeseaaeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeneeeeeeeenes 2 34 2 4 5 Power Supply Unit DO 2 36 2 4 6 GPU Fair hacen BEA a EE 2 36 2 4 7 Main Storage Card IMS oroia i TO EA AE AT R 2 36 2 4 8 Flash Memory Card MO anneanne or E A AA aAa Na 2 36 249 Interface Cables oranan anas keranda EES Ee HEANAS ARa KPEE k EASA DISA EENS 2 37 2 4 1 0 NIE accessory GBIG et ies degen a E E O A E E AEE dees 2 37 2 4 11 Temperature monitoring SENSOF sssssssssssssrnessssrteesttnetninnesttenneeetnnaeeettnneesttnneeetennneetennneeeenna 2 37 Deke NEEN 2 38 SOUEEN 2 40 2 5 1 Interface Cables and Connectors eee eeeeaeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaea 2 40 ZA LAN E diate ee Wd ic tee es Rate ede ide 2 42 252 WAN Anata ded ee ya eel ieee ee al eee 2 43 SD AT aasa beat eaters decten te E a a aa dete tie aaa a aaaea ae Ca aaee aE aen 2 44 2 5 2 Network CONMMOGTONS sesdeneseet dese aT E EE TEE R AAEE REEE iS 2 44 2 5 2 1 LAN CGopnnechon nensisa pisia A ea E ai 2 44 29 22 WAN Connection aane ana i a ina ein ai a at a eerie 2 45 2 522 AIM ele TEE 2 45 GR2K GA 1002 xxxi Rev 6 03 GR2000 Installation Guide Chapter 3 Component Details
90. 4 40 Mbps Two slots must be used to install full size NIFs The load on each slot depends on whether it is located receiving side or sending side Determine the line capacity according to Table 4 24 below For example if NE1G 1LA is installed in NIFO NIF1 the line speed allowed for NIF2 and NIF3 will be as follows Table 4 25 shows the accommodation conditions in the same RP in Ethernet Table 4 26 shows the accommodation conditions in the same NIF and Table 4 27 shows those in the same line H Functions that can be operated by Ethernet are as follows VRRP MPLS Tag VLAN IPv4 Note1 Tag VLAN IPv6 Note1 bridge protoco multihome IP protocol IPv6 protocol IPX protocol IPv4 multicast IPv6 multicast and non Tag VLAN Table 4 25 Accommodation Conditions in the Same RP and Different NIF Item VRRP MPLS VLAN Note 1 Bridge Non VLAN IP multicast IPv VRRP d V V V V V V MPLS V V V V V x x VLAN Note 1 d d d d d x x Bridge V vV V V V V d Non VLAN d d d d d d d IP multicast V x x vV V V V IPv6 V x x V d d d Note 1 The number of VLANs is especially limited when VLAN is used For details see the Maximum number 4 2 4 9 Ce See en em In case of BCU 300H BCU N300H and 256 256 BCU L300H 256 In case of BCU 850H BCU M850H and BCU L850H 256A RP Line accommodating conditions for ATM H Accommodating conditions for OC 12c STM 4 ATM NAOC12 2M and NAOC12 2S can accom
91. 4 14 1 4 14 1 1 Multicast relay Please pay attention to the following points when relaying a multicast packet usi this router Common to protocols This router prepares a multicast routing entry for performing multicast communication when the first multicast packet is received Because the multica packet is relayed by way of using the software until the entry is prepared a pack may be lost temporarily This router does not support the mixed system of PIM DM PIM SM and DVMRP Therefore use the router after unifying the multicast protocols of all the routers PIM DM PIM SM and DVMRP Please take note that multicast communication may stop until the multicast rout information is learned if the operating system switched to the standby system by means of operation using the duplication router or if the IP multicast routing program is re actuated by charging the ip restart multicast command 4 14 2 4 14 2 1 4 14 2 2 m In the system configuration allowing mixed use with a device other than this device multi cast communication may become impossible due to difference in the calculation range of check sum for PIM Register message capsulated packet If the Register message does not perform multi cast relaying at the rendezvous point due to a check sum error change the range to calculate the PIM check sum by using the configuration defining information of this device For details please refer to the Configuration definition comma
92. 4 55 Maximum entry number of MPLS policy Maximum RP entry number Maximum device entry number Maximum number of 2 000 RP 10 000 device describable policy entry 4 2 11 7 Dynamic Entry and Static Entry Maximum Entry Count The maximum entry count of dynamic and static entries when using MPLS functions is shown in Table 4 56 Use a sum total of dynamic and static entries that does not exceed the maximum device entry count When using maximum entries it is necessary to have the memory capacity indicated in d Minimum Required Memory conditions when utilizing the COPS function With the COPS function the accommodating conditions for the maximum flow entry number and the maximu QoS queue attribute entry number are applied in order to realize the policy set fro policy server by utilizing the QoS control function of the device Table 4 57 COPS agent accommodating conditions Item Description Cabinet All model RP Memory size of 96 MB or greater RM Memory size of 256 MB or greater Maximum number of interfaces that can control i 256 interfaces device COPS agent Maximum number of flow entries in COPS agent Refer to Configuration definition command reference flow filter IPv4 and flow qos IPv4 Maximum number of Qos queue attribute entries in COPS agent Refer to Configuration definition command reference qos queue list QoS queue attribut Accommodated RP condition RP A1 RP CRP D IPv6 providing fu
93. 4 63 4 6 4 2 ATM Connection with Bridge Devices A 4 63 AGAS Ge ER Ae 4 63 4 7 Precautions on IP Connection with Other DeViCesS cccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesnneeeeeeeseeeeeeenes 4 64 4 7 1 Interface Address in Point to Point Line Connection eee cceeeeeeeneeeeeeeeenteeeeeeeaeeeeeeenaeeeeenees 4 64 4 7 2 Precautions When Using RIP 1 on Frame Relay or ATM Network A 4 64 4 7 3 Precautions When Using RIP 2 on Frame Relay or ATM Network esssesesssserrssrrerssn 4 64 4 7 4 Precautions When Using OSPF on Frame Relay or ATM Network A 4 64 4 7 5 Cautions When Using RIP 1 in Point to Point Circuits 2 0 0 2 ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeenaeeeeenees 4 65 4 7 6 Cautions When Using OSPF on Point to Point Circuits 2 0 20 ce eeeeeceeeeeeeneeeeeeeneeeeeeenaeeeeeeees 4 65 4 7 7 Cautions When Using OSPF 1000 00 ececcseeeeesseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeeaaeaeeeeeaaeaaeseeeaaaeeeeeegeaaeeeeeeenaeees 4 65 4 7 7 1 Cautions Regarding the Hellolnterval Default Value o oo eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeetees 4 65 4 7 7 2 Cautions Regarding the Priority Default Value eeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 65 4 7 8 Cautions When Using BGPA aaia a a a E N A 4 66 4 7 8 1 Cautions Regarding NextHop Resolution sssessssssesseesssssrrrsssirrrssriirrssiirnnstensinnnssenns 4 66 4 8 Precautions When Replacing Other Router with GR2000 ccccsssseceesseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 4 67 4 9 Connection with IPV6 Router cce
94. 58 NW T3822 EE 3 42 35 NWES 2U oie Gori a il aii Hilti a a dels 3 44 35 19 NWESl1G druene oiee Eea EEE eon EEEa eae EE ae eE en Es e See eiaeia 3 46 3 5 16 NWOC3C 2M NWOC3C 2S NWOC3C 2SD andNWOC OC 2MD 3 48 3 5 17 NWOC3C 8S andNWOC COM 3 50 3 5 18 NWOC12C 1S and NWOC12 1SD aceiren aa i ienai aE 3 51 3 5 19 NWOC12 4S andNWOCTI2 ANM 3 52 3 5 20 NWOC48 1S NWOC48 1S4 and NWOC A1 3 53 3 5 21 NWOC48 1A NWOC48 1A4 and NWOCA81AN eee eeeeeeeeaecaeeeeeeeeetesnneaeess 3 54 3 5 22 NAQC8 1 Mand NAOQC8 1S sic aniline EA eege EEN EA ege deed 3 56 B25 23 INAZEMEN EE 3 57 3 5 24 NAOC3 8S and NACOC3 OM eenn inii aiee iNeed aaea EAA EREEREER 3 58 3 5 25 NAOC12 2S and NAOGT2 2M ehna E A E O E NA 3 59 95260 CT EE 3 60 xxxii GR2K GA 1002 Rev 6 03 35 27 CAE EE 3 61 3 5 28 NWE T8 ee Ee teeta a oe ei e 3 63 3 6 Power Supply Unit POW 0 cceeeceeeeeneeeeeeeeeeee sense neeee sees nneeseeeenneesaeeesnueeeeeeeseaeseeeeseeaeeeeesseeeseeensees 3 65 3 60 41 UE LL 3 66 3162 POW FT OO VE 3 67 B56 e e DCE TEE 3 67 3 6 4 POW M100H and POW M100HA cece cece eee eene eee ee eee e ee ee ee aaeeeeeeseaeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeaeeeeeneeeeeeeeees 3 68 3 6 5 POW M200H and POW M200HA cc eeeececeeeeeeeee eee ee eee eee eeeeeaeeeeeeseaeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeneeeees 3 69 3 6 6 POW MDCH and POW MDCHA ziarno iinet iE E EA EA EEEE ARETE E EAT 3 70 3 6 7 POW L200H and POW L200HA sara na A E EOE A A O OAO 3 71 3 6 8 POW LDCH and POW LDCHA o esrrininataa irena a ai E
95. 6 2 4G POS 1 port single mode fiber full 80km APS supported ATM NA25M 1 25Mbps ATM 1 port half NAOC3 1M SONET SDH OC 3 STM 1 150M ATM 1 port multimode fiber half NAOC3 1S SONET SDH OC 3 STM 1 150M ATM 1 port single mode fiber half NAOC3 8M SONET SDH OC 3c STM 1 150M ATM 8 ports multimode fiber full NAOC3 8S SONET SDH OC 3c STM 1 150M ATM 8 ports single mode fiber full NAOC12 2M SONET SDH OC 12c STM 4 600M ATM 2 ports mulimode fiber full NAOC12 2S SONET SDH OC 12c STM 4 600M ATM 2 ports sigle mode fiber full These interfaces are for use in Japan only Product intended for the Japanese market handled only by Hitachi Japan GR2K GA 1002 Rev 6 03 GR2000 Installation Guide 2 4 5 Power Supply Unit POW The POW receives externally sourced input power and generates stable direct voltage current 5V 3 3V 12V and 24V for the router For input power GR2000 2S and GR2000 4S can receive 100 or 200 VAC 50 60 Hz GR2000 6H and GR2000 10H can receive 100 or 200 VAC 50 60 Hz or 48 or 60 VDC if DC input power option is installed GR2000 20H can receive 200 VAC 50 60 Hz or 48 or 60 VDC if DC input power option is installed In any power supply that is duplicable the external power supply cables are independent thus duplication is possible in the external power supply system For the configuration of each power supply module please refe
96. 73H Note 1 1536 0 lt X lt 2048 0 O O 5 m or less HN F9355 73H Note 1 2048 0 lt X lt 3072 0 O X 5 m or less Note 2 HN F9355 73H Note 1 3072 0 lt X lt 6144 0 O X 1m or less Note 1 Note 1 The above corresponding cable model indicates the type of standard cables Special order cables are also NWVX 8 is supplied with the cables attached to VX 8 Connect the cables attached to VX 8 100 pin high density connector as show below The tips of the cables attached to VX 8 have connecting sections for the same 50 pin half pitch connectors LINE 0 to LINE 7 as in NWVX 4 Be careful when connecting the cables attached to VX 8 to the devices that the connector insertion faces are reversed between the lower side connectors LINE 0 LINE 1 and LINE 4 LINE 5 and the upper side connectors LINE 2 LINE 3 and LINE 6 LINE 7 LINE 7 LINE 6 LINE 3 LINE 2 LINE 4 Vin oe LINE 5 The cables attached to VX 8 have a length of 1 m The cables attached to VX 8 Be careful when connecting the cables attached to VX 8 to the devices that the connector insertion faces are reversed between the lower side connectors LINE 0 LINE 1 and LINE 4 LINE 5 and the upper side connectors LINE 2 LINE 3 and LINE 6 LINE 7 LINE 7 LINE 6 LINE 5 LINE 4 LINE 3 LINE 2 LINE 1 LINE 0 Figure 3 74 Line numbers for the cables attached to NWVX 8 The cables attached to VX f 8 are required when GR2000 Modem
97. 95 1996 Permission to use copy modify and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted provided that the above copyright notice appears in all copies and that both the copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation and that the name University of Delaware not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific written prior permission The University of Delaware makes no representations about the suitability this software for any purpose It is provided as is without express or implied warranty MD5 Program Adapted from the RSA Data Security Inc MD5 Message Digest Algorithm pimdd Copyright 1998 by the University of Oregon All rights reserved xvi GR2K GA 1002 Rev 6 03 Permission to use copy modify and distribute this software and its documentation in source and binary forms for lawful purposes and without fee is hereby granted provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both the copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation and that any documentation advertising materials and other materials related to such distribution and use acknowledge that the software was developed by the University of Oregon The name of the University of Oregon may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific
98. ACHI NETM Cm2 Ver04 0Ox HI UX and HP UX versions Japan on a HITACHI NETM Cm2 Ver05 00 HP UX and WindowsNT versions Jap line speed is slow A case of too many number of the connected IP network or connected interface For example a case where the number of interface of the device is too many or a case where retrieval of the IP related MIB information takes excessive amount of time A case of too many number of too many entries in routing table For example in case where the number of IP routing entries in the device is too many retrieval of the IP related MIB information takes excessive amount of time or MIB response drop occurs due to reduction of the CPU allotment time to retrieve the MIP information by route calculations A case of too many number of ARP A case where retrieval of the IP related MIB information takes excessive amount of time if the number of ARP of this device is too many A case of too many number of connected SNMP manager For example a case where the number of SNMP manager to be connected to this device is too many and collection of the MIB information concentrates in a certain length of time H Review of the collection cycle of the MIB information in the SNMP manager This device increases the amount of management information MIB in Within the maximum configuration defined in Section 2 4 Device Components GR2000 has certain configuration limits as described below 4 2 1 RP Three types
99. B CPU 4S Figure 3 7 RM CPU 4S RMB CPU 4S Front Panel View f 5 9 2 D Note AUX not used in case of RMB CPU HH Figure 3 8 RM CPU HH RMB CPU HH Front Panel View a b Note AUX not used in case of RMB CPU MH and RBM CPU LH Figure 3 9 RM CPU MH RMB CPU MH or RM CPU LH RMB CPU LH Front Panel View GR2000 10H 20H 3 8 GR2K GA 1002 Rev 6 03 Component Details Switch and LED indication Table 3 6 RM CPU switch and function of LED indications Name of switch Switch or LED and LED LED Green Yellow Red Status Shows the operating condition of RM Content Green Operable operation Yellow Blocking and the board replaceable state Green blinking Under preparation Program being loaded Red Fault or shutdown Extinguished Operation not possible Including the device power supply being turned off LED Green Shows the operating standby condition of duplicated basic control mechanism Green Shows the state of operation Lights up continuously when not duplicated Extinguished Shows the standby state Including the device power supply being turned off LED Green Shows the state of power supply turned on or off Green Voltages of 5V and 3 3V of RMP are normal Extinguished Voltages of 5V and 3 3V of RMP are not the specified voltage Fault in power supply unit or RMP board or power supply switch in device is turned off or AC power is not fed LED
100. E DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE THEO DE RAADT Copyright 1992 3 Theo de Raadt lt deraadt fsa ca gt All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met GR2K GA 1002 xi Rev 6 03 GR2000 Installation Guide 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SE
101. EERNEEEREREEER REENEN en 3 56 NWOC3 1S NWOC3 1M switch and function of LED indications cccceesesseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeees 3 57 Connector Specifications for NA25M 1 ccccessseceeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeneesessneeseeeeeeeeeseeeenneeseeeesneneseneeenenes 3 57 NWOC3 8M 8S switch and function of LED indications cccccsseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 3 58 Connector Specifications for NAOC3 8S and NAOC3 8M c ccsesssseeesseeessnneeesseeeessseeensneeeneees 3 58 NW0OC12 2S NWOC12 2M switch and function of LED indications ccsss eeecessseeeeeseeeeeees 3 59 Connector Specifications for NAOC12 2S and NAOC12 2M ccscsssseeessseeesnseeessneeessneeeneeeeneees 3 59 NE1G 4C switch and function of LED indications ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseseeneeneeseneees 3 60 GBIC and connector specifications for NE1G 4C ccseenesseeeeeeeeseneeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseseneesesaeeneeseeseeneeeenss 3 60 NWT3 1C switch and function of LED indications 2 ceceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneneeeeeneeeeeeees 3 61 l GR2K GA 1002 Rev 6 03 NWT3 1C switch and function of LED indication sek kNKEKKKKRKENKRKRKEN KREE ERKR KEN ERER EEN KREE KR KEN KREE EE KR KEN 3 62 Connector specifications for NWT3 1C cccceseeeseeeeseeeeseeeeeneeseeeeeneeseeeeeeneeseeeenneeseesesneeeeessenseeeeeees 3 62 NEW1 8 switch and function of LED indications
102. FS4 SC 2 core flat connector single mode fiber 1300 nm wavelength 3 20 GR2K GA 1002 Rev 6 03 Component Details 3 5 3 NE1G 1S NE1G 1SA NE1G 1L NE1G 1LA NE1G 1LHA NE1G 1LHA8 NE1G 1LB NE1G 1SB and NE1G 1LHBA The NE1G 1S NE1G 1SA NE1G 1L NE1G 1LA NE1G 1LHA NE1G 1LHA8 NE1G 1LB NE1G 1SB and NE1G 1LHBA physically appear as Figure 3 24 These NIFs each have one port for connection with a pair of SC 2 core optical fiber connectors transmit and receive Table 3 20 shows the connector specifications Mark indicates 1S 1SA 1SB 1L 1LA 1LB 1LHA 1LHAB and 1LHBA H 1000BASE SX or 1000BASE LX or 1000BASE LH LINE ERRO OSiIG DT T R actO OT ac Figure 3 24 NE1G 1S NE1G 1SA NE1G 1L NE1G 1LA NE1G 1LHA NE1G 1LHA8 NE1G 1SB NE1G 1LB and NE1G 1LHBA Front Panel View Switch and LED indication Table 3 19 NE1G 1S NE1G 1SA NE1G 1L NE1G 1LA NE1G 1LHA NE1G 1LHA8 NE1G 1LB NE1G 1SB and NE1G 1LHBA switch and function of LED indications Name of switch and LED LED Green Shows the operating Green Operable operation Yellow Red condition of RM Yellow Blocking and the board replaceable state Green blinking Under preparation Program being loaded Red Fault Extinguished Operation not possible Including the device power supply being turned off LED Green Green Ring pulse being established LED Green Shows the operating Green Line operation possible state line open
103. G NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE FRANK VAN DER LINDEN Copyright 1995 Frank van der Linden All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement This product includes software developed for the NetBSD Project by Frank van der Linden 4 The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF US
104. High speed digital 1 5M leased line TS1 to TS24 1 to 24 1 to 24 High speed digital 1 5M ISDN High speed digital 1 5M leased line TS1 to TS24 1 to 24 1 to 24 High speed digital 1 5M ISDN High speed digital 1 5M leased line TS1 to TS24 1 to 24 1 to 24 High speed digital 1 5M ISDN High speed digital 1 5M leased line TS1 to TS24 1 to 24 1 to 24 High speed digital 1 5M ISDN High speed digital 1 5M leased line TS1 to TS24 1 to 24 It is possible High speed digital 1 5M leased line TS1 to TS24 oz define the tim 4 6 1 4 6 1 1 4 6 1 2 Bandwidth Planning Considerations Routing Capacity of GR2000 on ATM Interface The routing capacity of GR2000 on ATM interface is 50 kpps transmission per line Plan the network so that the traffic exceeding the router s capacity will not rush into the router Cellularization Overhead When relaying packets from a network of different medium such as Ethernet to an ATM network the output traffic becomes higher than the input traffic because of the cellularization overhead Figure 4 9 illustrates a sample cellularization process that converts an Ethernet frame IP packet to ATM cells For example if a 64 byte frame is received from an Ethernet network the IP packet length is 46 bytes When transmitting this frame to an ATM network PAD is added to normalize the data length on 48 byte boundary as shown below Header 8 bytes IP packet 46 byte
105. IF at Line Speed of up to 6 MDDS ccccesseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeenees 4 12 WAN Line Accommodation per RP A1 at Line Speed of Up to 6 MDDS cseecceeeeeeeeeeeseeneneeeees 4 12 WAN Line Accommodation per RP D at Line Speed of up to 6 MbPS ecccceseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeenees 4 13 E3 Multiplex Line Accommodation per RP D at Line Speed of 34 Mbp seeccsseseeeeetseeeeeeees 4 13 T3 Multiplex Line Accommodation per RP D at Line Speed of 45 Mbps ccccseeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeees 4 13 WAN ISDN Line Accommodation Limit cccseeeeeeeeceeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesneeeeneeeeeseaaeseseeeeseeeeseseeneeeees 4 14 WAN Overload Line Accommodation Limits 22 ccccccceceeeeeeeeeeceeeeseeseneeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeseseeneeceeeeeees 4 14 Multilink Overload Line Accommodation Limit Inter RP Full Duplex 64kbps Bundled 4 15 Multilink Overload Line Accommodation Limit Inter RP Half Duplex 64kbps Bundled 4 15 Multilink Overload Line Accommodation Limit Intra RP Full Duplex 64kbps Bundled 4 15 Multilink Overload Line Accommodation Limit Intra RP Half Duplex 64kbps Bundled 4 15 Restriction on Aggregate Line Speed for GR2000 4S and GR2000 4 cccccesceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 17 Speed Conversion of Full Size NIF cccessseeceeeeseeeeeeeeseneeseeeeseeesesseeseeeesnneeeeeeesueeseeenseeeseeesseeneeeenees 4 18 GR2K GA 1002 li Rev 6 03 GR2000
106. IF models are provided as listed in Table 3 15 Each NIF model comprises one NIF board Description of each NIF board follows Table 3 15 NIF Models Category Physical Interface NIF Name Board Size Remarks LAN 10BASE T 100BASE TX NE100 8T Half size 30mm wide 100m NE100 8TA Half size 30mm wide VRRP MPLS support 100m 100BASE FX NE100 4F Half size 30mm wide MMF 2km NE100 4FS Half size 30mm wide SMF middle distance 15km NE100 4FS4 Half size 30mm wide SMF long distance 40km 1000BASE SX NE1G 1S Full size 30mm wide 550m NE1G 1SA Full size 30mm wide VRRP MPLS support 550m NE1G 1SB Full size VRRP MPLS VLAN Bandwidth control support 550m 1000BASE LX NE1G 1L Full size 30mm wide 550m NE1G 1LA Full size 30mm wide VRRP MPLS support 550m NE1G 1LB Full size VRRP MPLS VLAN Bandwidth control support 550m NE1G 4C Full size 30mm wide GBIC Support VRRP MPLS VLAN Bandwidth control support 1000BASE LH NE1G 1LHA Full size 30mm wide 40km NE1G 1LHA8 Full size 30mm wide 80 km support NE1G 1LHBA Full size 30mm wide 100km WAN V 24 V 35 X 21 NWVX 4 Half size 30mm wide 16m Highspeed digital NWJB 8 Half size 30mm wide Basic Japan only 16m NWJ1 4U Half size 30mm wide Primary Japan only 200m NWJ1 8U Half size 30mm wide
107. MS 128MB fixed Mountable with e The packet transfer engine is commonly used for transmission and reception some limitations e Routing retrieval engines are mounted exclusively for transmission and 1 reception respectively e The mounted processor is MIPS RM7000 250Mhz RP D In addition to the RP A1 s features MPLS and Tag VLAN coupling GR2000 2S Not Packet transfer rate Approx 1M packets s mountable MS 64MB standard 128MB max GR2000 4S e Packet transfer engine is used commonly for transmission and reception Mountable with e Routing retrieval engine is used commonly for transmission and reception some feature e The mounted processor is MIPS RM7000 250Mhz limitations 2 RP C RP C is a routing processor to accommodate high speed lines including OC 48c GR2000 4S 2S which has a packet processing performance about four times greater than that of Not mountable RPA1 GR2000 10 20 GR2000 IPv6 compatible Separate price Has RP C function quote IPv6 IPv4 dual stack Packet transfer rate 4 0Mpps IPv4 Full duplex 2 6Mpps IPv6 MS 128MB standard 256MB max e Packet transfer engines are mounted exclusively for transmission and reception respectively e Routing retrieval engines are mounted exclusively for transmission and reception respectively e The mounted processor is MIPS RM7000 250Mhz 2 32 GR2K GA 1002 Rev 6 03 Product Overview Table 2 4 RP Specifications Specification Note GR2000 IPv6 c
108. MS INC SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY WITH RESPECT TO THE INFRINGEMENT OF COPYRIGHTS TRADE SECRETS OR ANY PATENTS BY SUN RPC OR ANY PART THEREOF In no event will Sun Microsystems Inc be liable for any lost revenue or profits or other special indirect and consequential damages even if Sun has been advised of the possibility of such damages Sun Microsystems Inc 2550 Garcia Avenue Mountain View California 94043 UNIVERSITY OF TORONTO Copyright 1986 by University of Toronto Written by Henry Spencer Not derived from licensed software Permission is granted to anyone to use this software for any purpose on any computer system and to redistribute it freely subject to the following restrictions 1 The author is not responsible for the consequences of use of this software no matter how awful even if they arise from defects in it 2 The origin of this software must not be misrepresented either by explicit claim or by omission 3 Altered versions must be plainly marked as such and must not be misrepresented as being the original software viii GR2K GA 1002 Rev 6 03 WASHINGTON UNIVERSITY IN SAINT LOUIS Copyright 1993 1994 Washington University in Saint Louis All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of condi
109. Main Memory EE 4 10 4 2 3 1 Memory Increments kk 4 10 4 24 LIME ACCOMMOCALION EE 4 11 4 2 4 1 Line Accommodation with 1OOBAGE TN 4 11 4 2 4 2 Line Accommodation with 1OOBAGE EA 4 12 4 2 4 3 Line Accommodation with WAN Other than ISDN and Overload eeeeeeeereeees 4 12 4 2 4 4 Line Accommodation with WAN GDN 4 14 4 2 4 5 Line Accommodation with WAN Overload eceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseneeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 14 4 2 4 6 Line Accommodation on OGRZ20O0O0 28 4 16 4 2 4 7 Line Accommodation on GR2000 4S and GR2000 4 with Shared Bus Structure 4 17 4 2 4 8 Accommodation conditions for each function in Ethernet and gigabit Ethernet 4 19 4 2 4 9 Line accommodating Conditions for ATM 4 20 4 2 5 Maximum Number of Peer 4 21 4 2 5 1 Maximum Number of ARP Entries AA 4 21 4 2 5 2 Maximum Number of PVG Sarerea aa E A E a a 4 21 4 2 6 Maximum Number of Interfaces and Multihome Gubneis AA 4 22 4 2 6 1 Maximum Number of Interfaces 00 eee cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeseaeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeees 4 22 4 2 6 2 Maximum Number of Multihome Subnets A 4 22 4 2 7 Routing Resource Accommodation Limite 4 23 4 2 7 1 Maximum Number of Neighbor Houters AA 4 23 4 2 7 2 Relationships between Maximum Number of Route Entries and Maximum Number of Neighbor Routers oss niine eiai ee devon dees deeds n iaat a a 4 23 4 2 7 3 Relationships between Maximum Number of Route Entries and Line Speed 4 24
110. Mut Home ee eeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeneees 4 43 4 2 12 7 Maximum Number of Tunnel Interfaces to be Get 4 44 4 2 12 8 Maximum Number of IPv6 Addresses to be Get 4 44 4 2 12 9 Routing Resource ootusi inorena n died nid envi a a a 4 45 4 2 12 10 Relation Between the Number of Route Entries and the Line Speed 4 46 4 2 12 11 Maximum Number of Dynamic and Static Entree 4 46 4 219 Tag VLAN BEE 4 47 4 2 13 1 Routing Processor Module RP and NIE 4 47 4 2 13 2 Number of Tag VLANS to be Gei 4 47 4 2 13 3 Number of Tag VLANs to be Set in Multi Home eee eeeeeeeeeeeeenaeeeeeeenaeeeeenaees 4 48 ATIA COPS ue e EE 4 49 4 3 Segmentation Topology Restrictions cccccsssececceseeeeeeeenseeeeeeesseeeeeeeesseeeeeeenseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeenseeenenenes 4 50 4 3 1 temeto be Prepared gedet nade ates We ee te et 4 50 4 3 2 Network Configuration asane aa a a e O A 4 50 4 4 LAN Networking Restrictions ssssssnsesunnnnnnnnnnennnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn nnaman nna 4 51 4 4 TOBASE TA 0O BA SE RE 4 51 EE eege e E A A 4 51 4 4 3 1000BASE SX 1000BASE LX 1000BASE LH eee ceeceeeeeee scence ee eeeeeaeeeeseeaaeeeeeeeeaeeeeeneaaees 4 51 4 4 4 Autonegotiation Connection Applicable to 1OBASE T 100BASE TX 1000BASE SX 1O00BASE LX 1000BASE LH aceia aiina a a e NE a AEEA EE A EA N ae 4 51 dE Flow Control Sae a a a a a aa rae aeaa badd 4 51 4 4 6 Priority Control and Tagged Virtual LAN eee eeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee
111. OC3 8S x V C CV NAOC12 2M V V C CV NAOC12 2S y V C CV 1 V Supported x Not supported 2 Only PPP is supported FR is not supported Only clear channel is supported 3 In the LDP DU mode the ATM lines are outside the object of support for the backbone line 4 2 11 3 Memory Card Unit MC When using MPLS functions MC card must be MC64 and MC30 will not operate 4 2 11 4 Minimum Memory Requirements Minimum required memory is shown on the number of route entries for IPv4 unicast the number of routers constituting the MPLS net and the number of supported VPNs Table 4 48 The minimum required BCU memory in LDP DU mode and RFC2547 bis system shows the basic control unit BCU in the case of LDP DU mode and RFC2547 bis system Table 4 49 The minimum required BCU memory in IPv4 unicast BCU memory Path entry count No of ATM V size Maximum number of entries by protocols per NIF RIP OSPF BGP4 Note 2 Statics 128MB or more 2 000 or less 2 000 500 or less 256 or les 256MB or more 22 000 or less 2 000 20 000 500 or less 2 048 or les 512MB or more 83 000 or less 3 000 80 000 1 000 or less 2 048 or les 768MB or more 125 000 or less 5 000 120 000 1 000 or less 2 048 or les Note 1 and loop back route Note 3 Note 4 Note 5 Note 6 Note 1 If the basic control unit is duplicated it is necessary to expand the memory so as to achieve the minimu required
112. OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE DAVID HOVEMEYER Copyright 1995 David Hovemeyer lt daveho infocom com gt All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met X GR2K GA 1002 Rev 6 03 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE DEVELOPERS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE DEVELOPERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDIN
113. POW LDC Two DC power units GR2000 20 Single 48 or 60 VDC input Dual 48 or 60 VDC input INPUT LDC One DC input unit GR2000 20 Single 48 or 60 VDC input Dual 48 or 60 VDC input Figure 3 56 illustrates the power unit of the POW H100H The dimensions are approximate in mm and the drawing is not to scale 150 Figure 3 56 Power Unit of POW H100H 3 6 3 POW HDCH Figure 3 57 illustrates the power unit of the POW HDCH The dimensions are approximate in mm and the drawing is not to scale The POW M100H comprises one AC input unit SWR4820 U one power cord and three DC DC power units two DC38001 Us for 3 3V 24V dc output and one DC46003 U for 3 3V 5V dc output The POW M100HA comprises one AC input unit SWR4820 U one power cord and one DC DC power unit DC46003 U Figure 3 58 illustrates the AC input unit and one of the DC DC power unit s of the POW M100H and the POW M100HA The dimensions are approximate in mm and the drawing is not to scale Be noted that the locations for these components are fixed See Table 3 88 and see also Figure 2 7 and Figure 2 8 in Subsection 2 2 173 F swt ULL The POW M200H comprises one AC input unit SWR4825 U one power cord and three DC DC power units two DC38001 Us for 3 3V 24V dc output and one DC46003 U for 3 3V 5V dc output The POW M200HA comprises one AC
114. RAR 7 3 Chapter 8 Adding and Removing Componentts ceeceeeeeeeeees 8 1 BT BCU RP and NIF MOGUICS coeecscicceccecicccucecctedecsedceedeedceaceeetcdeusateeenuducdvastrcucucessuteesteqedsuvenresnevaeeedecues 8 1 8 2 Power Supply Components eccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee eeeeeeseeeeeneeeseseeeneeseeseseeeeseseseneeseeseeneeeeeseeenenenseeeenees 8 5 B22 Ee EM LEE 8 5 8 2 2 OGR2000 6H aaa enp Neth ech ccna Se eege ee dees 8 6 8323 GR2000 10H EE 8 8 8 2 3 1 Input Unit AC or D I 8 8 El D ee Ee 8 9 Ee RN LTE 8 10 8 2 451 input Unit AG Or DG TE 8 10 8 2 4 2 DC DC DEE 8 11 82 5 GR2000 A E aaa aa a a aaa aa aa ea aaa 8 12 852 6 GR2000 10 min a a e a a a Ae E 8 13 8 2 6 1 POW for AG Inp t sissies A A niet a 8 13 826 2 POW for DEE 8 14 ATAKE 7400 0 EA E EE ATE E E reer eerree 8 15 8 207 POW TOrAG IMpUt ire niaaa N EEE E O E a eege degen 8 15 8 2 7 2 POW tor BLEU 8 16 BS ANS wc veces deere cee A E E A E eege 8 17 8 3 1 Fan Tray for GR2000 10H dreda e e ged ubeghaccenbeedatete tedetdeess 8 17 8 3 2 Fan Tray for GR2000 20H as rraian aaaea iaa pra AAAA T ANTAA EASA SA TAA ATENEI 8 18 8 3 3 CPU Fan for GR2000 4 GR2000 10 and GR200O0 20 8 19 8 4 Main Memory Module iiine nianna anA ARRE AAA EA A AE EE ANAE EENE AERAN RERA 8 20 8 4 1 Addition Removal of Main Memory Module for RM DCH 8 20 8 4 2 Addition Removal of Main Memory Module for DP 8 21 8 5 Hot Swapping Of COMPONENING c eccecceeeeeeeeseeeeeeee
115. RESS LED s in both systems are lit yellow If the switch for the standby system is turned on only the EMA SUPPRESS LED in the standby systems is lit yellow Even if either switch is turned on the system switching is suppressed RM CHANGE GR2000 48 Switch Press The operation standby of the duplicated basic control mechanism is changed over Table 3 9 Specifications of 9 pin D sub Connector on CONSOLE RS232C Port Specifications Request to send RS output Clear to send CS input Data set ready DR input Data terminal ready ER output Carrier detect of data channel receive CD input Called indicator Cl input Signal ground or common line SG Send data SD output Receive data RD input GR2K GA 1002 Rev 6 03 3 13 GR2000 Installation Guide Table 3 10 Specifications of 8 pin RJ45 Connector on CONSOLE 10BASE T 100BASE TX Port Pin No Specifications Transmit TA Transmit TB Receive RA Receive RB o N OO Ei w N 3 3 6 RM IO S RM IO M and RM IO L The RM IO S for GR2000 4 the RM IO M for GR2000 10 and the RM IO L for GR2000 20 physically appear as Figure 3 12 and Figure 3 14 The RM IO S RM IO M and the RM IO L each has one CONSOLE RS232C port and one CONSOLE 10BASE T 100BASE TX port The connector specifications on these ports are the same as those f
116. RVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE HENRY SPENCER diff grep Copyright 1992 1993 1994 Henry Spencer All rights reserved This software is not subject to any license of the American Telephone and Telegraph Company or of the Regents of the University of California Permission is granted to anyone to use this software for any purpose on any computer system and to alter it and redistribute it subject to the following restrictions 1 The author is not responsible for the consequences of use of this software no matter how awful even if they arise from flaws in it 2 The origin of this software must not be misrepresented either by explicit claim or by omission Since few users ever read sources credits must appear in the documentation 3 Altered versions must be plainly marked as such and must not be misrepresented as being the original software Since few users ever read sources credits must appear in the documentation 4 This notice may not be removed or altered Copyright 1988 1989 1992 1993 1994 Free Software Foundation Inc This program is free software you can redistribute it and or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as publi
117. Router chassis M E NW d d D vd WM e M d on LOT s dLoGlotote LOLI packing list are obtained from the cargo bi Caution This model weighs up to 120 kg Handle with care Work with another person when you handle this model Carton Router chassis packing list are obtained from the cargo bi Caution This model weighs up to 160 kg Handle with care Work with another person Carton Router chassis packing list are obtained from the cargo bi Caution This model weighs up to 25 kg Handle with care Vinyl bag Router chassis Carton packing list are obtained from the cargo bi Caution This model weighs up to 85 kg Handle with care Work with another person Carton Router chassis packing list are obtained from the cargo bi Caution This model weighs up to 190 kg Handle with care Work with another person Carton Router chassis When unpacking a separately shipped RM RP NIF module see Figure 6 9 and Figure 6 10 Make sure that all the parts in the packing list are obtained from th cargo A Caution This component is subject to damage from static electricity Before you are familiar with how to handle it in 6 2 do not unwrap the component RM RP NIF full size board Carton polyethylene or vinyl bag When unpacking a separately shipped memory module see Figure 6 11 Make sure that all the parts in the packing list are obtaine
118. S AC input front view of GR2000 6H AC input rear view of GR2000 6H AC input front view of GR2000 10H with AC input rear view of GR2000 10H with AC input front view of GR2000 10H with DC input rear view of GR2000 10H with DC input front view of GR2000 20H with AC input rear view of GR2000 20H with AC input front view of GR2000 20H with DC input rear view of GR2000 20H with DC input front view of GR2000 4 AC input rear view of GR2000 4 AC input front view of GR2000 10 with AC input rear view of GR2000 10 with AC input front view of GR2000 10 with DC input rear view of GR2000 10 with DC input front view of GR2000 20 with AC input rear view of GR2000 20 with AC input front view of GR2000 20 with DC input rear view of GR2000 20 with DC input Refer to 2 3 for information about the components in these figures The above figures show half size Network Interface NIF boards installed GR2000 Gigabit Router Series models also supports full sized NIF boards Figure 2 25 shows an example of full sized NIF boards installed GR2000 10 with AC input 2 2 GR2K GA 1002 Rev 6 03 Product Overview Memory LED status card slot indicator RS 232C port for console Integrated Ethernet port 10M 100M x 4 Figure 2 1 Front View of GR2000 2S AC Input FAN1 Power switch RM CPU with POW Power cord receptacle Figure 2 2 Rear View of GR2000 2S AC Input Acrylic Cover Sa Seat ae ll Creer ld
119. S GR2000 6H GR2000 10H and GR2000 20H an IPv6 relay function can be used by applying basic extended software 6 routing software ROUTE OS6 Embedded BSD OS is used as an Internet server and kernel in the RM Various protocol functions and commands are packaged as separate application processes to provide scalability Included in the path control is the commercial version of GateD which runs routing protocols such as OSPF and BGP4 Figure 2 39 shows the composition and functions of the routing software 2 38 GR2K GA 1002 Rev 6 03 Product Overview Browser Interface httpd Command group CLI ping telnet ftp boot log show route show ospf config etc Device Route control processing GateD RIP OSPF BGP RIPng BGP4 Note 2 Unicast IGMP DVMRP PIM Multicast Device RM MPLS IP VPN LDP CR LPD Note 1 Bridge Processing IPX Processing control Node control RP control interface control duplexed system control common RM control and logging Kernel BSD OS IPv6 Relay NDP IGMPv6 Note 2 Ethernet PPP Frame relay ATM Driver Driver Driver Driver Figure 2 39 Routing Software Block Diagram Crossbar switch CSW IPX bridge IP relay ARP ICMP Relay Packet forwarding engine Control of routing QoS table search engine Application Process group Kernel A Note 1 Effective only when the basic plus expansion software3 ROUTE OS3 is applie
120. S and NWOC12 4M Front Panel View ccscecsceseseesssssseeeeeseeeeseesnseeesneaeeeeenensneeeens 3 52 NWOC48 1S NWOC48 1S4 and NWOC48 1S8 Front Panel VieW ccccccessssssssssesseneeseeeeenees 3 53 NWOC48 1A NWOC48 1A4 and NWOC48 1A8 Front Panel View cccsssssssessceceseeeeensennseeees 3 54 NAOC3 1M and NAOC3 1S Front Panel View cssceccceessssnsceeseeeeeesensnssnsssceaneeseeeeesenasnnsscaaeeeses 3 56 NA25M 1 Front Panel View wcacccscesscicaacenuss oiiee causes hadaceteasaituntsesaiteacea E 3 57 NAOC3 8S and NAOC3 8M Front Panel View sccccecseeeeeesessssseeeeseeseeeeenseanenssceaneeseeseenennneneees 3 58 NAOC12 2S and NAOC12 2M Front Panel View csseccceseeeeenssnssessceeseeseeeeensensensscaaeeeseeseenees 3 59 NE1G 4C Front Panel View s cccccssesssscccsssnssusacnccnsanscnsensenneduescccsndnsansecuonneusidunensuasesseuscedndrsansonsnennes 3 60 NWT3 1C Front Panel View 2evguk ENNEN EESRdNeE SEENEN aduacuwevasasuseecdsveuceeccuabadunacaacdauuavasvauadadaauuse 3 61 NWE1 8 Front Panel View ovsssicceccsssseuecticcusonicancuscuseivedzocnstuscicocwoauctvedsecutthendeedscuesteduacenansdavedweguads suvadiace 3 63 Power Unit of POW S100S scsscsscidoscciscicccieccda ccc matinta acasdadsassdaduadeaevasdiedeendaeccdescccadaddadedaagsouasaase adecadaaddes 3 66 Power Unit of POW H100H E 3 67 Power Unit of POW HDCH wos siccicescescdcceccsic ccsanes cs ce ceectececcuec
121. SCP DSP DSU DTE DVMRP IPV6CP Datagram Delivery Protocol Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Data Link Connection Identifier Designated Router Destination Service Access Point Differentiated Services Code Point Domain Specific Part Digital Service Unit Data Terminal Equipment Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol Emulated LAN Echo Response Echo Request End System Frame Check Sequence Filtering Data Base Fiber Distributed Data Interface Forwarding Equivalence Class Forward Explicit Congestion Notification Far End Receive Failure Frame Relay Guaranteed Frame Rate High level Data Link Control Hitachi Network Architecture Internet Control Message Protocol Internet Control Message Protocol version 6 Identifier Initial Domain Identifier Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers Inc the Internet Engineering Task Force Internet Group Management Protocol Interim Local Management Interface Internet Protocol Internet Protocol version 4 Internet Protocol version 6 IPv6 Control Protocol GR2K GA 1002 Rev 6 03 xxi GR2000 Installation Guide IPX ISDN ISO ISP ITU T JDI NAK MC MD5 MIB MMF MPLS MRU NSAP MTU Nak NBP NCP NDP NET NetBIOS Internetwork Packet Exchange Integrated Services Digital Network International Organization for Standardization Internet Service Provider International Telecommunication Union Telecommunication Standardization Sector Ja
122. SE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers and the American National Standards Committee X3 on Information Processing Systems have given us permission to reprint portions of their documentation In the following statement the phrase this text refers to portions of the system documentation Portions of this text are reprinted and reproduced in electronic form in the second BSD Networking Software Release from IEEE Std 1003 1 1988 IEEE Standard Portable Operating System Interface for Computer Environments POSIX copyright C 1988 by the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers Inc In the event of any discrepancy between these versions and the original IEEE Standard the original IEEE Standard is the referee document In the following statement the phrase This material refers to portions of the system documentation This material is reproduced with permission from American National Standards Committee X3 on Information Processing Systems Computer and Business Equipment Manufacturers Association CBEMA 311 First St NW Suite 500 Washington DC 20001 2178 The developmental work of Programming Language C was completed by the X38J11 Technical Committee The views and conclusions contained in the software and documentation are those of the authors and should not be interpreted as representing offici
123. U M850H BCU L850H b Memory Card MC64 Pouting Processor RP a Main memory MS64 RP A1 RP C RP D RP C6 RP D6 b Main memory MS128 RP A1 RP C RP D RP C6 RP D6 Network Interface Unit NIF Notes One RP A1equivalent is incorporated in BCU on GR2000 25 Power supply redundancy is implemented by installing two POWs on GR2000 4S 6H MS256 is dedicated for BCU H850H BCU M850H and BCU L850H 2 28 GR2K GA 1002 Rev 6 03 Product Overview 2 4 1 Cabinet Network Processor Unit Chassis Each model of the GR2000 family has its own cabinet that includes one or more fans for cooling See Figures 2 1 thru 2 24 in 2 2 for their external images Table 2 2 Each cabinet and maximum number of modules that can be mounted Device Cabinet Maximum number of Constituting element modules that can be Remarks mounted BCU RM CPU and RMP 1 Built in Corresponding to RP A1 1 Built in NIF 2 PS 1 Built in GR2000 4S BCU RM 1 RP 1 NIF 4 PS 2 Possible of duplication GR2000 6H BCU RM and CSW 2 Possible of duplication RP 3 NIF 6 PS 2 Possible of duplication GR2000 10H BCU RM and CSW 2 Possible of duplication RP 5 NIF 10 PS 4 GR2000 20H BCU RM 2 Possible of duplication CSW 2 Possible of duplication RP 0 NIF 20 PS 6 Possible of
124. WJ1 8U twisted wire straight Japan only Channel 1810173 NWMX1 4 Primary G 703 NWT1 4 UTP category 3 4 5 4 8 core E 1800 RU 48 ANSI T1 403 NWE1 8 twisted wire straight NWE1 4 Secondary G 703 NWJ2 1U Metal coax 3C 2V 16 BNC Tertiary G 703 NWT3 2U Metal coax 3C 2V 3C 2W RG 59 137 BNC NWE8 2U Double sealed Note 1 2 Used only NET3 1C in Japan NWE3 1C OC 3c STM 1 NWOC8C 2M Multimode optical fiber of 50 125 or 62 5 0 5 2k SC 2 core 1 core POS MMF NWOC8C 2MD 125 mm core clad NWOC3C 8M OC 3c STM 1 NWOC8C 2S Single mode optical fiber of 10 125 um 0 5 15k GC 2 core 1 core POS SMF NWOC83C 2SD core clad NWOC83C 8S OC 12c STM 4 NWOC12C 4M Single mode optical fiber of 50 125 um or 0 5 500 SC 2 core 1 core POS MMF 62 5 125um core clad OC 12c STM 4 NWOC12C 1S Single mode optical fiber of 10 125 um 0 5 15k GC 2 core 1 core POS MMF NWOC 12 1SD core clad NWOC12 4S OC 48c STM 16 NWOC48 1S Single mode optical fiber of 10 125 um 0 5 2k SC 2 core 1 core POS core clad SMF NWOC48 1S4 Single mode optical fiber of 10 125um 10 5 140k SC 2 core 1 core core clad NWOC48 1S8 Single mode optical fiber of 10 125 um 0 5 80k SC 2 core 1 core core clad NWOC48 1A Single mode optical fiber of 10 125um 0 5 2k SC 2 core 1 core core clad NWOC48 1A4 Single mode optical fiber of 10 125 um 0 5 40k SC 2 core 1 core core clad NWOC48 1A8 Single mode optical fiber of 10 125 um 0 5 80k SC 2
125. Y AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GR2K GA 1002 vii Rev 6 03 GR2000 Installation Guide GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE SUN MICROSYSTEMS INC Copyright 1984 1985 1986 1987 1988 1993 Sun Microsystems Inc Sun RPC is a product of Sun Microsystems Inc and is provided for unrestricted use provided that this legend is included on all tape media and as a part of the software program in whole or part Users may copy or modify Sun RPC without charge but are not authorized to license or distribute it to anyone else except as part of a product or program developed by the user SUN RPC IS PROVIDED AS IS WITH NO WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN MERCHANTIBILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR ARISING FROM A COURSE OF DEALING USAGE OR TRADE PRACTICE Sun RPC is provided with no support and without any obligation on the part of Sun Microsystems Inc to assist in its use correction modification or enhancement SUN MICROSYSTE
126. aadaa aaaea daaa a adaa a ees secede ca Aaa Ea EENS 3 11 RM IO S Front Panel Vie we lsseseeegte sgseete ewes cece vescsce EE dEeeeEEee ESA 3 14 RM IO M and RM IO L Front Panel View c cccccsssssssssscsseesceseeeeensnnssssseeeseeseeseensnasensscaaeaeseeseenees 3 14 RMB IO H Front GETT 3 15 CSW L3MH Front EI 3 15 CSW L1M and CSW L3M Front Panel View ccccccccesssssessessceseesseeeeesensneesneaecaeeeseeeeensnasensseeasanses 3 15 RP A1 RP D RP D6 Front Panel View 2 s sssssseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeeceseceecececececssesesseseseeeeeneeeeeeeees 3 16 RP C C6 Front Panel View seed cccecnteceuee eaa A aia aAa aapea aA a narepi innean Pondaen diie rida Faidon 3 17 NE100 8T NE100 8TA and NE100 8TB Front Panel View csscssssssesseeeseeeeeeeeesnensnssceaeeeseeseenees 3 19 NE100 4F NE100 4FS and NE100 4FS4 Front Panel VieW 0 ccesceesessessessseeseeseeeeeneneeeeeees 3 20 NE1G 1S NE1G 1SA NE1G 1L NE1G 1LA NE1G 1LHA NE1G 1LHA8 NE1G 1SB NE1G 1LB and NE1G 1LHBA Front Panel View nsnnnnnnnnnnnnrnrnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn ennnen nnn nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnana nnmnnn nnmnnn 3 21 NWV X 4 Front Panel View Age ENNRKNER ANNE e ENEE scaaueuvauenceuetaacscuceucd ENEE ENNER aaide a ECK ENEE 3 22 NWVX 8 Front EI 3 25 Relationship between connection of cables supplied with VX 8 and LINE numbet 0 000 3 27 Line numbers for the cables attached to NWVXG8 cccce
127. able NIF shares the same connector as V 24 V 35 X 21 but the cable differs depending on the type of interface Except for those above mentioned all interface cables must be procured by the customer For the interface cable specifications see section 2 5 NIF accessory GBIC To use NE1G 4C in NIF any one of the following GBIC will be required If any GBIC other than those described below is used no operation will be guaranteed Table 2 7 GBIC type Model abbreviation Summarized specification GBIC for 1000BASE SX GBIC for 1000BASE LX GBIC handling 70 km for 1000BASE LH Table 2 8 GBIC SX LX LH Physical Specifications Purchasing overseas GBIC type Vendor P N GBIC SX IBM IBM42S12SNYAA20 CIELO GBE1250SW 1 FINISAR FTR 8519 GBIC LX IBM IBM42S12LNYAA20 CIELO GBE1250LW 1 GBIC LH EXTREME ZX GBIC Since GBIC is not exported at the present customers should purchase for themselves referring to Table 2 8 if it is to be used in other countries Temperature monitoring sensor One temperature monitoring sensor is mounted in each of RMB IO board and RMB CPU board The measuring accuracy is A 3A Max If the temperature monitored by the temperature monitoring sensor exceeds the temperature surveillance threshold value shown in Table 2 6 The temperature surveillance threshold value for RMB CPU and RMB IO board an operation log is taken and a trap is issued GR2K GA 1002 2 37 Rev 6 0
128. aboratory and its contributors Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission xiv GR2K GA 1002 Rev 6 03 THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE zlib Copyright notice 1995 1996 Jean loup Gailly and Mark Adler This software is provided as is without any express or implied warranty In no event will the authors be held liable for any damages arising from the use of this software Permission is granted to anyone to use this software for any purpose including commercial applications and to alter it and redistribute it freely subject to the following restrictions 1 The origin of this software must not be misrepresented you must not claim that you wrote the original software If you use this software in a product an acknowledgment in the product documentation would be appreciated but is not required 2 Altered source versions must be plainly marked as such and must not be misrepresented as being the original software 3 This notice may not be removed or altered from any source distribution Jean loup Gailly Mark Adler gzip prep ai mit edu madler alumni caltech edu If you use the zlib library in a product we would ap
129. ace may cause unnecessary traffic to flow through the interface if the group includes a VC not using protocols other than IP To avoid such occurrence of unnecessary traffic it is advised to separate the group into two one comprising VCs to use the bridge function and the other not using protocols other than IP and define these groups to respective interfaces The same is advised when you further add IPX definition to the existing interface Bridge Definition on ISDN Interface Bridge definition on an ISDN interface is available only on such interface where IP interface is defined to a single ISDN peer The IP interface should be point to point type Bridge definition on an ISDN interface with ISDN peer group is not available Since the spanning tree protocol is not available on an ISDN interface each bridge interface can be defined yes or no In addition when you plan a new ISDN network where the bridge interface definition is anticipated it is advised that you explicitly avoid a loop configuration in the network 4 12 1 When you use the QoS function of GR2000 pay attention to the following Relationship Between Load on RP and QoS In normal operation QoS controls queuing and transmitting of packets as illustra in Figure 4 18 In the event of a certain amount of load on the RP there may be cases when QoS fails and packets are discarded as illustrated in Figure 4 19 Su heavy load on the RP is caused by the following fac
130. ache apache org 5 Products derived from this software may not be called Apache nor may Apache appear in their names without prior written permission of the Apache Group 6 Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment This product includes software developed by the Apache Group for use in the Apache HTTP server project http www apache org THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE APACHE GROUP AS IS AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE APACHE GROUP OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Xntp Program The following copyright notice applies to all files collectively called the Network Time Protocol Version 4 Distribution Unless specifically declared otherwise in an individual file this notice applies as if the text was explicitly included in the file Copyright David L Mills 1992 1993 1994 19
131. ack Rack fitting t2 Supplied Le DM m Metal bracket accessory of rack Approx mass 60kg full options installed GR2000 6H Approx dimensions H x W x D 360mm x 430mm x 480mm D 2 STOTOLOLoLolLol o7 Loli e e 5 1 LI en Cen Lei S en bel n l d i uide rail Approx dimensions H x W x D 130mm x 440mm x 600mm 30 600 70 Rear Front Rear Interface cable Power cable Metal bracket accessory of rack 19 inch rack GR2000 10 unit mm The steps are as follows l Prepare the 19 inch rack considering the dimensions of the router chassis The inner depth of the rack must accommodate the depth of the router chassis plus minimum cable clearance 30mm for interface cables and 70mm for power cables and minimum airway clearance 30mm For GR2000 10H and GR2000 10 depth 600 mm the inner depth of the rack must be at least 700mm If a rack with a door is selected make sure that the distance between the chassis front end and the inner surface of the door satisfies the said minimum cable clearance 30mm The width of the opening of the rack must accommodate the width of the router chassis plus minimum allowance of 10mm for the thickness of metal brackets to be attached to both sides of the chassis For GR2000 10H and GR2000 10 width 440 mm the width of the opening of the rack must be at least 450mm 2 Mount the load
132. al policies either expressed or implied of the Regents of the University of California Contributors Sun Microsystems Inc Keith Muller Mark Nudelman Jan Simon Pendry AT amp T DAVID M GAY Copyright 1991 by AT amp T Permission to use copy modify and distribute this software for any purpose without fee is hereby granted provided that this entire notice is included in all copies of any software which is or includes a copy or modification of this software and in all copies of the supporting documentation for such software vi GR2K GA 1002 Rev 6 03 THIS SOFTWARE IS BEING PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY IN PARTICULAR NEITHER THE AUTHOR NOR AT amp T MAKES ANY REPRESENTATION OR WARRANTY OF ANY KIND CONCERNING THE MERCHANTABILITY OF THIS SOFTWARE OR ITS FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE INFO ZIP GROUP This product includes Info ZIP s software which is used for a part of the boot program Info ZIP s software ZIP UnZip and related utilities is free and can be obtained as source code or executables from various bulletin board services and anonymous ftp sites including CompuServe s IBMPRO forum and ftp uu net pub archiving zip INTERNET SOFTWARE CONSORTIUM Copyright 1996 by Internet Software Consortium Permission to use copy modify and distribute this software for any purpose with or without fee is hereby granted provided that the above copyright notice and this
133. and four 1 OBASE T 100BASE TX ports Table 3 4 and Table 3 5 show the connector specifications on these ports c 10BASE T on yo E Z 5 SEH Geier u A aar m z S LINE ERR Y T R MEM CARD 0 fg oe FERFE ept A pea VT OE EELER OOO eee o ZA _ ines LINE2 LINE1 LINEO Figure 3 6 RMP Front Panel View GR2K GA 1002 3 5 Rev 6 03 GR2000 Installation Guide Switch and LED indication Table 3 3 RMP switch and function of LED indications Name of switch Switch or LED Status Content TATUS RM LED Green Shows the Green Operable operation Yellow Red operating Yellow Blocked condition of RM Green blinking Under preparation being started up Red Fault or shutdown Extinguished Operation not possible Including the device power supply being turned off POWER LED Green Shows the state of Green Voltages of 5V and 3 3V of RMP are normal power supply Extinguished Voltages of 5V and 3 3V of RMP are not the turned on or off specified voltage Fault in power supply unit or RMP board or power supply switch in device is turned off or AC power is not fed READY LED Green Shows the Green Operable operation operable condition Extinguished Operation not possible Including the device of the device power supply being turned off ERROR LED Yellow Shows partial fault Yellow Partial fault has been developed in the device in the device E
134. apter 4 Precautions in Planning Installation sssseseseeeeeees 4 1 The Operation terminal conditions cceseeeceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeseeeeeneeseeeeeeneeseeeeeneeseeseseeeeseeseeeeseeeeenees 4 2 The cross cable specifications show the connection specifications for the cross cables 4 3 M dem EE d rereua cess eee Sone acess estates cece eee cea R ccc ve eauanntevedenandestes OET 4 3 The RP mounting conditions by each model cccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeseeeeseeeseeeeseeeeeesesneeeseeenseeeeeeenes 4 7 RP mounting conditions when using GR2000 10H and GR2000 20H in 100V AC csseeeeeeeees 4 8 Applicable Types and Quantities of RPs by Router Model c ssseccceeseeeseeeeeneeeseseseneeseeenenseeeeenees 4 8 Quantities of NIFs by Router Model 0 ccccesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeneeseeeeeneeseeseseneeseaneneeeseeseeneeesesseneeeeeeseenees 4 9 BCU Memory Increment by Router Model cceceeeeceeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseseneeeesseeneeseeseeeeeeensneneets 4 11 RP Memory Increment by RP Type sseccceseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeneeeeeseseeeesesnesneeeseseseeeeseseeeneeseeseeeneeenseneeens 4 11 100BASE TX Line ACCOMMOAATION c ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeee see eeeeeeeseeeeeneeseeeeeneeeseeeseneeseeeeeneeseeeeeeeenseeeeeees 4 11 100BASE FX Line ACCOMMOAATION c eccccceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeneeseeeesneeeseseeeneeseeeeeneeseeseeseenseeeesnens 4 12 WAN Line Accommodation per N
135. ar end of the chassis is in the O out position When the power supply is duplexed redundant make sure in two positions Figure 6 55 shows how to connect the AC input power cable to GR2000 10 The steps are as follows l Ensure that the power switch in the front end of the chassis is in the O out position When the power supply is duplexed redundant make sure in two positions Insert the receptacle on the input power cable firmly to the plug beneath the power switch When the power supply is duplexed do this in two positions If necessary fix the input power cable with the cable clamp When the power supply is duplexed repeat the fixation in two positions Front Power switch a this connection work requires expertise the work must be conducted by qualified personnel The steps are as follows 1 Procure the DC input power cable in compliance with the specifications shown below When the power supply is duplexed redundant procure two cables Cord structure 3 wire a AWG No of each conductor determined by ampacity 10 Cord diameter determined by cable clamp 16mm or smaller a Size of wire binding screw on terminal board M5 2 Ensure that the breaker switch in the front end of the chassis is in the O out position When the power supply is duplexed make sure in two positions 3 In the rear end of the chassis detach the cover from the input unit and connect each terminal wire of the input power cable f
136. as Figure 3 54 Q ACT G T R G LINE ERR Y LOOP Y E1 2Mbps TTT Me LINE 7 LINE6 LINE5 LINE4 LINE3 LINE2 LINE1 LINE O Figure 3 54 NWE1 8 Front Panel View Switch and LED indication Table 3 84 NEW1 8 switch and function of LED indications STATUS LED Green Shows the operating Green Operable operation Yellow Red condition of NIF Green blinking Under preparation Program being loaded Yellow Blocking and the board replaceable state ACT LINE ERR 1 Line state Being initialized Detail of state State as seen by SXMP Being initialized 3 Line state indication in MMI and browser initialize Being operated In normal operation In standby 3 active up Line fault being occurred In operation line fault being occurred 8 active down Line test Line being tested 9 test In fault In fault 4 fault Command being blocked In maintenance 10 closed Not used Configuration definition not set yet Not used Configuration definition not set yet 10 unused Configuration definitions not agreed 1 G Lights in green Y Lights in yellow Goes off 2 Meaning and value of SMNP private MIB and gr2kPhysLineOperStatus 3 The T R LED lights and goes off by H W In lighting conditions this LED lights in green when the logical value of Configuration definitions not agreed 11
137. ation ensure that the rack and t router meet the minimum service clearance requirements the cooling requiremen and the general rules as previously mentioned Then follow one of the procedure below depending on the scale of the subject model small medium or large Rack Mount Installation of Small Scale Chassis GR2000 2S GR2000 4 GR2000 4S GR2000 6H Figure 6 27 to Figure 6 30 show the rack mount installation of GR2000 2S GR2000 4 GR2000 4S and GR2000 6H unit mm The steps are as follows 1 Prepare the 19 inch rack considering the dimensions of the router chassis The inner depth of the rack must accommodate the depth of the router chassis plus minimum cable clearance 30mm on the front end for interfa cables and 70mm on the rear end for power cables For GR2000 2S 4S depth 480 mm the inner depth of the rack must be at least 580mm For GR2000 4 depth 600 mm the inner depth of the rack must be at least 700mm If a rack with a door is selected make sure that the distance between the chassis front end and the inner surface of the door satisfies t said minimum cable clearance 30mm 25 29 Interface cable Power calbe Metal bracket accessory of rack 19 inch rack 19 inch rack Metal bracket accessory of rae EC Guide rail screw x 4 Approx mass 25kg full options installed Approx dimensions H x W x D 133mm x 440mm x 480mm Metal bracket accessory of r
138. ation system for each VPN using software version of the LSP can not be transferred and the restriction on the number of VPNs per MPLS net has been eliminated Table 4 87 shows the contents of the TLV used Table 4 87 Contents of the TLV used U bit 1 F bit 1 Type 0x3E00 Vender ID 0X87 Date VPN ID 8 bytes 1 255 Remote VPN ID 8 bytes 1 255 The relationship between VPN ID and VPN depends on the software version 4 15 4 3 Versions prior to Ver 05 00 The VPN ID is a number of single significance in the MPLS net wherein an assem 5 1 Installation Site Condition Environmental Requirements Temperature and Humidity To guarantee normal operation of the GR2000 router observe the temperature a humidity specifications of Table 5 1 In daily usage also observe the following m Do not place the router near a source of heat or a steam H Avoid direct sunlight Do not set up the router near a humidifier or water heater Dust conditions for this router must meet the criteria of Table 5 2 in falling dust measurement or floating dust mass density measurement A sample process of falling dust measurement is shown in Figure 5 1 When the measured value exceeds the acceptable range and when the conductor and insulator are heavily covered in dust appropriate protection such as shortening of the periodic inspection cycle addition of a dust proof case and air purification are required depe
139. ations on installation of RP C boards and NIF modules supporting them For more information see adding enhanced features in Section 7 1 1 2 The MPLS or MPLS based IP VPN feature is not available for the GR2000 2S 4S GR2K GA 1002 2 33 Rev 6 03 GR2000 Installation Guide 2 4 4 Network Interface Module NIF The NIF provides Layer 1 and Layer 2 support for various WAN and LAN interfaces The NIF includes half size and full size boards See Table 2 5 for a list of NIF modules Table 2 5 List of NIF Modules Module Name Interface LAN NE100 8T 10BASE T 100BASE TX 8 ports half NE100 8TA 10BASE T 100BASE TX 8 ports VRRP and MPLS supported half NE100 8TB 10BASE T 100BASE TX 8 ports VRRP MPLS VLAN band control half supported NE100 4F 100BASE FX long wavelength 1300 nm normal multimode fiber 4 half ports NE100 4FS 100BASE FX middle long wavelength 1300 nm middle distance half single mode fiber 4 ports NE100 4FS4 100BASE FX long long wavelength 1300 nm long distance half single mode fiber 4 ports NE1G 1S 1000BASE SX short wavelength 850 nm 1 port full NE1G 1SA 1000BASE SX short wavelength 850 nm 1 port VRRP supported full NE1G 1SB 1000BASE SX short wavelength 850nm 1 full port VRRP MPLS VLAN band control supported NE1G 1L 1000BASE LX long wavelength 1300 nm 1 port full NE1G 1LA 1000BASE LX long
140. ble operation Yellow Red operating Yellow Blocking and cock insertion and removal possible condition of RM Green blinking Under preparation being started up Red Fault or shutdown Extinguished Operation not possible Including the device power supply being turned off EMA SUPPRESS LED Yellow Shows the state of Yellow If both of the operation and standby systems or GR2000 4S EMA SUPPRESS only the operation system are lit it shows that the system key and the is in switching suppression state according to the system switching instructions of turning the operation system EMA suppressionstate SUPPRESS switch on or EMA SUPPRESS by means of software If only the standby system is lit since it shows that the EMA SUPPRESS switch of the standby system is turned on keep the switch turned off In this case the system switching is not suppressed Extinguished Shows that it is not in the system switching suppression state Including the device power supply being turned off ACTIVE LED Green Shows the state of Green Shows the state of operation Lights up GR2000 4S operation standby continuously when not duplicated of the duplicated Extinguished Shows the standby state Including the section device power supply being turned off POWER LED Green Shows the state of Green Voltages of 5V and 3 3V of RMP are normal power supply Extinguished Voltages of 5V and 3 3V of RMP are not the turned on or off specif
141. cceeseeeee eee eeeeeee eee neeeee eee seeeneeeeseeeneeseeseeeeeeeeseeeneeseaseeneneeeseseneeees 4 68 4 9 1 Connection with IPV6 Router ue eeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeseaeeeeeeseaeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeseeeeeeees 4 68 4 9 1 1 Interface Address of Point to Point Type Line ee eeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 68 4 9 1 2 Caution on BGP4 Connection Using Point to Point Type Une 4 68 4 9 1 3 Caution When Changing the MTU Length of IPv6 Relay Lime 4 69 4 9 1 4 Hardware relaying function in the same link 000 0 eee ce eeeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteneeeeeeeneneeeees 4 69 4 9 1 5 Destination IPv6 address of Ping6 and traceroute6 Commande sesssscesseeeeeseeeeen 4 71 4 9 1 6 IPv6 function that can be used at IPv6 relaying software processing ceeeeeees 4 71 4 10 Precautions on IPX Connection ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeenenseeeesneeeseseesneeseeeesneeesesesseeeseeeeenens 4 73 45 0 1 Contiguration Setting S sccsisteiiecrsteacteest tens ele heat eege RENE EE viet eee 4 73 4 10 1 1 Setting of RIP Packet Processing ssesessssessssrnnesssnnnesrnnnneennnnnerttennecnnnnnestnenneennannenne 4 73 4 10 1 2 Setting of SAP Packet Processing ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaeeeeenee 4 73 4 10 1 3 Handling of Non Data backeis 4 73 471 0 1 4 Use of NetWare 4 deeg eegene deed deed g dee eege 4 74 4104 5 IPA Conneccion with ISDN semerre ieedit yi ecececespnacedeesanedetec
142. ce Rating Poles Wires Router Model GE 100 NEMA 5 15R 125V 15A 2 poles GR2000 2S 2 wires GR2000 4S ground GR2000 6H 0 GR2000 10H IT GR2000 4 and GR2000 10 Cannot be purchased from Hitach 200 NEMA 6 15R 250V 15A _ 2 poles GR2000 2S 2 wires GR2000 4S ground GR2000 6H g GR2000 4 O GR2000 10 and GR2000 20 Cannot be purchased Electrical noise generated by other devices might cause failure When you plan the power supply consider the following to enhance anti noise capability Do not connect a foreign device to the branch circuit for this router especially a device that switches on off repeatedly e g an airconditioner with a relay or microswitch Ground for this device must be connected directly to the grounding panel or be used exclusively for this device Anti electric noise circuit must be installed in the device generating the electrical noise Two types of cables power cables and signal cables are connected to the router Since their electric characteristics are different do not tie or bundle these cables together when routing When a communication line is routed inside the building do not route it along the power supply section including the power cable This router includes a noise filter to prevent failure caused by electrical noise As a result a ground current of up to 3 5 mA per device goes through the ground Make sure you are obligated to set up the leakage circuit breake
143. ce type LOBASE T or 1OOBASE TX and the full duplex half duplex mode setting between GR2000 s configuration definition and the oth router s interface status Otherwise connection will fail 100BASE FX GR2000 can be defined to operate either in full duplex fixed mode or in half dup fixed mode on 1OOBASE FX Set up the configuration information in accordance w the line speed of the neighbor connection device e g media converter 1000BASE SX 1000BASE LX 1000BASE LH GR2000 can operate only in full duplex fixed mode on 1OOOBASE SX This router supports IEEE802 1Q Tag VLAN but it does not support IEEE802 1p priority control 4 5 WAN Networking Restrictions 4 5 1 Required Settings on GR2000 for Connecting Other Devices on PPP Connecting GR2000 to certain devices on PPP sometimes require specific setting of configuration definition options on GR2000 as shown in Table 4 77 For the configuration definition operation see Subsection 3 7 1 in Configuration Guide Table 4 77 PPP Configuration Definition Settings Required with Specific Devices Target Device Required Setting on GR2000 Required Setting on Target Device NP220 None default None default NP200 None default NP200 Ver04 02 or below Set LQR Nego parameter quality monitor protocol or PPP property to No 4 5 2 4 4 5 2 5 utilizes InverseARP protocol in compliance with RFC1293 RFC2390 Since InverseARP is not a mandatory requirement certain produc
144. ces The number of units to which IP addresses are given is called the number of interfaces See Table 4 34 for the maximum number of interfaces The values shown are for the communication interfaces and hence do not count the RM Ethernet connection interface for the router management In addition the maximum number of interfaces assumes static routing For the case of dynamic routing such as RIP or OSPF the effective number of interfaces largely depends on the route calculation performance of the subject protocol 4 2 7 1 Maximum Number of Neighbor Routers Definition of the maximum number of neighbor routers varies with routing protoc as shown below Table 4 36 shows the maximum number of neighbor routers ba on the definition by each routing protocol m For static routing the number of next hop addresses For RIP the number of interfaces on which RIP operates m For OSPF In a network where this router is the OSPF designated router the numbe all the other OSPF routers in the network In a network where this router is not the OSPF designated router the num of interfaces on which OSPF operates H For BGP4 the number of BGP peers Table 4 36 Maximum Number of Neighbor Routers Routing Protocol Maximum Number of Neighbor Routers Static routing 3584 Routing No of Higher Installed Max No of Route Max No of Neighbor Peers Protocol Peers Memory Entries Multipath Not Used Multipath Used 120 000 1
145. cescadsnscaasecovacvaadavdueudasatedevcddeccduecec cadsccdscsnncsd 3 67 xliv GR2K GA 1002 Rev 6 03 AC Input Unit and DC DC Power Unit of POW M100H and PO MIOOHA EES SREEEERNEEe 3 68 AC Input Unit and DC DC Power Unit of POW M200H and POW M200HA cs eceesseeseeeeeeeees 3 69 DC Input Unit and DC DC Power Unit of POW MDCH and POW MDCHA csccssecssseeeeseeeseeeeeees 3 70 AC Input Unit and DC DC Power Unit of POW L200H and POW L200HA 2 ccsecceeeeeeesseeeeeseees 3 71 DC Input Unit and DC DC Power Unit of POW LDCH and POW LDCHA sccsseceesseesseeeeneeeeeeees 3 72 Power Unit ot POW GT OO a a aaa aae a a a aae aeea Aerea aaa Ma aa a aa e aa aa aaa a eaaa Aa aaa aa a adie iaaii 3 73 Power Unit of POW M100 and POW L100 ssssssssneunnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnunnnnunnnnunnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn 3 73 DC Power Unit of POW MDC and POW LDC c cscccssseeeeeeeeeeeneeeeneeeeeseaeseeseeeeseaeseaneeeenseeseseeseseaeeeeenes 3 74 MS64 and MS128 Memory MOdull cccscccseecceeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeesseeeeneeeeessaesaseeeesesaesaseeeeeseeseseaeeeneees 3 74 MC30 and MC64 Flash Memory Card Module ssecccseseeeeesseeeeeeeseeeneeeseseseneeeesneeneeseeseeeneeenseeenaees 3 75 AC Input Power Cord EE 3 75 WAN Loop Connect ENNEN EEN iiaa E A Ee E A Ae iii aA e i iiia 3 76 V 24 V 35 X 21 Interface Cable Connections cccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeesneeeseeeeeneeseeeeeneeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeenes 3
146. cesseeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeneeeseeeeneeeseeeeeneeeseseeeneeseeeeseneeesneneseeeeenenes 3 41 NWT3 2U switch and function of LED indications ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 42 NWT3 2U switch and function of LED indication ecceeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseeceneeeeeeeeeees 3 43 Connector Specifications for NWT3 2U ccesseeneeceeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeseeeeeneeeseeeeeneeseeseseeeeseeeneseeeeenenes 3 43 NWE3 2U switch and function of LED indications ceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeseneeeeeneeseeeeeeeeneees 3 44 NWE3 2U switch and function of LED indication ecceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseseeeeeeeeseeseeeeeneees 3 45 Connector Specifications for NWE3 2U cccccseeneceseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeneeeseeeeeneeseeeeeeeseseeneeeseeeeenenes 3 45 NWE3 1C switch and function of LED indications ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeneeeeeaeeeseeeeeeeeneees 3 46 NWE3 1C switch and function of LED indication eeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeneees 3 47 Connector Specifications for NWE3 1C cccsseeneeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeneeseeeesneeeseseseneeseeeeseeseeesneneseeeeenenes 3 47 NWOC3C 2S NWOC3C 2M NWOC3C 2SD NWOC3C 2MD switch and function of LED indi Cation occ cccci csc etaan aa EENS vi SERGE EEN CSN 3 48 NWOC3C 2S NWOC3C 2M NWOC3C 2SD NWOC3C 2MD switch and function of LED Gi Cati On EE 3 49 Connec
147. connected routers and bridges are set to use the same level of the spanning tree protocol IEEE802 1 The following timers used for the spanning tree in this router are set so that they operate earlier than the normal bridge router If operation is carried out in a network in which a bridge router other than this router is combined adjust the timer values by using the spanning tree configuration definition if any inconvenience occurs because of the relationship with the other router Timer type Default value of this router Normal default value Max age time 18 20 Forward delay time 10 15 where frames are bridge relayed among specified interfaces In the event that you add the bridge definition to an existing interface with multiple DLCIs in partial m or full mesh network configuration you must redefine a single interface into mult interfaces each with a single DLCI Conversely in the event that you plan a new network where the bridge interface definition is anticipated you are advised to prepare a network where each interface comprises only one DLCI LAN2 Router2 DLCI3 eo J LAN1 Router1 DCH Frame Rel DLCl2 SE LAN Router3 DLCI4 4 11 6 When bridge is defined on an interface where multiple VCs are grouped BPDUs or relay frames not learned are broadcast to all the VCs in the group Consequently it is cautioned that an inadvertent addition of bridge definition to an existing grouped interf
148. core SC 2 core 1 core Device H kH Single mode optical fiber 2 5 1 3 ATM Ilustrated below are the ATM interface cables and connectors All these interface cables are to be procured by the customer OC 3c STM 1 150M ATM OC 12c STM 4 600M ATM MMF SC 2 core 1 core SC 2 core 1 core Multimode optical fiber OC 3c STM 1 150M ATM OC 12c STM 4 600M ATM SMF SC 2 core 1 core SC 2 core 1 core Device H kH Single mode optical fiber 25Mbps ATM RJ 45 RJ 45 UTP category 3 4 5 4 core 8 core 2 pair straight 2 5 2 Network Connections 2 5 2 1 LAN Connection This device router connects to a server terminal or a LAN switch via a hub m es PC and WS etc 2 44 GR2K GA 1002 Rev 6 03 Product Overview 2 5 2 2 WAN Connection The following WAN connections are possible Leased line connection Connects to a leased line via modem Device NI Y M Modem Highspeed digital line connection Connects to a highspeed digital leased line via DSU Device DSU Highspeed Digital Line DSU Device Frame relay network connection Connects to a frame relay network via DSU Device DSU Frame Relay Network DSU Device Ultrahighspeed digital line connection Connects to a ultrahighspeed digital line via DSU Device DSU Ultrahighspeed Digital Linel DSU Device ISDN Network Connection Connects to an ISDN network via DSU Device DSU ISDN Network DSU Device 2 5 2 3 ATM Connection Connects to ATM Service
149. d Specific Caution Instructions AA Caution This is a caution notice Follow the instructions in this notice to avoid damage to the equipment or a disruption in service H Condensation may form on the surface and inside the device if it is moved from a cold to a warm location Using the device in this condition may cause fire or electric shock After moving the device between two locations with a large temperature variation let the device stand for a few hours before using Do not block the device s ventilation Move the device carefully Before moving the device unplug the power cable disconnect all exterior devices and remove the stabilization clamps Failure to follow this warning may damage the device or power cable causing fire or electric shock Do not hold the device by the front and back when moving the cover may come off causing the device to fall Do not subject the device to extreme temperatures Do not place the device in direct sunlight or near heat sources that may cause damage H A yellow label designates that a Class 1 laser is being used Light emission is minimal and not hazardous but avoid looking directly into the laser beam Approximate weights of the GR2000 models are as follows GR2000 2S Approx 15 kg 33 Ibs GR2000 4 Approx 25 kg 55 Ibs a GR2000 4S Approx 21 kg 46 lbs GR2000 6H Approx 55 kg 121 Ibs GR2000 10 Approx 85 kg 187 lbs GR2000 10H Approx 120
150. d Note 2 Effective only when the basic plus expansion software6 ROUTE OS6 is applied GR2K GA 1002 Rev 6 03 2 39 GR2000 Installation Guide 2 9 2 5 1 Connections Interface Cables and Connectors Most interface cables are customer responsibilities Prepare appropriate interface cables with connectors according to Table 2 10 Further explanation follows Table 2 10 Specifications of Interface Cables and Connectors Physical Interface NIF Name Cable Specifications Notes Length m Connector Max 10BASE T NE100 8T UTP category 3 4 5 4 8 core 2 pair 100 RJ 45 NE100 8TA straight NE100 8TB 100BASE TX NE100 8T UTP category 5 8 core 4 pair straight 100 RJ 45 NE100 8TA NE100 8TB 100BASE FX NE100 4F Multimode optical fiber of 62 5 125 um 2 2k SC 2 core core clad 1300 nm wavelength NE100 4FS Single mode optical fiber of 10 125 um 2 15k GC 2 core core clad 1300 nm wavelength NE100 4FS4 Single mode optical fiber of 10 125 um 2 40k GC 2 core core clad 1300 nm wavelength 1000BASE SX NE1G 1S Multimode optical fiber of 50 125 mm 2 550 SC 2 core NE1G 1SA core clad 850 nm wavelength 500 MHz NE1G 1SB band NE1G 4C Multimode optical fiber of 62 5 125um 2 220 SC 2 core GBIC SX core clad 1300 nm wavelength 160 MHz band 1000BASE LX NE1G 1L Multimode optical fiber of 50 125 mm 2 550 SC 2 core NE1G 1LA core clad 850 nm wavel
151. d from the cargo A Caution This component is subject to damage from static electricity Before you are familiar with how to handle it in 6 2 do not unwrap the component Memory module polyethylene or vinyl bag Carton 6 2 When unpacking a separately shipped cable see Figure 6 13 Make sure that all parts in the packing list are obtained from the cargo Cable polyethylene or vinyl ba Bree Carton Figure 6 13 Unpacking of Separately Shipped Cable Handling of Components Subject to Static Electricity This section describes how to install the chassis of GR2000 2S GR2000 10H GR2000 20H GR2000 4 GR2000 10 and GR2000 20 Before installing a target model make sure the allowable style of installation according to Table 6 1 where X means applicable and NA means not applicable Also determine the desktop floor rack mount installation layout including minimum service clearance and area for airway in accordance with 3 1 and Subsection 5 2 7 Table 6 1 Allowable Style of Installation by Router Model Router Model Allowable Style of Installation Desktop Floor Rack Mount GR2000 2S X NA X GR2000 4S X NA X GR2000 6H X NA X GR2000 10H NA X X GR2000 20H NA X X GR2000 4 X NA X GR2000 10 NA X X In this style of installation place the router chassis to meet the minimum service clearance requirements the cooling requirements and the general rules as previously mentioned
152. d if the router is DTE Separate contact is required if it is DCE signal ground data set ready input call indicator input carrier detect of data channel receive input clear to send input data terminal ready output send element timing 2 input send element timing 1 output send data output receive data input No connection output receive element timing input request to send output No connection test indicator input Shield frame ground GR2K GA 1002 Rev 6 03 Component Details 3 5 9 NWVX 8 The NWVX 8 physically appears as Figure 3 26 Co V LINE ERR V 24 V 35 X 21 LINE 3 65 G ACT T R LINE 7 LINE 6 5 LINE 3 LINE 2 LINE 5 LINE 4 LINE 1 LINE 0 Figure 3 26 NWVX 8 Front Panel View Switch and LED indication Table 3 26 NWVX 8 switch and function of LED indications LED Color Status Content LED Green Shows the operating Green Operable operation Yellow Red condition of NIF Yellow Blocking and the board replaceable state Green blinking Under preparation Program beingloaded Red Fault Extinguished Operation not possible Including thedevice power supply being turned off LED Green Shows the operating Line operation open state condition of each line Green State of transmission and reception signals in line LED Yellow Yellow Line fault detec
153. de optical fiber POS DSU 5 short OC 48c STM 16 Router Device 0 5 2k 1 Single mode optical fiber Pin No Specifications Unused Unused Transmit Receive Receive Transmit Unused 8 Unused Note Because of being a twisted pair cable make pairs of A and a and B and b using the ab pin assignment For pins other than these do not care about the pairing either unconnected or connected can be accepted N og Ou A Gol N A Carrier e g NTT Customer facility facility i Customer setup length L1 bus connection with up to 8 modular rosettes INS Net 64 DSU Flat metal cable 4 wire or SD 164 En EE 3 10 2 2 modular rosette Modular rosette without terminator with terminator Device without terminator Flat metal cable 4 wire Note This connection requires costs for extra connection work and modular rosette in addition to those for ordinary cabling and DSU setup For details of the connection work consult the carrier e g NTT Figure 3 89 Connection to Device without Terminator UTP Cable for Primary 1 431 or 1 431 a For connection to the Primary 1 431 or I 431 a interface a UTP Category 3 4 or 5 cable shown in Figure 3 90 is required Figure 3 91 shows an example of indirect connection between the router and the DSU via a modular rosette on this interface For indirect connection to DSU via modular rosette me ana
154. e eceeceeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeennseneaeeaeeeseseeeeeeeseaneneeeseeeeeneeas 6 22 GR2000 2S Rack Mount Installation cseecccceseeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeneeseeeeeeeeeseeeenneeseeseeeseeeeeseenseeeesnne 6 24 GR2000 4S Rack mount Installation cccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ee eeeeeeeseeeeeeee see eeseeeeseeeeseeeseeseeeseeeeeseeeseeeeseene 6 25 GR2000 6H Rack mount Installation cccesseeeceeeeeeee eee eeeeeeeseeeeeneeseeeeeneeeseeeeeneeseseesneeseeeeesnenseeeesene 6 26 GR2000 4 Rack Mount Installation 0 cccccseeeeeee cee cece eee een e nese eee ee ee ee eens gene aeaeeeeeeseeseeneeeseeseenaeeneeneees 6 27 GR2000 10H Rack Mounit Installation cccccesecceseeeeeseeeeseeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeeeeesaaeseeeeeesscaeseeeeeeeseeseseeeeeees 6 29 GR2000 10 Rack Mounit Installation cccccesseeeeeeeeeeee eee eeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeseseeeneeseeseseeenseeeeseene 6 30 Use of Hand Lift in Rack Mount Installation of GR2000 10H and GR2000 10 s sseeeseseeeeeees 6 31 Alternative Mounting of GR2000 10 onto Rack by Hand ccccccsseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeesseeneeeensees 6 32 GR2000 20H Rack Mounit Installation c cccessecsseeceeeseeeeseeeeeeeeseeseeeeeeeeeeesaesenseeesssaeseseeeeesseeseseeeeees 6 34 GR2000 20 Rack Mounit Installation ccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeesneeeseeeeeneeseeeenneeseeeeseeeseeeesnene 6 35 GR2000 20H Dimensions with
155. e 2 15 Front View of GR2000 4 AC Input Keelt BE E Power switch Power switch Power cord Power cord receptacle receptacle Figure 2 16 Rear View of GR2000 4 AC Input 2 12 GR2K GA 1002 Rev 6 03 Product Overview Placement of RM IO and NIF boards and power supply units NIF LED status indicator Memory card slot 0 MOd L MOd Power switch RS 232C connector Power cord receptacle Figure 2 17 Front View of GR2000 10 with AC Input AC power cord clamp Placement of RM CPU and RP boards Figure 2 18 Rear View of GR2000 10 with AC Input GR2K GA 1002 2 13 Rev 6 03 GR2000 Installation Guide Fan Placement of RM IO and NIF boards and power supply units LED status indicator Memory card slot L MOd RS 232C connector Breaker Power cord receptacle Figure 2 19 Front View of GR2000 10 with DC Input Placement of RM CPU and RP boards Terminal block for receiving DC input power M5 x 3 x2 covered CPU 4 3 2 1 0 CPU Figure 2 20 Rear View of GR2000 10 with DC Input 2 14 GR2K GA 1002 Rev 6 03 Product Overview LED status indicator Memory card slot RS 232C connector Power Switch Power cord receptacle Vi _ gt 100 F
156. e IPX and Bridge accommodation limits Table 4 41 IPX Accommodation Limits Router Model GR2000 6H Max No of Static ARP Entries 256 device Max No of IPX Interfaces Max No of Routing Per RP Per Router Table Entries GR2000 10H 256 device GR2000 20H 256 device 1 Total of static and dynamic entries Table 4 42 Bridge Accommodation Limits Router Model Max No of Bridge Interfaces Max No of Filtering Database Entries Per RP Per Router GR2000 6H 32 96 2 000 GR2000 10H 32 160 2 000 maximum number of dynamic entries and static entries Use the device so that t total value of dynamic and static entries does not exceed the maximum number o entries for the device Using the device at the maximum entry capacity requires mounted memory amount shown in 3 Minimum required memory Table 4 44 Maximum Number of Dynamic and Static Entries Item Maximum Limit Total Dynamic Static IP unicast route entries 2 000 000 router 2 000 000 router 3 000 router IP multicast route entries 10 000 router 10 000 router ARP entries 4 096 RP 4 096 RP 4 096 router IPX routing table entries 1 000 router 1 000 router 200 router IPX ARP entries 256 router 256 router Bridge filtering database entries 2 000 router 2 000 router 500 router Total maximum per router is determined by number of installable RPs for the target router model
157. e cable length nor the total length of the 3 10 2 6 inner conductor Shield 1 ore er Se JERR Shield 2 Insulator Figure 3 95 Construction of duel shield type coaxial cable Multimode Optical Fiber Cable for OC 3c STM 1 POS MMF Multimode connection with the OC 3c STM 1 POS MMF interface requires an optical fiber cable with the specifications shown in Figure 3 96 One or more cab of the same type is recommended to be prepared for spare For connection to box 1 core FC SC ST connector x 2 box side 15 M M F Graded index single mode fiber of 9 5 125 um 2 core SC core clad 1300 nm wavelength max 2 core SC connector attenuation 1 dB km max 15 km connector Recommended model name Hitachi Optical Fiber Cable SM1005 2F C2SC M cord length in brackets Boundary with network router s connector Figure 3 97 Single Mode Optical Fiber Cable Specifications for OC 3c STM 1 POS SMF and OC 12c STM 4 POS fiber cable with the specifications shown in Figure 3 98 One or more cables of th same type is recommended to be prepared for spare Table 3 99 shows the router optical interface specifications for OC 48c STM 16 POS single mode connection 7 Graded index single mode fiber of 9 5 125 um 4 2 core SC core clad 1300 nm wavelength max 2 core SC connector attenuation 0 3 dB km max 2 km or 40 km connector Recommended model name Hitachi Optical Fiber Cable SM1005 2M C2SC M cord length in brackets Bo
158. e of the door satisfies t said minimum cable clearance 30mm The width of the opening of the rack must accommodate the width of the router chassis plus minimum allowance of 10mm for the thickness of me brackets to be attached to both sides of the chassis For GR2000 20H and GR2000 20 width 440 mm the width of the opening of the rack must be least 450mm Mount the load bearing guide rail accessory of the rack on the rack Make s that the guide rail can sustain the mass of the chassis max 160kg per GR2000 20H and max 190kg per GR2000 20 Align the guide rails to suppo the bottom of the chassis and if another router is to be mounted above this router to secure a space of 1U 44 45 mm or more on top of the router when mounted Approx dimensions H x W x D 890mm excluding caster x 440 m x 600mm 30 Rear 600 Chassis Front 70 Interface cable Power cable Guide rail l Approx dimensions H x W x D 1430mm including caster x A4 m x 600mm 30 600 70 70 600 30 Front Front Interface cable Power cable Interfa cable Guide rail 38 Peds 133 35 177 8 177 8 Open rack Device fitting screw hole Dedicated guide rail edicated bracket supplied with the evice fitting screws 19 inch Rack GR2000 20H or GR2000 20 bei a S 5 6 4 1 This section describes how to rou
159. e personnel 8 2 1 GR2000 4S Turn off the power switch on the back panel release the cable retainer and remove the power cord ir Power switch 4 Caution The power source unit is heavy about 8kg be sure to support it firmly from below with both hands when installing or removing l Caution The power source unit is heavy about 8kg be sure to support it firmly from ai below with both hands when installing or removing 8 2 3 1 Input Unit AC or DC 1 Turn off the power switch AC input or the breaker switch DC input on the Input Unit and unplug the power cord from the Input Unit 2 Follow the instructions illustrated in Figure 8 4 Although the figure shows the case of AC input the same instructions apply to the case of DC input OJOJ OTO OF OT OJ Of o Je D OO 2 Follow the instructions illustrated in Figure 8 5 DC DC unit power switch 8 2 4 1 Input Unit AC or DC 1 Turn off the breaker switch on the Input Unit and unplug the power cord from the Input Unit 2 Ifthe Input Unit is for AC input detach the cover in front of the target Input Unit as illustrated in Figure 8 6
160. e shown below To add or remove the fans to from each model of GR2000 other than GR2000 2S refer to the following subsections integral to chassis When addition or removal of such a fan is necessitated on k Note The fans of GR2000 2S cannot be added or removed by the user because they are GR2000 2S entrust work to trained service personnel k Note For models other than GR2000 2S certain fans cannot be added or removed by the user For fans not described in this section entrust work to trained service personnel 8 3 1 Fan Tray for GR2000 10H To add or remove the fan tray for GR2000 10H follow the instructions illustrated Figure 8 13 To add or remove the fan tray for GR2000 20H follow the instructions illustrated in Figure 8 14 Fan tray To add or remove the CPU fan for GR2000 4 GR2000 10 and GR2000 20 follow instructions illustrated in Figure 8 15 When adding be sure to attach the safety clamp to the socket hook to anchor the CPU fan Safety clamp Fix the CPU fan by hooking safety clamp to the socket hook To add or remove the fans to from each model of GR2000 other than GR2000 2S refer to the following subsections Note The main memory modules of GR2000 2S cannot be added or removed by the A user because RM CPU and RMP of GR2000 2S are integral to chassis When addition or removal of main memory module is necessitated on GR2000 2S entrust work to trained service
161. eby model GR2000 4S 4 39 IPv6 accommodating conditions and functions provided thereby Model GR2000 6H 1 OH 20H ceecceeseceeeeeeeneneeeenaeeseseeeeeaessanaeeeeneeesasaaesenseeessaesseaesegeeeesesaeseneeeeeees 4 40 BCU minimum required Memory ccceceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeneeeeeseeneseneeseseeeneeseeseeeeeeseseeeneeseeseeneneenseenenees 4 41 RP minimum required MEMOLY ecccceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseseeeneeseeseeeneesesneeneeseeseeneeesesaeeeeeseeseeeeeenseeeanes 4 42 Number of NDP entries i eise SEENEN SEENEN cerdecwechbacddeccsceedsacet ES 4 42 Number of mlerfages 2ssegcoesu see gedeeeEE sche dente ee ege EEEe CECR EES Deeg 4 43 Maximum Number of Addresses to be Set in MUulti HOme cccsssseeeesseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeneeeseenenenes 4 43 Number of Tunnel Interfaces cc se see cence eee ee eee eene eee ae ence eee ee eee ea neane eee eee seeeeee sag nnmnnn nenn nanenane nenn 4 44 Number of IPv6 AddreSSes aaia aaraa aae a aaraa aea aaa a aaa Dearm cbeduerseasaedeecccateudacersavecacecccecdazess cues 4 44 Number of Addresses Set by Configuration Definition Information ssss ssssuunnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnna 4 45 Maximum Number of Adjacent ROUuter S ccsecccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeseeeeeneeseesesneeeseeeesneesaeeesnenesesesenanes 4 45 Relation Between Number of Route Entries and Maximum Number of Adjacent Peers 4 46 Relation Between Number of Route Entries and Li
162. ect GR2000 with other vendor s router on POS interface set up the configuration definition on GR2000 according to Table 4 79 Table 4 79 Configuration Definition on GR2000 for POS in Multivendor Environment Definition Item Parameter Sync clock clock Selectable Options Default Underlined independent external Required Setting To connect to the network requiring synchronization alter the setting from independent to external Avoid clock closed loops Refer to 2 below CRC crc 16 32 Make the setting identical between GR2000 and the other device The default of GR2000 16 is preferred if the other device does not support it alter the setting on GR2000 to 32 scramble scramble_off scramble scramble_off scramble Make the setting identical between GR2000 and the other device The default of GR2000 scramble_off is preferred if the other device does not support it alter the setting on GR2000 to scramble Do not set this device and the opposing device simultaneously in network Restrictions applicable to NWJ1 8U circuit multiplex connections When mounting NWJ1 8U in the device and setting the PRI circuit there are limit the number of circuit interfaces and multiplexed time slots NWJ1 8U restriction are given in Table 4 80 Table 4 80 NWJ1 8U connection restrictions interface Time slots start Posible Time The number number slots time slots
163. ections ccccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenseeeeeeeneeeeeeensneeeeeeenseceeeensseneensaeeeeeeenseseeenenes 3 85 UTP Cable Specifications for 1OBASE T and 100BASE TX c ecccceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeseeeeeneeseeseeeneneeeeeenenes 3 86 Multimode Optical Fiber Cable Specifications for 10OBASE FX 1000BASE SX and 1000BASE LX ii eessen sees Ee ee ENEE EEN aii 3 87 Single Mode Optical Fiber Cable Specifications for 100BASE FX 1000BASE LX SndrL0O0EBASE LER eebe eege eege EES 3 88 Customer Responsibility WAN Interface Cable CONnnections ccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeenenseeeeenes 3 89 UTP Cable Specifications for Basic 1 430 or 1 430 a ccccceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeneneeeeeeeeeneees 3 90 Connection with Basic 1 430 or 1 430 a ccsse eeeee eee ee seen eee ee eee ne ance eee eee eee ea eeneeeeaeeeseseeseeseeeeeeeeeesees 3 91 Connection to Device Without Terminator ceeccccceseeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeneeseeeeeeneeseeeeeneeseesesneeeeeseeenseeeeenene 3 92 UTP Cable Specifications for Primary 1 431 or 1 431 ccccessseceeeeeneeeeeseeeeeseeee se eneeseeeeeeneneeeeeseenes 3 92 Sample Indirect Connection with Primary 1 431 or 1 431 ccccssssseeeeesseeeeeeenseeeeeeensseeeeeeenseeeeeneees 3 93 UTP Cable for Primary G 703 or ANSI 11 403 cccccssseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeesesneeeeeeeeessaesneseeeeseeseseeeeenes 3 93 Metal Coaxial Cable for Secondary G 703 cccesceseeeeeeeeeeeee
164. ed condition of NIF Yellow Blocking and the board replaceable state lamp tested Green blinking Under preparation Program being The NWTS3 1C physically appears as Figure 3 53 CHANNEL I ZED i 45Mbps LINE ERR LooP act OO Los Figure 3 53 NWT3 1C Front Panel View Switch and LED indication Table 3 81 NWT3 1C switch and function of LED indications LED Color Content STATUS LED Green Shows the operating Green Operable operation Yellow Red condition of NIF Yellow Blocking and the board replaceable state Green blinking Under preparation Program being loaded Line state Being initialized Detail of state State as seen by SXMP Being initialized 3 Line state indication in MMI and browser initialize Being operated In normal operation In standby 3 active up Line fault being occurred In operation line fault being occurred 8 active down Line test Line being tested 9 test In fault In fault 4 fault Command being blocked In maintenance 10 closed Not used Configuration definition not set yet Not used Configuration definition not set yet 10 unused Configuration definitions not agreed 1 G Lights in green Y Lights in yellow Goes off Configuration definitions not agreed 11 mismatch The NWE1 8 physically appears
165. eeeeeaaeeeeseeaaaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeenaeeeeeneas 5 12 5 2 6 Power Consumption and Heat Dissipation 0 22 2 eeeeceeceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeaeeeeeeenaeeeeenees 5 13 5 2 7 Cooling REQuirements nek 5 13 CR EN Ree ET 5 13 5 2 7 2 Cooling Requirements for Desktop or Floor Installation 5 16 5 2 7 3 Cooling Requirements for Rack Mount Installation nennen 5 17 S9 LAY UE 5 17 Chapter 6 Hardware Installation cccccccssssssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeeees 6 1 GT Unpacking nnair a Raa aN AERA rE E a aAa a ST Aa EEeen 6 1 E Re 6 1 612 RMRPNI F MOdUile i ces tg ceade dee centeecet ines Fideant Giada peed deehac be a eae eee aegis 6 9 6 13 Memory Module eneeteeticece edie cece ttetehaceesteet ENEE dadeedutic age edn eed dep eeieed SEENEN EEN 6 10 6 1 4 Flash Memory Card IMC 6 10 xxxviii GR2K GA 1002 Rev 6 03 615 Cable ensidis dddEe d e eege ed eee cee eevee oo eee e 6 11 6 2 Handling of Components Subject to Static Electricity c secccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeesseeeeeeennees 6 11 6 3 Installation ot Chas SiS iae araa eaaa ae SEENEN EENS eaa ada aaa EES ieee 6 12 6 3 1 General Rules for Installation of Chassis ccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeecceaeeeeeeeeeeeeeseesaeaaeaaeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 12 6 3 2 Desktop Installation Of Chasse irsrinarenitininiaan N Aa AEAN 6 13 6 3 3 Floor Installation Of Chassis cccceceeceeneeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeaeceeeeeeeeeeeesecsaaaaeaeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaees 6 14 6 3 3
166. eeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 52 4 5 WAN Networking Restrictions cccccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeenneeseeeeseeeeseeeesneeseeeeseaeeeaseeeeeesenseenseeennees 4 52 4 5 1 Required Settings on GR2000 for Connecting Other Devices on DPP 4 52 4 5 2 Precautions on Frame Relay Network Connecthon 4 52 4 5 2 1 Multivendor Connection Using DLC Group 4 52 4 5 2 2 Packet Format in Frame Relay Connection ccceceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaaees 4 52 4 5 2 3 Use of frping Command in Multivendor Environment 4 53 4 5 2 4 Conditions When Submitting Application Form to Frame Relay Network 4 53 420 Packet Length RENE Seege eeavadect AAA Daa ia Dai PAA PARAS PORA RADARRA TI SAIU 4 53 4 5 3 Precautions on POS Network Conechon 4 56 4 5 3 1 Required Setting on GR2000 for POS in Multivendor Environment 4 56 4 5 3 2 Required Setting on Cisco Systems Router When Connecting GR2000 on Run LTE 4 56 4 5 4 Precautions on J2 Network Connection eeeeeceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeesaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenes 4 56 4 5 5 Cautions regarding PRI circuit connechons 2 ccc ce ceeeeeeeeee cee ceeeeeeeeeeeseceaaeaeceeeeseeseesnnaaeeeeess 4 57 4 5 6 Precautions on Serial line CONNECTION 2 0 2 eee eeeeeeee seen eeeeeeeeeeeeeeteaeeeeeeteaaeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeteeeeeeneeeeeeees 4 57 4 5 7 Precautions on InverseMax Terminal Adapter Connection ssssssssesessssrrrssssrrrssrrrrresrrrenssrns 4 57 4 6 ATM Networking Restrictions
167. eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseseseeeeeeeaeaeaeansneeeenenees 3 28 Precautions when using the cables attached to VX 8 ccsecceseeeeeeeeee eee eeee een eenseneeeaeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 28 Precautions when using the supplied cable for NWVX 8 ecccssseseeeeesseeeeeeenseeeneeeenseeneeeenseseenees 3 29 Size of 50 pin half pitch connector for NWVX 8 cccsseeceeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeseseneeseesesneeeseseseeeseeseenees 3 29 NWUB 8 Front EIN 3 32 NWJ1 4U Front Panel View isccsccccsscisccccceeeccccccceccsccocecccsscadeuess snnnoced ao snsesuassaueesucdsandcenccdeccsnsccccsasnsecadaunees 3 33 NWMX1 4 Front EIN 3 34 NWJ1 8U Front Panel VieW 8 eteegek eeh EAR EENS EAS EENS dened Sauce cduecdccusd saat dewscudedveucctdndd saandeacncewsauecudds 3 35 NWT1 4 Front Panel WITT 3 36 NWE124 Front ICT 3 38 NWJ2 1U0 Front TRATTEN 3 40 NWT3 2U Front Panel View ccccccccsceccscscssssssssssssesseneneseeeneanenensesnenseeseseseeseseseuseseecececacacecesssesseseseess 3 42 NWE3 2U Front Panel WITT 3 44 NWE3 1C Front Panel View 79 AER NER Ee ienaeuss ENEE Ee d sha deecossevsecccuseundvaceasdadNewsauseddes 3 46 NWOC3C 2M NWOC3C 2S NWOC3C 2SD and NWOC3C 2MD Front Panel View 00008 3 48 NWOC3C 8S and NWOC3C 8M Front Panel View cccccccssssssssssseceesceeeseeenseenssaneoesesensnesscaaseeses 3 50 NWOC12C 1S and NWOC12 1SD Front Panel View cccccessssssssessseeeeseeeeeeesnseenssaeeaeeeseeeeenens 3 51 NWOC12 4
168. eeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeseeeeeeensnneeeeeeneeeeeeeneas 8 18 Addition Removal of CPU Fan for GR2000 4 GR2000 10 and GR2000 20 csssscceseeesseeeeeseees 8 19 Addition Removal of Main Memory Module on RM cseeeceeseeeeeeeeeseeneeeeeseeeneeeeeseeneeeseeneneenseesenees 8 20 Addition Removal of Main Memory Module on RP sesseeecesseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseseneeseeseeneseseeneeeennesenenees 8 21 Chapter 9 Software Installation and Updates s seeeeeee 9 1 xlviii GR2K GA 1002 Rev 6 03 List of Tables Chapter 1 General Information ccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeee cess NEEN EE 1 1 Chapter 2 Product Overview eege seed 2 1 Maximum Number of Device Components on Enhanced Models ccssseeeccseseeesesseeeeeeeeseesnenens 2 28 Each cabinet and maximum number of modules that can be mounted Device Cabinet 2 29 Abbreviation for BCU model names and configuration of each device ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 2 29 RP Specifications EE 2 32 ClstoatNiEMogdulee tgiesgebreeegre Sud EE Ee ee EEEeeg 2 34 PS model name for each device ecceeeeeee eee ee cece eee nenneeeeeeeeeeseeeeee saa seaeeseaeeeseeseeesenseseeseeeeaeeeseseeeeeas 2 36 GBIC VIE 2 37 GBIC SX LX LH Physical Specifications Purchasing overseas ssss sseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeseeeeeeeees 2 37 The temperature surveillance threshold value for RMB CPU and RMB lO board ss seeecees 2 38 Specifications of
169. eeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeenens 3 24 Connector Specifications for NWVX 4 Pin Assignment for V 35 eccsesseeeesseeeeeeeeseeeeenseeseenens 3 24 NWVX 8 switch and function of LED indications cccceeeceeeeeeee cence ee eeneeneeneeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeees 3 25 NEW1 8 switch and function of LED indication ceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeenseneeseeneeeeeseeeeneens 3 26 GR2K GA 1002 xlix Rev 6 03 GR2000 Installation Guide Connector Specifications for NWVX 8 Pin Assignment for V 24 0 ccseecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeseeeeeeenes 3 30 Connector Specifications for NWVX 8 Pin Assignment fOr X 21 0 sseeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenenes 3 31 Connector Specifications for NWVX 8 Pin Assignment for V 35 secceceeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeteeeeeeeeeeenes 3 31 NWJB 8 switch and function of LED indications ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeseseneeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeneees 3 32 Connector Specifications for NWJB 8 ccccesseenseeeeseeeeeeeeeneeeseeeesneeseeeeeneeeseeeseneeseeseseeeeeeseeeseneeenenes 3 32 NWJ1 4U switch and function of LED indications cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesneeeeeeeseeeeeeeeneees 3 33 Connector Specifications for NWI1 4U eecceeseeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeneeeseeeeeneeseeeeeneeeseeeesneeseeeenneeeeeeneeeseeeeenne 3 33 WMX 1 4 switch and function of LED indications cceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseseeneeneeeeeeees 3 34 C
170. eeeeeeeseeseseneeseseeeneeseeseeeeeeeeseeeneeseaseeeeeesesesenenees 8 21 8 5 1 Basic Control Unit CU 8 21 8 5 11 ele Tale E RAUEN 8 22 8 5 1 2 Removingia BOW nie een ee eel ae ee rt ed 8 22 875 2 Potto Processor RP ses seiner Reese Eege edel ea eanine aids 8 23 8 5 2 1 Adding an RP EEN 8 23 85 22 Removing an TEE 8 23 8 5 3 Network Interface NIE e aE TE A R 8 23 8 5 3 1 AdO an TEE 8 23 RM Removing an Ce 8 23 xl GR2K GA 1002 Rev 6 03 8 5 3 3 Expansion ot GB ssivci cscess cesses dee iedee cnt a EENS a ANA aa Naa 8 5 3 4 Removal op ablenne Ee sank el 8 24 Chapter 9 Software Installation and Updates sseeeeeeeeees 9 1 91 Mtr CUI EE 9 1 9 2 Supplied Media and Equipment Required sseecccceeeeeeseeeeeneeeeeeeeeneeseeeeeneeseeeeeneeeseeeeenenseeeeeeaes 9 1 GR2K GA 1002 xli Rev 6 03 GR2000 Installation Guide This page left intentionally blank xlii GR2K GA 1002 Rev 6 03 List of Figures Chapter 1 General Information ccc ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeeeeees 1 1 Outline Of Installation neesii aE N E OE OE O EEEE OOE RE 1 2 Chapter 2 Product Overview geesde 2 1 Front View of GR2000 2S AC INput 2 c cccecceeecceeeeeeeeeseeeeaeeesceeeaeeseeeeseeeseeeeseeeneeeeseeeesaeeeaeeesaeesaees 2 3 Rear View of GR2000 2S AC Input 22 c cececceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeenaeeesceeaeesseeeseeesseeeseeeeseeesaseesaeeeseeesaeeesees 2 3 Front V
171. eeeeeenseneenneeeeeeeseeeeeeseesesenaneeeeeseeeeeneees 3 94 Metal Coaxial Cable for Tertiary T3 ES 2 cccccccesceseee eeeeceeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeaeeeceeeeeesnseeneseaaeeeeeeeneeeseneenes 3 94 Construction of duel shield type Coaxial Cable cseecccceeseeeeeeeeeneneeeeeseneeseeeenneeseesesneeeseeeeenenseeenenes 3 95 Multimode Optical Fiber Cable Specifications for OC 3c STM 1 POS MMP ecccssseeeeees 3 95 Single Mode Optical Fiber Cable Specifications for OC 3c STM 1 POS SMF and OC 12c STM 4 POS a eaaa crete cede ae aaa a a aa aae e aea ae a cenuetenseiectuacesuncttbancedscuteivsbectseas 3 96 Single Mode Optical Fiber Cable Specifications for OC 48c STM 16 POS EEN 3 97 Single mode Optical Fiber Cable Specifications for NWOC48 1S8 1A8 ccss s eccsseseeereseeeeerees 3 98 ATM Interface Cable Connections cccccccseecceseeeneeceeeeeeseeneeneeeseseeeneeseeeeeneeeseeeeeneeseseesneeseeseeenenseeeeenene 3 99 Multimode Optical Fiber Cable Specifications for OC 3c STM 1 ATM MMF eessen 3 100 Single Mode Optical Fiber Cable Specifications for OC 3c STM 1 ATM SMP 00 3 101 UTP Cable Specifications for 25Mbps ATM cccesseeecceseseeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeneeeeeseeeneeseseeeneeseeeneeeenseeeneees 3 102 Chapter 4 Precautions in Planning Installation scsssseseeeeeees 4 1 Prerequisite Console Terminalls cccceseecceesseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeenseceeeeenseeeeensneeeeeeenseceeesnse
172. eeeeees 3 90 3 10 2 2 UTP Cable for Primary 1 431 or 1 431 ooo ee eeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeaaees 3 92 3 10 2 3 UTP Cable for Primary TTE TJ es cia aada aiia iaaa eat deia 3 93 3 10 2 4 Metal Coaxial Cable for Secondary IO 20721 3 94 3 10 2 5 Metal Coaxial Cable for Tertiary T3 E3 sseessessssrissssssrrsssssrrssrrirrssrrirnsssrirnnnsrennsns 3 94 3 10 2 6 Multimode Optical Fiber Cable for OC 3c STM 1 POS MMF sses 3 95 3 10 2 7 Single Mode Optical Fiber Cable for OC 3c STM 1 POS SMF and OG 12 S1TM 4 POS eerst na ee EE need eid dee eet ae ear eee 3 95 3 10 2 8 Single Mode Optical Fiber Cable for OC 48c STM 16 DO 3 97 3 10 2 9 Single Mode Optical Fiber Cable 0 ee ececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeseaeeeeeneaaees 3 98 3 10 3 ATM Interface Cables A 3 99 3 10 3 1 Multimode Optical Fiber Cables for OC 3c STM 1 ATM MMF sss 3 100 3 10 3 2 Single Mode Optical Fiber Cable for OC 3c STM 1 ATM SMF oseese 3 101 3 10 3 3 UTP Cable for 25Mbps ATM 3 102 GR2K GA 1002 xxxiii Rev 6 03 GR2000 Installation Guide Chapter 4 Precautions in Planning Installation 0e00 4 1 Wu WR GE UEL 4 1 4 1 1 Local Setup Console and Remote Operation Terminal 4 1 4 1 2 Backup Flash Memory Card IMC 4 6 4 2 Configuration LIMITS sssi cece dccce cee estes EES ves saccedtevscnaccdvesseectadesseededers secddesdececescys 4 7 rd SEARS eS ct ra EE eg Eet 4 7 TEE 4 9 4 2 3
173. eeenseneeeeees 5 13 Chapter 6 Hardware Installation ccccesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeensensneneees 6 1 Allowable Style of Installation by Router Model cc seeccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeenseeaeensnceseeesseeeeeeenees 6 12 Console Specifications 17 6 66 Chapter 7 Starting Setting Up and Stopping ees 7 1 Methods for Router Restalt cccccssseccceseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeneneeeeeeenseaeeeeensneaeeeeeeseeeeeneeeeeeensseneeeeeaseeeeeeenseeeeenees 7 2 Chapter 8 Adding and Removing Component eeeeeeeeeeeees 8 1 Chapter 9 Software Installation and Updates sseeeeeeeeees 9 1 GR2K GA 1002 liii Rev 6 03 GR2000 Installation Guide This page left intentionally blank liv GR2K GA 1002 Rev 6 03 Chapter 1 General Information 1 1 Purpose and Organization of This Manual This manual provides information for the installation of the GR2000 Gigabit Router Series The manual is organized in the following topics Chapter 1 states the purpose and organization of the manual and outlines the installation process Chapter 2 provides an overview of the GR2000 series Chapter 3 gives software and hardware details Chapter 4 gives preparation and planning precautions for installation Chapter 5 details site installation requirements Chapter 6 describes hardware and cable installation Chapter 7 provides starting set up and stopping procedures Chapter 8 provides instruction
174. eeneees 6 49 Connection of AC Input Power Cable to GR2000 20H sccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseesnenseeeeenenes 6 50 Terminal Board Wire Dimensions for AC Input to GR2000 20H c sssseeeeeeseeeeeeceeesseeeeeeenseeeeeeeees 6 50 Connection of DC Input Power Cable to GR2000 20H eccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseesneneeeeeseenes 6 51 Terminal Board Wire Dimensions for DC Input to GR2000 20H c sssseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeensesseenenes 6 52 Connection of AC Input Power Cable to GR2000 4 cceseeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeneeseeeeseeeeeeeenenseeeeseene 6 52 Connection of AC Input Power Cable to GR2000 10 ccceeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeneeseeeeeneeeeeeeeeeseeeesnnes 6 53 Connection of DC Input Power Cable to GR2000 10 cceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeneeseeseseeeeeesnenseeeeseene 6 55 Terminal Board Wire Dimensions for DC Input to GR2000 10 cccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeenseeneeeennees 6 55 Connection of AC Input Power Cable to GR2000 20 cceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeenneeseeseseeeeeseeenseeeeenene 6 56 Connection of DC Input Power Cable to GR2000 20 eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeneeseeeeseeeeeeneenseeeeseenes 6 57 Terminal Board Wire Dimensions for DC Input to GR2000 20 ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeesneneeeenses 6 58 Connection of 10BASE T or 100BASE TX Cable Connector RAR ee REENEN 6 58 Connection of 100BASE FX 1000BASE SX 1000BASE
175. eeneeseeseeeeeeenseesneneees 4 1 Configuration of Inter RP and Intra RP Overload ProceSSinG csesseeccesesseeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeesnenes 4 14 Shared Structure Of GR2000 2S ccccccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeseeeesueeseeeesnuaeeeeeesneeseeeeseaeeeeesseeeeeeennes 4 16 Shared Bus Structure of GR2000 4S and GR2000 4 cccccsseseeeeesseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeenseeeeeeensseeeeeeenseeeeeneees 4 17 GR2K GA 1002 xlv Rev 6 03 GR2000 Installation Guide Half Size NIF Installation Examples ccccssseeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeensneeeensneeeeeeeaseeeeeensneeeeeseaseneeeeenseeeneeees 4 18 Example of No of Multicast Group sccccceceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesnneeseeeeseeeeseeesneeeseeeeseeeeeensneeeeeeesseneseeeneas 4 25 MPLS Backbone and ACCESS Circuits ccceeecceseeeeee eee eeeeee eee neneneeeeeneeneeseeseeneeeeesneeeeeseeseeneeesesesenenees 4 28 Clock closed loop prohibition ccceceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeee een neeeeeeenaneeeeeeenseeeeeensecenensneeeeeeeeseeneeeeeseeenenees 4 56 Conversion from Ethernet Frame to ATM Cell S ccccsseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeneeeeeseeeneeseeseeeeeeseseesneesneenenees 4 58 Shaping at OVerlOad E 4 59 Next HOp resolution airnean aeaaaee eA ea ra KANE EARN senctedeesdacttecerendtcereedtuecieedsas 4 66 Network Configuration Requiring noinstall for aggregate Definition cccsssseceneseeeeereeeeeees 4 67 Example for Specifying a nexthopself Parameter
176. egory C2 CBR priority 2 Cl CBR priority 1 U4 UBR priority 4 VP U3 UBR priority 3 4 6 2 1 Connecting GR2000 to certain devices on the ATM interface sometimes require specific setting of configuration definition options on the own router and the othe devices For the configuration definition operation on GR2000 see Subsection 3 in Configuration Guide ATM Connection with Hitachi NP200 and NP220 Table 4 81 shows the required settings for the ATM connection with Hitachi NP2 and NP220 Table 4 81 ATM Configuration Definition Settings Required with NP200 and NP220 Connection Required Setting on GR2000 Required Setting on Target Device Type Com mand OC 3c STM 1 line carrier ISP Parameter Option Category Parameter Option clock external ATM line Clock Source External default frame_format sdh_idle ATM line Frame Format ITU T default Table 4 82 ATM Configuration Definition Settings Required with AN1000 Connection Type Required Setting on GR2000 Required Setting on Target Device Com mand Parameter Option Categor y Parameter Option OC 3c STM 1 line oc3atm 25atm oc3atm LIF Line Speed 155 155 Shap clock independent Port Clock Source Internal default frame_format sdh_unassigned Port Frame Format ATM Forum SDH default 25Mbps line oc3atm 25atm 25atm LIF Line
177. ellow Red operating Yellow Blocking and cock insertion and condition of RM removal possible Green blinking Under preparation being started up Red Fault Extinguished Operation not possible Including the device power supply being turned off GR2K GA 1002 3 15 Rev 6 03 GR2000 Installation Guide 3 4 3 4 1 Routing Processor RP Three types of RP models RP A1 standard and RP C C6 and RP D D6 options for highspeed media apply to the GR2000 device models as listed in Table 3 12 Each RP model comprises one RP board Description of each RP board follows Table 3 12 RP Models RP Model Name Board Size Applicable Device Model Full size 30mm wide GR2000 4S GR2000 6H GR2000 10H GR2000 20H GR2000 4 GR2000 10 and GR2000 20 Full size 30mm wide GR2000 6H GR2000 10 GR2000 10H GR2000 20H and GR2000 20 Full size 30mm wide GR2000 4S GR2000 6H GR2000 10 GR2000 10H GR2000 20H and GR2000 20 Use of RP C sometimes limits configuration of these models For details see Section 4 2 Configuration Limits The MPLS or MPLS based IP VPN feature is not available for use with the GR2000 4S RP A1 RP D RP D6 The RP A1 physically appears as Figure 3 20 To explore the switch and LED display functions see the Operations Guide RP D6 o Figure 3 20 RP A1 RP D RP D6 Front Panel View Switch and LED indication Table 3 13 BCU switch and f
178. eneneeseseeeeeeeeeseseneeeeseeeneeeneeneeees 5 1 5 1 1 Temperature and Humidity sooroo o A R ER OTE 5 1 5 12 DUST EE 5 2 5 1 3 Gas Causticity Ignitable Gas 0 eee rriren inurk rar EENE ana Ka SANNAA ARa k Ea ARNa ATAT RNAn 5 2 5 1 4 External Magre Fled eitir o ea A eae E e OE E EE 5 3 SES Vra e EE 5 3 5156 BIOOMNG raa a A ET Alen E E e eae cri A R 5 4 5 1 7 Acoueichotee aaoi aA E EA AA ETEA ATESAT EEN aA E CiN EAR ASE aas Aas 5 4 SRE Other EC IESEL iea E E A A EEAS 5 5 5 2 Power and Cooling Requirements sssssssessnunnnennunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn mennene nnmnnn nnmnnn nnn 5 6 5 2 1 Input Power Requirements cceccceeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeceeaeeeeeeeaaeeeeseceaaeeeseaaeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaas 5 6 512 2 Power Feeding Digranes siete EEA EEA E A EE EE DE E EEEE 5 7 5 2 2 1 100V ac Input GR2000 2S GR2000 4S GR2000 6H GR2000 10H GR2000 4 ET LE KEE iera aaa a a A aiaa aa as 5 7 5 2 2 2 200V ac Input GR2000 2S GR2000 4S GR2000 6H GR2000 10H GR2000 20H GR2000 4 GR2000 10 GPR2000 201 5 8 5 2 2 3 48V or 60V dc Input GR2000 6H GR2000 10H GR2000 20H GR2000 10 EINEN 5 9 5 2 3 Power Distribution Panel and Branch Circuit Requirements seeeseeeseseeeeseerresrerrresrrrnresrens 5 10 5 2 4 Receptacles for Input Power Plugs AC Input 0 cceeceeeeeneeeeeeeeceeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaaas 5 11 5 2 5 Electrical Noise Considerations cececccceeeeecneeeceeenneeeeceeaaaee
179. engieedees A ENE E 4 74 4 10 1 6 Transmission Interval Settings for Dynamic RIP SAP Packets on Pertinent Devices 4 74 XXXV GR2K GA 1002 Rev 6 03 4 10 2 Traffic of Periodic RIP and Periodic SAP Packeis 4 74 4 10 2 1 Model Traffic of Periodic RIP Packets 4 75 4 10 2 2 Model Traffic of Periodic SAP Packets A 4 75 4 10 2 3 Traffic of Periodic RIP and Periodic SAP Packets on Group Defined Interface 4 75 4 11 Precautions on Bridge Connections ccccccesececeseeeeeeeesseeeeeeenseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeenseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeenseneeenenes 4 76 4 11 1 Protocol and Topology Restrictions 2 2 eeececceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaaeeeeseeaaaeeeeeeeaeeeeeneaaa 4 76 4 11 1 1 Spanning Tree Protocol cee cceeeceeeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeseeeeaeeeeeeeeaeeeeeseenaeeeeeeeaees 4 76 4 11 1 2 Prohibited Topologies with Bridge Connection ce eeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeenteeeeeeeenaeeeeeeenaees 4 76 4 11 2 HDLC Pass Through and Priority Control 0 eccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 76 4 11 3 Bridge Connection over Frame Relay cceccccceeceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeenes 4 76 4 11 3 1 Definition of Interface A 4 76 4 11 3 2 Network Contouration eee i iia EAA EAEAN a NS A CNA 4 77 4 11 4 Spanning Tree Operation on Bridge Connection over ATM 4 77 4 11 5 Bridge Definition on Group Defined Interface 4 78 4 11 6 Bridge Definition on ISDN Interface 4 78 4 12 Precautions
180. ength 500 MHz NE1G 1LB band NE1G 4C Multimode optical fiber of 62 5 125um 2 220 SC 2 core GBIC SX core clad 1300 nm wavelength 160 MHz band Single mode optical fiber of 10 125 um 2 5k SC 2 core core clad 1300 nm wavelength 1000BASE LH NE1G 1LHA Single mode optical fiber of 10 125 um 2 40k SC 2core core clad 1500 nm wavelength NE1G 1LHA8 Single mode optical fiber of 10 125 um 2 80k SC 2core core clad 1500 nm wavelength NE1G 1LHBA Single mode optical fiber of 10 125 um 2 100 k SC 2core core clad 1500 nm wavelength NE1G 4C Single mode optical fiber of 10 125 um 2 70k SC 2core GBIC LH core clad 1550 nm wavelength V 24 NWVX 4 Special cable 5 m standard 1 16 Device 50 pin NWVX 8 half pitch Channel 25 pin D sub V 35 NWVX 4 Special cable 5 m standard 1 16 Device 50 pin half pitch Channel 34 pin for V 35 2 40 GR2K GA 1002 Rev 6 03 Product Overview Table 2 10 Specifications of Interface Cables and Connectors continued Physical Interface NIF Name Cable Specifications Notes Length m Min Max Connector X 21 NWVX 4 Special cable 5 m standard 1 16 Device 50 pin half pitch Channel 15 pin D sub Basic 1 430 NWJB 8 UTP category 3 4 5 4 8 core 16 RJ 45 1 430 a NWMxX1 4 twisted wire straight Japan only Primary 1 431 NWJ1 4U UTP category 3 4 5 4 8 core 200 Device IS8877 1 431 a N
181. er 3 Component Details s seseeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 1 Minimum Service Clearance for Desktop or Floor Installation eeccseseeeeeesseeeeeeeeseeeneeeeeeeeteneees 3 2 Minimum Service Clearance for Rack Mount Installation Top VieW s seeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeees 3 2 FUll SiZ6 Module a arae Tarat aa can Gergen gees Eed SES 3 3 GR2K GA 1002 xliii Rev 6 03 GR2000 Installation Guide Half Size e EE 3 3 RM CPU 2S Front Panel View ic ssiicci ccctescscceeci Deeg EEN lee dee EES daadaa abiada ainada aiii 3 4 RMP Front GEIER 3 5 RM CPU 4S RMB CPU 4S Front Panel View csscsseesseeceeeeeeeeesnseeeeseseeeesesensesaaeaneeseeseensenenenees 3 8 RM CPU HH RMB CPU HH Front Panel View sscecceeceeeeeeensennsssenceeeesseeeensenssnssseaneeseeseeeees 3 8 RM CPU MH RMB CPU MH or RM CPU LH RMB CPU LH Front Panel View Les Kit e PAn VE 3 8 RM CPU S Front Panel View iiris daanan ocd Eed EENS aaeei danena cud ceed ccerd Kaada iata adaa ka Vaikai haaa 3 10 RM CPU M RM CPU MC2 and RM CPU L Front Panel View ccccssssssssssesccesceseeeeeneennseees 3 10 RM 4 0 4S Front Panel View eesef AENSEEEeEERE eet EE EEEEENEESESEEESEehEEde ESA gEeEgebE KEetEN 3 11 RMB 10 4S Front Panel View cssccsssesseeneecceeeeeeensennsseaeeeeeesseeesnsennsneaaeaeeesaeseseesnseansseaaeaeaeseensnsees 3 11 RM IO H Front Panel View dE 1h ar raataa t
182. es OR UTP category 3 4 5 4 core twisted wire straight Customer setup length L1 with one modular rosette ke Flat metal cable 4 wi Primary 1 431 at metal cable 4 wire interface Customer setup length L2 Z cable with modulars on both ends Figure 3 91 Sample Indirect Connection with Primary 1 431 or 1 431 a Configuration Notes e Customer setup length L1 i e the total length of flat metal cables should not exceed 16 m L2 addition be sure to use the flat metal cable with the core diameter of 0 65 mm e The modular rosette is the customer responsibility and hence not included in the router Procure that has the model name MJ 8S no terminator Function device side Function DSU side Unused Transmit Unused Transmit Transmit Unused Receive Receive Receive Receive Transmit Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Note Because of the cable being a twist pair cable make pairs of A with a and B with b in the above pin assignment For other cables than these there is no need of worrying about the pairing either of being connected or unconnected can be accepted 3 10 2 4 Metal Coaxial Cable for Secondary G 703 For connection to the Secondary G 703 interface a send and receive pair of metal coaxial cables are required per port DSU Figure 3 93 shows the cable specifications Be noted that neither the singl
183. eseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeees 6 1 Unpacking of GR2000 2S ccs ssccs cesta cessccrecsacte stb cevetccescacirebeswonctuecdvecuarceieeie SE Seauenetenessisuesduedesstnces 6 1 Unpacking of GRZ0O Een Eeer 6 2 Unpacking of GR2000 6H uereg cece euten deeg ue tanai aoaaa ideda aaaea naaa a diaaa arida 6 3 Unpacking of GR2000 0H eaaa aae aa aaraa a ae arae aee raataa aa aa iae ESA 6 4 Unpacking Of GR2000 20H ege ege ENeEE aoaaa reena r Oaa e aa a SEENEN ee adai 6 5 Unpacking of GR2 000 4 aa eeaeee eege EENEG 6 6 Unpacking Of EL RL E 6 7 Unpacking ot GR2000 20 s eebe sairaana ea eaea aaah ataoa dadida EES 6 8 Unpacking of Separately Shipped RM RP NIF Full Size Board sccccesseeceeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeenseeeeeeeees 6 9 Unpacking of Separately Shipped NIF Half Size Board ccccsssseecccsseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeneneeeaees 6 9 Unpacking of Separately Shipped Memory MOdulle ccccsesseeceesseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeesneeneeseeseeneeeenseeenenees 6 10 Unpacking of Flash Memory Card MC csecccsseseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseseneeseseeeneeseeseeneeeeasneeneeseeseeneneenseseneeees 6 10 Unpacking of Separately Shipped Cable cccccsesseeeceseeeeeeeenseceeeeenseeeeeeeenseeeeeeensneeneeseeseeneeeenseeseeees 6 11 Sample Handling of Module on Anti Static Surface cceceeeecceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeseseeeneesesseseeseeenees 6 11 xlvi GR2K GA 1002 Rev 6 03 Desktop Installation for GR2000 2S and GR2000 4
184. f one another Since one RP can handle up to two NIFs a total of ten NIFs can be installed on this model The BCU redundancy is made available by mounting the optional RM CPU and RM IO modules in the RM CPU1 and RM IO1 slots otherwise only the base RM CPU and RM IO modules are mounted in the RM CPUO and RM IO0O slots The front view when PS is mounted with an AC input unit is shown in Figure 2 35 the front appearance view of GR2000 10H AC input and the rear view in Figure 2 36 the rear appearance view of GR200 10H AC input 2 24 GR2K GA 1002 Rev 6 03 Product Overview For the device configuration when PS is mounted with a DC input unit and the PS mounting position please refer to the Hardware operation manual LOTOTOTOTOLTOTOLOs D Slot for the RM 10 NIE board AC input unit mounting position RM PS 100 101 INPUT1 LED status AC indicator Memory p card slot PS INPUTO RS 232C FANE AC connector for console N Power breaker 100V or switch 200V Power cord receptacle Figure 2 35 Front View of GR2000 10H with AC Input Mounting position of RM CPU RP board power supply unit DC DC Power supply unit Placement of fans in fan tray top view front front front front L Fan 2 Fan 4 Fan 2 Fan 4 bs power main Power main
185. g RIMSDME ut Ge E KEEN ee Ed 4 84 4 14 2 2 When using DYMRP eee aa AAAA a a a a A 4 84 4 14 2 3 When using DIMMER ENEE PEATA AS aA ANAE NTa 4 84 4 14 3 Applicable network patterns spaini E REA A 4 85 GE a RIM RE 4 85 4 14 32 PIM SM RE 4 87 4 15 Precautions for USING MPLS cccecseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeseeeeeneeseeeeseneeseeeesneeseeeesneeeseeeeenenseeeeenes 4 89 4 15 1 Non permitted mixed use of LSP allocation system for each VPN and RFC2547 Deet eren a E E EE E E eebieiteee 4 89 4 15 2 Precautions when mutually connecting with competitor router of LDP DU RFC2547 GR2K GA 1002 xxxvii Rev 6 03 GR2000 Installation Guide ERT 4 89 4 15 3 Difference of range of VPN ID values by software version IP VPN operation system 4 89 4 15 4 Difference in IP VPN of the LSP allocation system for each VPN using software version 4 90 4 15 4 1 Versions prior to Ver Ob 00 4 90 4 15 4 2 Versions thereafter including Ver 05 00 eeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 91 4 15 4 3 Versions prior to Ver Ob 00 nan enna annen nna 4 91 4 15 4 4 Versions thereafter including Ver 05 00 eeeceeceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeees 4 91 4 15 4 5 Maximum number of VPNs that can be accommodated per device n 4 91 Chapter 5 Installation Site Conditions ce seeeeeeee eee eeeeeeneeeeeeeeeees 5 1 5 1 Environmental Requirement ccceseeeccssesseeeeeeseseeeeeseseneeeeeseeneeeees
186. g the own router as a DCE and connecting to a DTE attached cable on th V 24 interface an HN F9355 75H cable 5m is applicable This direct connection allows the line speed of 19 2 kbps or less and the maximum cable length of 16 m between the DCE and the DTE Line speed range XR bit S Cable length limitation Coordinating cable 9 6 lt X lt 19 2 16m or shorter HN F9355 71H 5m Cables other than 5m are coordinated individually 19 2 lt X lt 28 8 3m or shorter HN F9355 71F 3m Note 1 It is 2 4 lt x lt 19 2 in NWVX 8 Supported or not Physical Line speed range Restrictions on Corresponding cable model interface Xkbit s NWVX 4 NWVX 8 cable length V 24 2 4 lt X lt 96 X O 16 m or less HN F9355 71F HN F9355 71H Note 1 9 6 lt X lt 19 2 O O 16 m or less HN F9355 71F HN F9355 71H Note 1 19 2 lt X lt 28 8 O O 3 m or less HN F9355 71F Note 1 V 35 48 0 lt X lt 1024 0 O O 16 m or less HN F9355 72H Note 1 1024 0 lt X lt 1536 0 O O 10 m or less HN F9355 72H Note 1 1536 0 lt X lt 2048 0 O O 5 m or less Note 2 HN F9355 72H Note 1 2048 0 lt X lt 3072 0 O X 5 m or less Note 2 HN F935 72H Note 1 3072 0 lt X lt 6144 0 O X 1m or less Note 1 X 21 2 4 lt X lt 9 6 X O 16 m or less HN F9355 73H Note 1 9 6 lt X lt 1024 0 O O 16 m or less HN F9355 73H Note 1 1024 0 lt X lt 1536 0 O O 10 m or less HN F9355
187. guration Configuration mismatch definitions not agreed definitions not agreed 11 The NWOC3C 8S and NWOC3C 8M physically appear as Figure 3 43 POS OC 3C STM 1 ae APS0 TR TR O TR O TR TR 9 TR O TR O0 TR Oe cE col Co E EN n 0 0 0 0 0 o 0 jo 0 Tx 0 LINE70 Lines LINES LINE4 LINES LINE2 D LINE1 D LINEO STATUS FACILITY LOOPBAC NWOC3C 8S Figure 3 43 NWOC3C 8S and NWOC3C 8M Front Panel View Switch and LED indication Table 3 60 NWOC3C 8S NWOC3C 8M switch and function of LED indications STATUS LED Green Shows the operating Green Operable operation Name The NWOC12C 1S and NWOC12 1SD physically appears as Figure 3 44 This NIF has one port for connection with a pair of SC 2 core optical fiber connectors recei and transmit Table 3 63 shows the connector specifications or NWOV12 1SD POS OC 12C STM 4 ST MSTOOLINE ERR 3 R we 0 LINK O O R LINE 0 A NWOC12C 1S ke Figure 3 44 NWOC12C 1S and NWOC12 1SD Front Panel View Switch and LED indication Table 3 62 NWOC12C 1S NWOC12 1SD switch and function of LED indications LED Color Status Content The NWOC12 4S and NWOC12 4M physically appear as Figure 3 45 or NW OC12 4M POS OC 12C STM 4 NW0C12 4S OOPBACK STATUS H Ka O OoOOO H OoOOO d OoOOO FACILITY Figure 3 45 NWOC12 4S and NWOC12 4M F
188. hat can control i 256 interfaces device COPS agent Maximum number of flow entries in COPS agent Refer to Configuration definition command reference flow filter IPv4 and flow qos IPv4 Maximum number of Qos queue attribute entries in COPS agent Refer to Configuration definition command reference qos queue list QoS queue attribut 4 3 1 4 3 2 Items to be Prepared Operation terminal Prepare an operation terminal in advance since one is required for the device to execute configuration definitions and operation commands A CD ROM drive is required by the terminal for loading the software Backup use MC The control program of the device configuration definition data and so forth are stored in the MC It is not possible to activate the device if the MC malfunctions In order to execute prompt recovery replacement of the malfunctioning MC in the event of an MC malfunction it is necessary to copy the data in the MC using a backup MC If you do not purchase two MCs when placing your order it is recommended that you separately purchase an additional MC for backup use Do not connect the RM Ethernet port to the same segment of the RP s Ethernet port Use these ports independently of each other Network Configuration Prohibited topology 4 4 1 4 4 2 4 4 3 When you connect GR2000 and any other router on Ethernet pay attention to th restrictions shown below 10BASE T 100BASE TX Match the interfa
189. he following Notes E Note When you turn off and turn on the same router power successively pause at least 2 seconds before you turn on the power E Note For a router with duplexed redundant power supply turn on the two power breaker switches one after the other within 10 seconds AA Note When turning on a breaker switch make sure you move the lever switch fully until it stops When the hardware installation is complete you must configure the system to st operation The steps are as follows l Login at first time Log in to this device from the setup console At the initial lo attempt the following appears as the default login account Login name operator m Password none To prevent security breaches it is recommended that you login as the router administrator admin create a new account using adduser command and the delete the default account using rmuser command See GR2000 Operations Gu for more information Set up the configuration information The configuration information defines t operating environment such as the IP addressing type of network media routing protocol and so on The configuration information can be defined usi commands and the GUI Be sure to save the configuration information to a fi At startup the system uses the last used configuration information file For individual commands and parameters see GR2000 Configuration Guide Set up the date and time The date and time information is
190. ied voltage Fault in power supply unit or RMP board or power supply switch in device is turned off or AC power is not fed READY LED Green Shows the Green blinking Operable operation operable condition Extinguished Operation not possible Including the device of the device power supply being turned off ERROR LED Yellow Shows partial fault Yellow Partial fault has been developed in the device in the device Extinguished Occurrence of partial fault is not detected Including the device power supply being turned off ALARM LED Red Shows Red Partial fault has occurred in the device occurrence offault Extinguished Operation possible Including the device in the device power supply being turned off POST DISP LED Green Shows the state Green blinking Shows the state that STATUS CODE 7 that STATUS seg is indicating the initial diagnosis code of RM CPU CODE is Extinguished Shows that STATUS CODE 7 seg is indicating the indicating the contents of FAULT CODE Including the initial diagnosis device power supply being turned off code of RM CPU STATUS CODE 7seg Green 7 seg for Green blinking Indicates the device state code for 00 99 indicating the Code contents differ by lighting of POST DISP LED device condition Extinguished Non indication Including the device power 7 seg Decimal supply being turned off and two digits ACCESS 0 LED Green Shows the state of Blinking MC card zero being accessed Me
191. iew of GR2000 4S AC Input 2 c cccecceeecceeeeeeeeeseeeeaeeesceesaeeseceeseeeseeeseeenseeeseeeesaeenaeeesaeeesaes 2 3 Rear View of GR2000 4S AC Input 2 cc cececceeeeceeeeeeseeeseeeneeeesceeaeensceeseeesseaeseaenseeesaesesaseneseseeesoes 2 4 Front View of GR2000 6H AC Input 2 cccecceeecceeeeeeseeeseeeeseeesceeeaeenecenseeeseeeeseeeeseeeseesesaeeneeeesaeeeaaes 2 4 Rear View of GR2000 6H AC Input 222 c cececceeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeaeeeseeesaeenseeeseeeseeenseeeeeeesaeeesaeeneeesaeeesoes 2 5 Front View of GR2000 10H with AC Input 22 2 ce ceceeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeensaeeneeesscenseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeees 2 5 Rear View of GR2000 10H with AC Input 2 c cccecceeseeeseeeeeeeceeeseeneceeseeeseeeeseeeneeeesaesesaeeeseeesaeesaaes 2 6 Front View of GR2000 10H with DC Input 2 2 ce ccceeceeecceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeesaeeaeenseeeneeeseceeseeeeeeeeeeeeneeeees 2 6 Rear View of GR2000 10H with DC Input 2 22 e cceecceeseeeseeeeseeeeceeesceneeeeseeeseeeeseeeeeeeeseeensaeenaeeesaeeesees 2 7 Front View of GR2000 20H with AC Input 2 22 2 cc ceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeee seen eeeseeesaeeeaeessaeeneeesacenseeeeeeeeneeeeeeeees 2 8 Rear View of GR2000 20H with AC Input 2 c cccecceeeeeesee cence ceeeeceneceeseeeseeeeeeeeneeeseeeesaeeneeeeaeeeaees 2 9 Front View of GR2000 20H with DC Input 22 22 cc2 cceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaeeeaeeeeaeeesaessaeenseeeneee
192. iguration Configuration mismatch definitions not agreed 1 G Lights in green Y Lights in yellow Goes off definitions not agreed 11 The NWOC3C 2M NWOC3C 2S NWOC3C 2SD and NWOC3C 2MD physically appear as Figure 3 42 These NIFs each have two ports for connection with pairs of SC 2 core optical fiber connectors transmit and receive Table 3 59 shows the connector specifications POS OC 3C STM 1 ie 2 MSTOOLINE ERR z H Figure 3 42 NWOC3C 2M NWOC3C 2S NWOC3C 2SD and NWOC3C 2MD Front Panel View O O NWOC3C 2M or NWOC3C 2S Switch and LED indication Table 3 57 NWOC3C 2S NWOC3C 2M NWOC3C 2SD NWOC3C 2MD switch and function of LED indications function of LED indication Line state A E at GH Line state Detail of state Se by indication in M and browse 3 8 G Being Being initialized 3 initialize initialized 3 8 4 G Being In normal In standby 3 active up operated operation 3 8 G Line fault being In operation line fault active down occurred being occurred 8 3 8 G Line test Line being tested 9 test In fault In fault 4 fault ks G _ Command In maintenance 10 closed being blocked G_ Not used Configuration Not used unused definition not Configuration set yet definition not set yet 10 Confi
193. igure 2 21 Front View of GR2000 20 with AC Input NIFINIF 5 7 CSW board covered Placement of RM IO and NIF boards 101 GR2K GA 1002 Rev 6 03 2 15 GR2000 Installation Guide Fan Fan Figure 2 22 Rear View of GR2000 20 with AC Input Placement of power supply units Power Unit 1 1 Placement of RM CPU and RP boards Power P ower Power Unit Unit 1 0 0 1 0 0 2 16 GR2K GA 1002 Rev 6 03 Product Overview LED status indicator Memory card slot Doe RS 232C connector Figure 2 23 Front View of GR2000 20 with DC Input CSW board covered Placement of RM IO and NIF boards GR2K GA 1002 Rev 6 03 2 17 GR2000 Installation Guide Fan Placement of power supply units Placement of RM CPU and RP boards Fan Power P ower Power Power Unit Unit Unit Unit 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 Figure 2 24 Rear View of GR2000 20 with DC Input 2 18 GR2K GA 1002 Rev 6 03 Product Overview Guide rail attached Guide rail detached Figure 2 25 Half Sized and Full Sized NIF Modules GR2K GA 1002 2 19 Rev 6 03 GR2000 Installation Guide 2 3 Device Configuration All of the GR2000 models have the same architecture and share common components including Routi
194. imum VP value 4 If ATM is used as a backbone line the LSP is allocated to VC Therefore the number of LSPs depends on th maximum VC value The ATM determines whether VCls of an odd number shall be used or VCls of an even num shall be used when the LDP session is established Therefore if the number of LSPs to be established is not th same in both directions the number of VCs to be defined will be greater than the number of LSPs to be actually u In addition if the number of VCs per line exceeds 1024 when the statistic function of the MPLS is used some of VC statistics may not be acquired It is recommended to make the number of VCs per line smaller than 1023 5 In a case where the number of LDP sessions is 20 or more if a condition is made that the MPLS event log information is indicated by the mpls monitor start command impediment to the RP line may occur or if close free performed the other LDP session may collapse and the LSP may be disconnected It is recommended that no condition should be made that the MPLS event log information is indicated by the mpls monitor start command w the number of LDP sessions is greater than 20 entry number describable when utilizing the MPLS policy routing function This function requires that the total number of IP filter entries used by all the functions mounted in this device be set so that this value is not exceeded in order to utilize the IP filter table as in the IP policy routing function Table
195. inal type Connection patter Required function Console RM serial connection RS232C RS232C Line speed 19200 9600 4800 240 Note 1 Note 2 1200 ZMODEM procedure Note 6 Line speed 9600 ZMODEM procedure Note 6 RM serial connection Modem RS232C Line speed 9600 9 pin on Router Side Connection 9 pin on Setup Console Side Pin Number Signal Name Pin Number Signal Name GND RX TX DCD CTS RTS DTR DSR 5 3 2 7 8 1 6 4 AJOIN Oil U N A Note 3 In order to connect the RM serial interface of this device with a modem use a straight cable to conn the AT interchangeable machine and the modem Note 4 The model connected to this device is set to the automatic signal reception reception received automatically Setting when reset The setting is read out from the non volatile memory in AT amp Y0O the modem Saving the setting The setting is saved in the non volatile memory in the AT amp WO modem Note 5 Perform dialing by using the dial function of the terminal software For the dial setting refer to the operation manual for the terminal software Dial connection is possible by using the AT command from the terminal Dialing is performed by using the AT command for a case of using a terminal software having no dial function For the method of dialing by using the AT command refer to the operation manual for the
196. input un SWR4825 U one power cord and one DC DC power unit DC46003 U Figure 3 59 illustrates the AC input unit and one of the DC DC power unit s of th POW M200H and the POW M200HA The dimensions are approximate in mm an the drawing is not to scale Be noted that the locations for these components are fixed See Table 3 89 and se also Figure 2 7 and Figure 2 8 in Subsection 2 2 The POW MDCH comprises one DC input unit IN140 6U and three DC DC power units two DC38001 Us for 3 3V 24V dc output and one DC46003 U for 3 3V 5V de output The POW MDCHA comprises one DC input unit IN140 6U and one DC DC power unit DC46003 U Figure 3 60 illustrates the DC input unit and one of the DC DC power unit s of the POW MDCH and the POW MDCHA The dimensions are approximate in mm and the drawing is not to scale Be noted that the locations for these components are fixed See Table 3 90 and see also Figure 2 9 and Figure 2 10 in Subsection 2 2 173 The POW L200H comprises one input pannel IN120 2FU one AC input unit SWR4845 U one input power cord and five DC DC power units two DCO3R375 U for 3 3V de output two DC38001 Us for 3 3V 24V dc output and one DC46003 U for 3 3V 5V de output The POW L200HA comprises one input pannel IN120 2FU one AC input unit SWR4845 U
197. ion of the frame relay command Remarks Used most generally Designate dce by using the poll_ direction option of the frame relay command Not used generally for subscription to the public frame relay net Designate both by using poll_ direction option of frame relay command is stopped because of the maintenance work This allows the router of the connected counterpart to take appropriate actions including route change Filling columns in application form Connecting condition CLLM message General selection alternative Supported vesignation of application when this device is connected Select any one item from the description on the left Setting the configuration defining information of this device Designate the signal reception monitoring time by using cllm_sustain option of frame relay command The designated value shall agree with the time interval that the net transmits CLLM periodically Remarks The CLLM is no in the protocol regulation on th indication code congestion leve hence attention required in usin This device use indication code corresponding t super relay FR NTT Not supported No setting is required because of default operation When setting explicitly designate no by using the cllm_sustain option of the frame relay command 4 5 3 1 Required Setting on GR2000 for POS in Multivendor Environment When you conn
198. ions for NWOC48 1A NWOC48 1A4 and NWOC48 1A NIF Connector Specifications NWOC48 1A SC 2 core flat connector singlemode fiber NWOC48 1A4 SC 2 core flat connector singlemode fiber NWOC48 1A8 SC 2 core flat connector singlemode fiber The NAOC3 1M and NAOC3 1S physically appear as Figure 3 48 These NIFs each have one port for connection with a pair of SC 2 core optical fiber connectors transmit and receive Table 3 72 shows the connector specifications Or ATM OC 3 STM SMF ATMOC 3 STM MVF LINEERROQ T R ACTO U mo IO LINE 0 NAOC3 1M STATUS Figure 3 48 NAOC3 1M and NAOC3 1S Front Panel View Switch and LED indication Table 3 71 NWOC3 1S NWOC3 1M switch and function of LED indications The NA25M 1 physically appears as Figure 3 49 This NIF has one port for connection with an 8 pin modular connector of RJ 45 Table 3 74 shows the connector specifications om J o O gt LINE ERRO S O EC ACTO S TRO LINEO Figure 3 49 NA25M 1 Front Panel View Switch and LED indication Table 3 73 NWOC3 1S NWOC3 1M switch and function of LED indications STATUS LED Green Shows the operating Green Operable operation Yellow Red condition of NIF Yellow Blocking and the board replaceable state Green blinking Under preparation Program being loaded The NAOC3 8S and NAOC3 8M physically appear as Figure 3 42 Mark
199. irmly to the terminal board and the ground See Figure 6 57 for the dimensions of the terminal board and the terminal wire When the power supply is duplexed repeat the connection work in two positions 4 Fix the input power cable with the cable clamp When the power supply is duplexed repeat the fixation in two positions Then attach the cover back to the input unit Front Breaker switch Figure 6 58 shows how to connect the AC input power cable to GR2000 20 The steps are as follows l Ensure that the power switch in the front end of the chassis is in the O out position When the power supply is duplexed redundant make sure in two positions Insert the receptacle on the input power cable firmly to the plug beneath the power switch When the power supply is duplexed do this in two positions Front this connection work requires expertise the work must be conducted by qualified personnel The steps are as follows l Procure the DC input power cable in compliance with the specifications show below When the power supply is duplexed redundant procure two cables a Cord structure 3 wire a AWG No of each conductor determined by ampacity 6 Cord diameter determined by cable clamp 27mm or smaller a Size of wire binding screw on terminal board M5 Ensure that the breaker switch in the rear end of the chassis is in the O out position When the power supply is duplexed make sure in two position
200. ition of RM Green blinking Under preparation being started up Red Fault or shutdown Extinguished Operation not possible Including the device power supply being turned off STATUS NIFE LED Green Shows the Green Operable operation Yellow Red operating Yellow Blocked condition of XIF2 Green blinking Under preparation being started up built in Ethernet Red Fault or shutdown Extinguished Operation not possible Including the device power supply being turned off LNK ACT LED Green Green Ring pulse of 1OBASE T or 100BASE TX is being established 3 6 GR2K GA 1002 Rev 6 03 Component Details Table 3 3 RMP switch and function of LED indications Name of switch Switch or LED Status Content and LED LED Yellow Yellow Line section II W fault detection LED Green Shows the Conditions of transmission and reception signals operating condition of each line LAMP TEST Switch Lamp test Press LED s on all the boards are lit Non Lock REST Switch Manual resetting Reset Non Lock the device Table 3 4 Specifications of 9 pin D sub Connector on CONSOLE RS232C Port Specifications Request to send RS output Clear to send CS input Data set ready DR input Data terminal ready ER output Carrier detect of data channel receive CD input Called indicator Cl input Signal ground or common line SG Send data SD output Receive data RD input
201. ity connector Figure 3 27 Relationship between connection of cables supplied with VX 8 and LINE number GR2K GA 1002 3 27 Rev 6 03 GR2000 Installation Guide m Line numbers for the cables attached to VX 8 Be careful when connecting the cables attached to VX 8 to the devices that the connector insertion faces are reversed between the lower side connectors LINE 0 LINE 1 and LINE 4 LINE 5 and the upper side connectors LINE 2 LINE 3 and LINE 6 LINE 7 LINE 7 LINE 6 LINE 5 LINE 4 LINE 3 LINE 2 LINE 1 LINE 0 Figure 3 28 Line numbers for the cables attached to NWVX 8 m Precautions when using the cables attached to VX 8 1 The tips of the cables attached to VX 8 can be connected with loop connectors the same as those for NWVX 4 This connection makes the loop connector test possible 2 The tips of the cables attached to VX 8 should be protected from dust when not connected by covering them with vinyl bags Figure 3 29 Precautions when using the cables attached to VX 8 3 28 GR2K GA 1002 Rev 6 03 of cable length according to line speed described in Section 5 Precautions Ze cables attached to VX GR2000 Modem connecting cable to 8 are required when NWVX 8 is used Cable for DCE be prepared by the client DCE side DCE side GR2000 WS PC etc Connection of connector to connector Supplied cable 1m is not included Cable length 5 m Cable length X m in the length restrictions i
202. k local address is automatically set to each interface when only an IPv6 global address is se number of adjacent routers RIPng and the maximum number of adjacent peers BGP4 is shown in Table 4 70 The maximum number of adjacent routers is the number of routers that advertise a route from this router The maximum number of adjacent peers is the number of peers that advertise a route from this router The maximum number of entries contains an alternate route Table 4 70 Relation Between Number of Route Entries and Maximum Number of Adjacent Peers P No of Higher Max No of Route Max No of Neighbor Routing Protocol N Aer Peers Entries Peers 1 000 25 000 25 000 25 000 Note 1 The maximum number of route entries contains an alternate route Note 2 The maximum number of adjacent peers indicates the number of peers that advertise the route received from the upper peer Note 3 This is the value obtained when an IPv4 unicast and IPv4 multicast are not used Item Max device entry count Max dynamic entry count Max static entry cou IPv6 unicast path entries 25 000 device 25 000 device 1 000 device NDP entries 1 024 device 1 024 device 1 024 device IPv4 unicast path entries 250 000 device 250 000 device 1 000 device ARP 4 096 RP 1 4 096 RP 1 4 096 RP IPX routing table 1 000 deivce 1 000 deivce 200 deivce IPXARP entry 256 device 256 device Bridge filtering database 2 000 device
203. k mount See Figure 3 2 GR2000 10 Floor See Figure 3 1 Rack mount See Figure 3 2 GR2000 20 Floor See Figure 3 1 Rack mount See Figure 3 2 GR2K GA 1002 3 1 Rev 6 03 GR2000 Installation Guide 200 200 1000 500 tg Device Device Partial projection due to DC input option can be neglected Figure 3 1 Minimum Service Clearance for Desktop or Floor Installation Figure 3 2 Minimum Service Clearance for Rack Mount Installation Top View 3 2 GR2K GA 1002 Rev 6 03 Component Details 3 2 Module Characteristics The BCU RP and NIF modules come in half size full size and special size boards See the figures below for the appearance of the half size and full size boards Note that the connectors display etc in the enclosure are different for each module See Section 3 3 Basic Control Unit BCU Section 3 4 Routing Processor RP and Section 3 5 Network Interface Module NIF for more detail on these modules Approx 400 height Approx 270 depth Enclosure height 60 50 or 30 Note Measurements do not include handles Units are in mm Figure 3 3 Full Size Module Approx 30 width note Approx 270 depth Approx 200 depth Note Measurements do not include handles Units are in mm Figure 3 4 Half Size Module GR2K GA 1002 3 3 Rev 6 03 GR2000 Installation Guide
204. l mask route network route for the subject interface Instead it creates a subnet route with broadcast connection and a host route with point to point connection Since RIP 1 does not advertise a subnet route that exceeds the addressing boundary aggregation specifying with the configuration definition is required on GR2000 A different implementation of RIP 1 may automatically aggregate subnet routes t network route and an aggregated route is usually not registered in the forwardin table On GR2000 the aggregated route is by default registered in the forwarding table as the active route In order to attain compatible operation on GR2000 with such a device with differ RIP 1 implementation the noinstall option setting is required for the aggregate definit in the configuration information Figure 4 12 illustrates a sample network configuration requiring the noinstall option setting 4 9 1 4 9 1 1 Connection with IPv6 Router Pay attention to the following when connecting this router and other equipment by IPv6 routing Interface Address of Point to Point Type Line This router handles the path information direct coupled path of a point to point type line as two host paths Therefore in a network consisting of only this router the interface addresses below can be allocated to the point to point type line Do not use the point to point type line between this router and other equipment m An IPv6 address with the same prefix can be al
205. les 22 2 ccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseceeseeeeeeeesenenseeenaeeesaeeeaeenseeeseenaes 2 19 Block Diagram Of GR2000 2S c eeccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeenee eee anaa i aaa A AAA A AA aan Ei aai iaa AAKRE 2 21 Block Diagram ot GR2000 4S zsa iienaa esac aaa maaadaaa aaaea narada aaa EES See 2 21 Block Diagram of GR2000 6H GR2000 10H and GR2000 20H 2 22 ce ceeseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeneeeeeeenees 2 21 Front View ot GR2000 2S eu 2 22 Rear View Of GR2000 2S risiini iaae anaandaa diire iaaa aaa aa aieeaa iar adiaua riadia adad 2 22 Front View ot GR200 Eeer edel 2 23 Rear View Of GRZO0EASsssegeegegguEghEENhgEeEeh Ree ra aeaaea aa aa aaa de aaa aaan anai EEN raaa iaie 2 23 Front View of GR2000 6H eege EE EES 2 24 Rear View of GR2000 GH ciccicccciecctets ceasececccatenndeceacesscesiuevaned csucssteddvasdveettanbsvtadee ikiia addaa rindai dda aaia dii 2 24 Front View of GR2000 10H with AC Input ee NEEN EEN nunn nnn nunnan nnnm nnnm n n n 2 25 Rear View of GR2000 10H with AC Input 2 2 ce cceseceseeeeeeesceeeecenecee sees eeeeneeeeseeeeaeeesaeeeaeesseneneeeeees 2 25 Front View of GR2000 20H with AC Input 22 2 ccescceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeaeeeseeeaeenaaeseaeeneeeeneenaes 2 26 Rear View of GR2000 20H with AC Input ee EEN NEEENEEEEEEE NEEN NEEN NEE ENEE nnnm 2 27 Routing Software Block Diagram cseeccceseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeseeeneeeeseeeneneseseeeneeeesneeneeseeseeeneeeneneeenss 2 39 Chapt
206. llowing configuration Server Transmitter Rendezvous point PIM SM router PIM SM router Group 1 receiver PIM SM router SS PIM SM router Group 1 receiver PIM SM router 4 15 Precautions for using MPLS 4 15 1 Non permitted mixed use of LSP allocation system for each VPN and RFC2547 bis system The MPLS VPN function using the LDP DU mode RFC2547 bis system is the VPN ID designating IP VPN operation syste method Range of values in VPN ID RFC2547 bis system Ver 06 03 Numerical designatio 1 to 1 000 000 Name character string Alphanumerics within 14 letters with head in designation alphanumeric or character string using hyphen and underscore LSP allocation system for each Numerical designation Versions before Ver 06 01 1 to 255 VPN Note 1 Versions thereafter including Ver 06 01 1 to 1 000 000 Name character string Cannot be designated designation Note 1 In order to establish the LSP for VPN between a device operating with versions before Ver 06 01 and a device operating with versions thereafter including Ver 06 01 it is necessary to use the VPN ID values in the range from 1 to 255 even in a device operating with the versions thereafter including Ver 06 01 If values outside the range from 1 to 255 are used the whole MPLS function may become non utilizable in a device operating with versions before Ver 06 01 4 15 4 Difference in IP VPN of the LSP alloc
207. located to multiple point to point type lines For more details see Application Guide m An IPv6 address with a different prefix can be allocated to both ends ofa point to point type line For more details see Application Guide However the intensive setting of path information is complicated when the addresses l Do not advertise the allocated site local address to the outside Specify a nexthopself parameter to the configuration definition information of the corresponding peer when sending the received path information to the internal BGP4 peer using this router The setting above is required when making connections with a Cisco router Set site local address fec0 2 128 Set nexthopself AS X External peer Internal peer BGP4 connection in AS fecO 1 128 Figure 4 13 Example for Specifying a nexthopself Parameter Device HOI dng GG ED SITT TETE n Lye Packet to L Terminal i i Co LC Terminal A Terminal B Figure 4 14 Configuration to use the device for communication between IPv6 terminals on the same link H ICMPV6 re direct message transmission 4 9 1 6 the interface is started up Be careful because if this action executes the ping6 a traceroute6 commands to the IPv6 address for which duplication has been identi with other devices a response may be returned from the IPv6 address of another interface in the device rather than from the IPv6 add
208. lots It is the entry model for enterprise and WAN aggregation applications H GR2000 4S with four interface slots is the basic model enterprise and WAN aggregation applications m GR2000 6H has six interface slots and is the lower mid range model for carrier ISP edge aggregation applications H GR2000 10H has ten interface slots and is the mid range model for carrier ISP edge aggregation applications H GR2000 20H with twenty interface slots is a high end model for carrier ISP backbone applications GR2000 4 with four interface slots is the basic model for enterprise and WAN aggregation applications H GR2000 10 with ten interface slots is the mid range model for carrier ISP edge aggregation applications GR2000 20 with twenty interface slots is for carrier ISP backbone applications GR2K GA 1002 2 1 Rev 6 03 GR2000 Installation Guide 2 2 Physical Appearance The following figures show the front and rear views of the GR2000 Gigabit Router Series models Figure 2 1 Figure 2 2 Figure 2 3 Figure 2 4 Figure 2 5 Figure 2 6 Figure 2 7 Figure 2 8 Figure 2 9 Figure 2 10 Figure 2 11 Figure 2 12 Figure 2 13 Figure 2 14 Figure 2 15 Figure 2 16 Figure 2 17 Figure 2 18 Figure 2 19 Figure 2 20 Figure 2 21 Figure 2 22 Figure 2 23 Figure 2 24 front view of GR2000 2S AC input rear view of GR2000 2S AC input front view of GR2000 4S AC input rear view of GR2000 4
209. lowing conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must also play the following acknowledgment This product includes software developed by the University of California Berkeley and its contributors 4 Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL GR2K GA 1002 Rev 6 03 GR2000 Installation Guide SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWI
210. ly injury damage to the device or an interruption in service E The hazard warnings on the machine or in the manual have the following headings and symbols CAUTION or WARNING Hazard warnings on the device and in the manuals are provided to prevent or reduce risk of death personal injury or product damage Understand and follow these hazard warnings bi Caution This is a caution notice Follow the instructions in this notice to avoid damage to the equipment or a disruption in service WARNING This is a warning notice Follow the instructions in this notice to avoid the possibility of bodily injury occurring The following sections have specific instructions regarding warnings and cautions GR2K GA 1002 xxvii Rev 6 03 GR2000 Installation Guide Specific Warning Instructions WARNING Failure to follow the instructions in this section could cause bodily injury or death to the user Do not operate the device if you suspect damage or failure Do not use the device if there is smoke or an unusual smell coming from the system If either occurs immediately turn power off and unplug the power cable from the outlet Contact a qualified service technician In the case of the GR2000 20H GR2000 10H or GR2000 6H with DC power supplies installed turn off the circuit breaker on the power facility supply side If the device is installed in a rack unplug the device power cable from the rack outlet If the component with the pr
211. mark of Microsoft Corp UNIX is a registered trademark in the USA and other countries licensed by X Open Company Limited NetWare is a registered trademark of Novell Inc USA IPX is a registered trademark of Novell Inc USA HP OpenView is a trademark of Hewlett Packard Company USA Windows 95 is a trademark of Microsoft Corp USA Internet Explorer is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corp USA Netscape Navigator is a registered trademark of Netscape Communications Corporation All other brands and product names are trademarks of their respective holders Copyright 2001 Hitachi Ltd All Rights Reserved GR2K GA 1002 Rev 6 03 Release 4 00 May 2001 This publication contains the most current information available to date As new and revised sections are received new updates will be distributed Notice No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying and recording or stored in a database or retrieval system for any purpose without the expressed written permission of Hitachi Ltd Hitachi Ltd reserves the right to make changes to this document at any time without notice and assumes no responsibility for its use All the features described in this document may not be currently available Change Record Revision Description Affected No Pages March 2000 Original Edition All
212. materials related to such distribution and use acknowledge that the software was developed by the University of Southern California and or Information Sciences Institute The name of the University of Southern California may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THE UNIVERSITY OF SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA DOES NOT MAKE ANY REPRESENTATIONS ABOUT THE SUITABILITY OF THIS SOFTWARE FOR ANY PURPOSE THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE TITLE AND NON INFRINGEMENT xviii GR2K GA 1002 Rev 6 03 IN NO EVENT SHALL USC OR ANY OTHER CONTRIBUTOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHETHER IN CONTRACT TORT OR OTHER FORM OF ACTION ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE Other copyrights might apply to parts of this software and are so noted when applicable Questions concerning this software should be directed to Pavlin Ivanov Radoslavov pavlin catarina usc edu Id LICENSE pimd v 1 1 1998 05 29 21 58 20 kurtw Exp Part of this program has been derived from mrouted The mrouted program is covered by the license in the accompanying file named LICENSE mrouted The mrouted program is COPYRIGHT 1989 by The Board of Trustees of Leland Stanford Junior Universi
213. maximum The shared bus structure of GR2000 25S is shown in Figure 4 3 NIFO and NIF1 in the figure indicate the slot of NIF See the accommodation conditions in Table 4 10 when using 1OOBASE TX See the accommodation conditions in Table 4 11 when using 1OOBASE FX An implementation example is given below For l1OBASE T 1OOBASE TX and 100BASE FX calculate in full duplex RMP built in Ether Up to 600Mbps NF wen on same bus Front View Figure 4 3 Shared Structure of GR2000 2S and GR2000 4 On these router models NIFO and NIF2 connect with each other v bus and NIF1 and NIF3 connect with each other via the other bus The aggregat line speed of NIFO and NIF2 and that of NIF1 and NIF3 must not exceed 600 Mb Figure 5 19 illustrates this shared bus structure Detailed description follows Table 4 23 Restriction on Aggregate Line Speed for GR2000 4S and GR2000 4 Per Bus NIFO NIF2 or NIF1 NIF3 Per device 1 200 RM IO p to 600 Mbps NIF3 ME Up to 600 Mbps n same bus NIF 1 NIF O on same bus NEOC3 2S NIFO NE100 8T Example A 150Mbps x 1 150Mbps X Not usable 100BASE TX x 4 400 Mbps 10BASE T x 4 40 Mbps NE100 8T NIFO NE100 8T Example B Figure 4 5 Half Size NIF Installation Examples Example when half size and full size NIFs are to be installed 100 Mbps 10BASE T x 6 60 Mbps Not usable 100BASE TX x 4 400 Mbps 10BASE T x
214. mes 120 secon on point to point circuits If this device is connected to either of those shown in Table 4 84 by point to point circuits match the HelloInterval value and the Routerdeadinterval value in both routers 4 7 8 1 Cautions Regarding NextHop Resolution When advertising paths to the BGP speaker in one and the same AS in this device one s own peering address used for peering with the BGP speaker is set in NEXT_HOP attributes In addition path data NEXT_HOP attributes received by the device are resolved based on the IGP path There is therefore no need to set the other s peering address in NEXT_HOP attributes and Next_Hop is resolved normally as long as the addressing path corresponding to NEXT_HOP attributes is learned by IGP Designating the resolve nexthop all option of the bgp command makes it possible to extend path data used in Next Hop resolution to the IGP and BGP paths The about Next_Hop resolution processing applies to all peer types external peers peers between member ASs internal peers Path to la is to be learned by IGP AS External peer When you replace the existing router other than GR2000 with this router pay attention to possible deviation of RIP 1 implementation For example the followin routers have different implementations of RIP 1 Hitachi s NP200 NP150 NP100 NP120C and Cisco Systems routers When an interface address is further divided into subnets GR2000 does not crea natura
215. modate two lines but for the total speed value follow the accommodating conditions described below Table 3 23 Accommodating conditions for NAOC12 2M and NAOC12 2S Table 4 29 Accommodating conditions for NAOC12 2M and NAOC12 2S Accommodating conditions Statement 299200kbps Line 599000kbps NIF e Make the CBR peak cell rate of IVP per line 4 2 5 1 Shown here is the maximum number of peers that can be connected to GR2000 through LAN frame relay or ATM network The peer includes not only routers bu also terminals Maximum Number of ARP Entries In the LAN frame relay or ATM network the hardware address corresponding to destination address of the packet is determined by the address resolution protoc such as ARP and InverseARP Consequently the maximum number of peers on t said network media is determined by the maximum number of ARP entries See Table 4 31 for the maximum number of ARP entries for each GR2000 model Table 4 31 Maximum Number of ARP Entries Maximum No of ARP Entries Router Model Per Interface Per RP Per Router GR2000 2S 4096 4096 4096 GR2000 4S 4096 4096 4096 GR2000 6H 4096 4096 12 288 4096x3 4 2 6 4 2 6 1 maximum Number of VCs Per Line Per NIF Per Interface Per RP Per Router Router Model GR2000 2S GR2000 4S GR2000 6H GR2000 10H GR2000 20H Maximum Number of Interfaces and Multihome Subnets Maximum Number of Interfa
216. modem An example is shown below Example When dialing by using the Hayes interchangeable AT command e Dialing to 123 4567 on tone by using the public line e Dialing to 123 4567 on tone by using the private branch exchange e Dialing to 123 4567 on tone by using the private branch exchange after dialing zero and waiting for a few seconds Note 6 A CD ROM is required when performing replacement of the software by using this terminal Note 7 For the dial up IP connection procedure refer to the Operation guide 3 11 Dial up IP connection or workstation connected to the IP network This SNMP Manager program and its vehicle are option to GR2000 and to be prepared by the user Other than the IP network connectivity and the hardware requirements specified the software the personal computer or workstation for SNMP Manager has no particular requirement SNMP Manager on the other hand has certain requirements recommendations and restrictions as shown below m SNMP Manager version requirements The router supports SNMPv1 RFC115 To perform network management using SNMP manager use SNMPv1 H Recommended product Functionality of the following SNMP manager program is proven on this router and hence recommended If you use any other SNMP manager program check out its functionality before use SNMP Manager HP OpenView Network Node Manager Ver4 0x HP UX version HP OpenView Network Node Manager Ver5 01 HP UX version a HIT
217. mory card MC card being take out is prohibited zero Extinguished MC card zero being idle Memory card may be put in or taken out 3 12 GR2K GA 1002 Rev 6 03 Component Details Table 3 8 RM IO switch and function of LED indications Name of switch and LED ACCESS 1 Switch or LED LED Green Status Shows the state of MC card being one Content Blinking MC card one being accessed Memory card take out is prohibited Extinguished MC card one being idle Memory card may be put in or taken out LINK ACT LED Green Shows the ring state of RM Ethernet connection port Green Ring pulse being established LINE ERR LED Yellow Shows the fault occurrence in the RM Ethernet connection port Yellow Line fault detection LED Green Shows the contents of data transmission and reception of the RM Ethernet connection port Conditions of transmission and reception signals LAMP TEST Switch Non lock Lamp test Press LED s on all the boards are lit RESET Switch Non lock Stops the function of the system switching circuit Reset EMA SUPRESS GR2000 48 Switch Lock Stops the function of the system switching circuit Suppresses the operation standby system switching circuit of the duplicated basic control mechanism Do not turn this switch on during normal operation If the switch for the operation system is turned on EMA SUPP
218. nction IPv6 relaying S W processing Filter S W processing QoS None IP tunneling RM processing IPv6 multicast None RP C6 RP D6 H W processing H W processing H W processing RP processing H W processing Note 1 If RP C6 and RP D6 and RP ALRP C and RP D are mounted in a mixed way the IPv6 function can only be used in RP C6 and RP D6 The IPv6 function cannot be used in RP ALRP C and RP D Note 2 RP CV and RP DV are not supported in ROUTE OS6 4 2 12 2 conditions H Replacement of RP by inserting and removing a cock When replacement of RP is performed by inserting and removing a cock when the IPv6 function is used the device requires re actuation if replaced from RP C6 to RP ALRP C RP D or from RP ALRP C RP D to RP C6 and RP D6 New expansion of RP The device requires re actuation if RP C6 and RP D6 are additionally installed to IPv6 function restrictions regarding the routing processing mechanism RP mounting IPv4 multicast and the minimum required memory of a basic control module BC on the number of NDP static entries when an IPv6 function is used are shown in Table 4 61 The minimum required memory of RP is also shown in Table 4 62 Table 4 61 BCU minimum required memory IPv4 unicast IPv4 multi cast IPv6 unicast BCU z RA me No of route entries No of route entries No of No of No of No of mor
219. nction of LED indications 2 ccsscceceeeeee eee eeeeeeeeneeeneeneeeeeeeseeeeeeeenneneeeeeeeeeneees 3 16 RP C RP C6 switch and function of LED indications 0 ccccceceseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeens 3 17 NIF dt EE 3 18 Connector Specifications for NE100 8T NE100 8TA and NE100 8TB 2 eeeceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeees 3 19 NE100 4F NE100 4FS NE100 4FS4 switch and function of LED indications 0 ee 3 20 Connector Specifications for NE100 4F NE100 4FS and NE100 4FS4 cccceccceceeeseeesseeeeeeees 3 20 NE1G 1S NE1G 1SA NE1G 1L NE1G 1LA NE1G 1LHA NE1G 1LHA8 NE1G 1LB NE1G 1SB and NE1G 1LHBA switch and function of LED indications 0 ccccccecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 21 Connector Specifications for NE1G 1S NE1G 1SA NE1G 1L NE1G 1LA NE1G 1LHA NE1G 1LHA8 NE1G 1SB NE1G 1LB and NE1G 1LHBA 0 ccsccceeeeseseeeeeeeseceeeesesseeeeeeseseceeseseseeeeeesseseeenenseeseenens 3 22 NWVX 4 switch and function of LED indications cccceeeeeseeeeee eee eeee eee eeneeneeneeeeeseeeeeeeeseeneees 3 22 NWVX 4 LINE LED indication c ecceeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeseeseneceeeeseeceeseeseneeeeseseseeeesesneseeenseseeenenes 3 23 Connector Specifications for NWVX 4 Pin Assignment for V 24 eccsesseeeeesseeteeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeens 3 23 Connector Specifications for NWVX 4 Pin Assignment for X 21 eccsesseeeeess
220. nd Figure 3 11 g CO 2 o Q z Figure 3 10 RM CPU S Front Panel View E ja d z 3 a Figure 3 11 RM CPU M RM CPU MC2 and RM CPU L Front Panel View 3 10 GR2K GA 1002 Rev 6 03 Component Details 3 3 5 BOS RMB IO 4S and RM I0 H The RM IO 4S for GR2000 4S the RMB IO 4S for GR2000 4S BCU S850S and the RM IO H for GR2000 6H GR2000 10H and GR2000 20H physically appear as Figure 3 12 and Figure 3 14 The RM IO 4S RMB IO 4S and the RM IO H each have one CONSOLE RS232C port and one CONSOLE 1O0BASE T 100BASE TX port Table 3 9 and Table 3 10 show the connector specifications on these ports R Q EL rE S g H h o TAT dt i TT Re EE o Fle EHO FY B pacco OIPRIO acct delt DIS EW Figure 3 13 RMB IO 4S Front Panel View G LINK ACT 4 Y LINE ERR 4 AUX RS232C CONSOLE RS23 T R mi LAMP TEST RESET POWER READY ALARM POSTDI SP STATUS CODE CONSOLE 10BASE T 100BASE TX GI 0 0 0 0 0 BASE TX a of genlel Suk GE fg EEIT I u FENT fe 8 Hays THP ai THE HD om EH Figure 3 14 RM IO H Front Panel View GR2K GA 1002 3 11 Rev 6 03 GR2000 Installation Guide Switch and LED indication Table 3 8 RM IO switch and function of LED indications Name of switch Switch or LED Status Content and LED STATUS LED Green Shows the Green Opera
221. nd reference pim Redundant route route switching due to impediment Please pay attention to the following points if the multicast route is a redundant route ins this router When using PIM DM In the case of PIM DM the time required to switch the multicast packet communication from a redundant route is a maximum of 210 seconds When using DVMRP 4 14 3 1 Multicast is suitable for single direction communication of 1 transmitter N receiver in which data are distributed from a server transmitter to each group receiver Precautions are given below in relation to the network patterns applica to PIM DM and PIM SM PIM DM PIM DM can be applied to a tree type network Server Transmitter redundant route exists Server Transmitter J Multicast communication route addressed to Group 1 Group 1 receiver Router E p Multicast data packet flown periodically to Group 1 Inapplicable network pattern which a redundant route exists However please be sufficiently cautious when arranging the rendezvous points Figure 4 24 shows the applicable PIM SM network Tree type network Server Transmitter Rendezvous point Group 1 receiver H Configuration in which a receiver exists between the transmitter and a rendezvous point Relaying via the rendezvous point cannot be performed efficiently if multicast communication is attempted from a server to Group 1 in the fo
222. nding on the humidity of the installation site Table 5 2 Dust Requirements Environmental Item Falling Dust Measurement W Floating Dust Mass Density Measurement mg m Light Source ZJN To reduce external magnetic field note the following in facility construction such main power line and air conditioning Do not cross the distribution panel location for the computer system and the primary side main line cable construction route in the ceiling of the compute room or on the floor Make the cable route as short as possible when constructing along the wall of the computer room The location of the air conditioning control panel and the cable construction route of the primary side main line should be the same as mentioned above The main line cable type must be multi strand If you use single strand cable minimize the distance between cables in each phase Main Computer H Line Computer Distribution Panel 5 1 7 An ordinary office is acceptable for installation of the router however if the room where the router is to be installed is to be newly built flooring with the following qualities is recommended It is important not to have exposed metal in contact with flooring for safety reasons m Insulation resistance Use materials where the floor surface and ground resistance is 1 x 105 108 W cm This is recommended for error and electric shock protection against static electricity This condition is ea
223. nditions 1 STANFORD grants to LICENSEE a nonexclusive and nontransferable license to use copy and modify the computer software mrouted hereinafter called the Program upon the terms and conditions hereinafter set out and until Licensee discontinues use of the Licensed Program 2 LICENSEE acknowledges that the Program is a research tool still in the development state that it is being supplied as is without any accompanying services from STANFORD and that this license is entered into in order to encourage scientific collaboration aimed at further development and application of the Program GR2K GA 1002 xvii Rev 6 03 GR2000 Installation Guide 3 LICENSEE may copy the Program and may sublicense others to use object code copies of the Program or any derivative version of the Program All copies must contain all copyright and other proprietary notices found in the Program as provided by STANFORD Title to copyright to the Program remains with STANFORD 4 LICENSEE may create derivative versions of the Program LICENSEE hereby grants STANFORD a royalty free license to use copy modify distribute and sublicense any such derivative works At the time LICENSEE provides a copy ofa derivative version of the Program to a third party LICENSEE shall provide STANFORD with one copy of the source code of the derivative version at no charge to STANFORD 5 STANFORD MAKES NO REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED By
224. ne Speed s seccccsseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeenseeeeenes 4 46 Maximum Number of Dynamic and Static Entries ccseccceseeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeneeseeseeneneeeeeeeeenes 4 47 Conditions of NIF in which Tag VLAN Is Accommodated eccecceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeneeeeeseeneeeenseenenes 4 47 Maximum Number of Tag VLANS to Be Set ccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeneeeeseeeneeseeseeneeeseseeeneeseaseeneeeseeeeneenes 4 48 Maximum Number of Tag VLANSs to Be Set in MUulti HOme cccceeeeeceeeeeneeeeeeeeeneeseesesneeeeeeeenenes 4 48 COPS agent accommodating CONAITIONS ccceeeeeeeeseeeneeeeeeeeeeeeseseeeneeseseeeneeseeseeeneeseseeeneeseeseeneeeenes 4 49 PPP Configuration Definition Settings Required with Specific Devices sscsseseereseeteeeeees 4 52 lii GR2K GA 1002 Rev 6 03 Setting the subscribing conditions and configuration defining information of the device 4 53 Configuration Definition on GR2000 for POS in Multivendor Environment ccccesseereeeeseees 4 56 NWJ1 8U CONNECTION reStriCtiONS ceceeeeceeseseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeseeeneeseseeeneneseseeenesseeeneeeeseeeneeeeeseeenenens 4 57 ATM Configuration Definition Settings Required with NP200 and NP220 ccssseeeeseseereeeeees 4 61 ATM Configuration Definition Settings Required with AN1000 cssseccccsseeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeseeneeeenees 4 62 ATM Configuration Definition Settings Required with AN100
225. nees 2 10 Rear View of GR2000 20H with DC Input 2 2 ce cescceeeeeeseeeeceeeeeeeeeen sees eeeseeeeseeeeaeeesaeeeaeenseneneeenaes 2 11 Front View of GR2000 4 AC Input 222 22 ccseceeeceeeeceseeeeeeeeneeeneeeeaeeesaeeeaeensaesneeeseceeseeeseeeeseeseeeeeeesees 2 12 Rear View of GR2000 4 AC Inpult 22 2 cceceeeeceseeceeeeeeseeeseeeeaeeeeaeeaeessaeesecesseeeseeeeseeeseeeeseeseeneeeeeees 2 12 Front View of GR2000 10 with AC Input cceccceseeeeeeeeeceeeceececenecen senses saeeeseeeeaeeeaaeseaeenseeeseeenaes 2 13 Rear View of GR2000 10 with AC Imput 2 cceccceeeceeeeeeeceeeceeeeeeeeeee sees eeeeseeseseeeeaeeesaeeeseesseeeneeeeees 2 13 Front View of GR2000 10 with DC Input NEEN NENNEN NEE NEEN NEE EEN NEEN 2 14 Rear View of GR2000 10 with DC Imput ccecceeseceeeeeeeeeeeceeseeenecenseeeeeeeseeeeseeeeaesesaeeeaeenseeeeeenses 2 14 Front View of GR2000 20 with AC Input 2 cecceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeceeeeeenecee sees eeeeseeeeseeeeaeseaaeeeaeenseeeneeeaes 2 15 Rear View of GR2000 20 with AC Imput 2 ceccceeeceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenecenseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeaeeesaeeeseenseeeseeeeaes 2 16 Front View of GR2000 20 with DC Input 2 cceccceseceeeeeeeceeeceeeeceneceeseeeeseeeseeenseeeeaeeeaaeeeaeeneeeeseeenaes 2 17 Rear View of GR2000 20 with DC Imput 2 cceccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeenecen sees eeeeseseeseeeeaeeesaeeeanenseeeeeenees 2 18 Half Sized and Full Sized NIE Modu
226. neeseeeeeneeeseseesneesseseeneeeseeesenenseeseenees 4 87 Chapter 5 Installation Site Conditions nsssnssssnsnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 5 1 Process of Falling Dust MeaSureme nt ceceeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeneeeseeeeseeeeeeseeeseeeesneaeeeeeeseeseeenseeneeeeees 5 2 Main Power Line Examples ccccceseeeeceeeseeeeeeeeesceeseeeseneeeeeesseeeeseeesaneeseeeaseeeseeeesseaeseeeaseaeseeenseeeeeeeeess 5 3 Standard Non Redundant Power Feeding with 100V ac Input eecceseseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeneeeesneeeeees 5 7 Redundant Power Feeding with 100V ac IMput cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeeseeeeeeenseeeeesseeeeeeeenas 5 7 Standard Non Redundant Power Feeding with 200V ac Input eecceseseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeneeensneenenees 5 8 Redundant Power Feeding with 200V ac IMput cccceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeenseeeeesseceeeeeeess 5 8 Standard Non Redundant Power Feeding with 48V or 60V de Input cccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenes 5 9 Redundant Power Feeding with 48V or GOV de INPUt cccesseseeeeeeseeeeeeenseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeenseneeeeensneeneeees 5 9 Airflow OG ROT eege gege ee en 5 13 Airflow Of GR2QQO 10O WEE 5 14 Airflow Of GR2000 20H o EEN e dee ee Eae aa aeaea Ee eege Eege 5 14 lee lege ge ALE ME 5 15 Airflow Of GR2000 Oc eege e are a ae DANN eben 5 15 Alrtlow Of GR2000 20 KEE 5 16 Chapter 6 Hardware Installation ccs ccs
227. nen 6 58 6 4 3 2 LAN 100BASE FX 1000BASE SX 1000BASE LX and 1000BASE LH 6 59 6 4 3 3 WAN V 24 V 35 ANd X 31 6 59 6 4 3 4 WAN BRI and PRI iaa e AAE EAA ANEREN 6 60 6 4 3 5 WAN Secondary and Tertiary ecreis terea Ea ee E EEEE Ea ea 6 60 6 4 3 6 WAN OC 3c POS OC 12c POS and OC 48c DOG 6 61 6 4 3 7 ATM MMF SMF OC 3c ATM MMF OC 3c ATM SMF OC 12c ATM MMF and ECKE ROT 6 61 6 4 3 8 ATMi25MbpS ATM durana e a eege gei deeg eege 6 62 6 5 Mounting and Unmounting of Flash Memory Card MC cccccceseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeneeeeees 6 62 625 1 Mounting Of MG ria eaaa Aes a aS AENA ge AASA tis KaR EAR NRA ARAARA 6 62 6 5 2 Unmounting of EE 6 63 6 6 Handling of GBIC EE 6 64 6 7 Connection of Setup CONSOLME ccccceeeeceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeseseeeeeeseeeeseeeeseeeeeeseeeesneeseesessneeseeeeseenes 6 65 6 7 1 Console SpecCifiCAatiOnS surie AR O T O A 6 66 GR2K GA 1002 XXX X Rev 6 03 GR2000 Installation Guide Chapter 7 Starting Setting Up and Stopping ee ee 7 1 7 1 Overview of Device Operation c sccccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee seeeeeeensneeneeeenseeeeeenseceeeeeeeseneeeeenseeenanenseeeeenees 7 1 7 2 Starting the Reuter tege dente eege 7 2 ZA Restarting the Roter ee ENEE ENEE 7 2 7 4 Setting Up Initial Configuration c ceccsseeeeeeeeeseeneeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeneeeseseeeneeseseeeneeeeeseeeneeeesneeneeseneneeees 7 3 T Stopping the Router eet EENS n A REAA EEE AAEE AGA E
228. ng Manager RM Routing Processor RP Network Interface Unit NIF power supply subsystem PS and cabinet In addition the mid range and high end models GR2000 6H GR2000 10H GR2000 20H implement a highspeed RM RP connection by means of the Crossbar Switch CSW The device components are collectively called the Basic Control Unit BCU A brief description of each component is given below H Routing Manager The RM manages the entire router and processes routing protocols The routing processes include creation and update of routing tables and forwarding routing tables to the Routing Processor RP In the GR2000 2S the Routing Manager Processor RMP integrates the functions of the RM and RP In all other models the RM is made up of two separate units RM CPU and RM IO H Routing Processor RP The RP provides wire speed packet relaying in accordance with the routing table information supplied by the RM It also performs ARP ICMP processing control of Network Interface Units processing of network interface protocols e g PPP frame relay and ATM statistic functions and error handling In the GR2000 6H GR2000 10H and GR2000 20H an additional RP provides load balancing and faster processing speeds Network Interface Unit NIF The NIF provides Layer 1 and Layer 2 support for various interfaces Since the NIF is separate from the RP and provides for specific interfaces a high degree of flexibility is achieved meeting a wide
229. nternet Protocol Type Of Service Telecommunication Technology Committee Time To Live Unspecified Bit Rate User Datagram Protocol xxiv GR2K GA 1002 Rev 6 03 UNI UPC VBR VC VCI VP VPI WAN WS xDSL User Network Interface Usage Parameter Control Variable Bit Rate Virtual Channel Virtual Call Virtual Channel Identifier Virtual LAN Virtual Path Virtual Path Identifier Virtual Private Network Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol Wide Area Network Work Station World Wide Web x Digital Subscriber Line GR2K GA 1002 Rev 6 03 XXV GR2000 Installation Guide This page left intentionally blank xxvi GR2K GA 1002 Rev 6 03 Safety Guide This document provides safety related notices for use of the GR2000 Gigabit Router Read the following Safety Guidelines carefully before using the product and follow them to take full advantage of the GR2000 s features General Safety Guidelines H Perform all operations in accordance with the instructions and procedures as described in the product manuals H Be alert and use common sense The hazard warnings cannot cover every possible situation Do not perform any operations not described in the documentation In the event of a problem turn off the power unplug the power cable and contact a qualified service technician H Follow all precautionary and hazard messages on the GR2000 and in the documentation Failure to do so may result in bodi
230. oblem cannot be identified remove all power cables from the rack outlet Contact a qualified service technician In the case of redundant power supplies make sure that ALL switches and circuit breakers are turned off If the device is dropped and any part is broken turn the power switch off unplug the power cable from the outlet and contact service Continued use may cause fire or electric shock Do not use any unspecified power source or power voltage Observe all terminal ratings and markings on the product To prevent electric shock use only grounded power outlets when using AC power Do not overload power outlets In the case of DC power or the GR2000 20H use a ground wire to prevent electric shock Do not use adapters to connect multiple power cables to the same outlet Use standard safety procedures with the power cable Use only the power cable supplied with the device Use of other cables may cause fire or electric shock Keep the power cable away from extreme heat Similarly do not use the provided power cable for products other than the GR2000 since this could cause a fire or electrical shock hazard Do not operate the device in wet or damp conditions If liquid is spilled on the device turn power off and unplug the power cable from the outlet Discontinue use to avoid the risk of fire or electric shock Place device on a stable level surface Do not place or stack objects on top of the device If a foreign object falls in
231. odation conditions on the number of VCs see Table 4 63 4 2 12 4 Number of NDP Entries In a network of Ethernet and gigabit Ethernet the hardware address corresponding to the destination address of a packet to be transmitted is determined by address solution in NDP Therefore the maximum number of destination routers is determined by the number of NDP entries The number of NDP entries is shown in Table 4 63 interfaces The maximum number of interfaces in each model whose IPv6 addres can be set is shown in Table 4 64 The value shown in the table is the value obtained when the number of tunnel interfaces is subtracted Moreover the operation in the maximum number of interfaces presupposes that router informat is set using a static route The maximum number of effective interfaces is limited the performance of route information calculation when dynamic routing such as RIPng and BGP4 is used Table 4 64 Number of interfaces Number of interfaces Router Model IPv6 relaying Per RP Per Router GR2000 2S S W processing 32 32 GR2000 4S S W processing 32 32 GR2000 6H GR2000 10H GR2000 20H GR2000 4 H W processing 256 256 GR2000 6H GR2000 10H over IPv4 tunnel is shown in Table 4 66 The total number of both tunnel interfaces must be lower than the value shown in Table 4 66 Table 4 66 Number of Tunnel Interfaces Number of interfaces Router Model IPv4 over IPv6 IPv6 over IPv4 GR2000
232. of RPs RP Al RP C and RP D apply to specific GR2000 models as shown in Table 4 6 H RP mounting conditions RP mounting conditions by each model RP mounting conditions by each model are shown in Table 9 2 The RP mounting conditions by each model Table 4 4 The RP mounting conditions by each model Model RP GR2000 2S GR2000 4S GR2000 6H GR2000 10H GR2000 20 RP A1 X O O O O RP CRP C6 D xX O Note 1 Note 2 RP DRP D6 X O O O O Mounting number of Mounting number of Mounting number of RP A1 RP C RP C6 whole RP GR2000 10H 100V AC input 5 or less 5 or less 4 or less 5 or less 3 or less 5 or less GR2000 20H 100V AC input 10 or less 10 or less 9 or less 10 or less 6 or less 8 or less 4 or less 7 or less 1 or less 5 or less The following models have no mounting limitation due to mounting of RP C e GR2000 6H e GR2000 10H used in 200V AC or 48V DC e GR2000 20H used in 200V AC or 48V DC Table 4 6 Applicable Types and Quantities of RPs by Router Model a NIFs apply to specific RP types and specific GR2000 models as shown i_ Table 4 Table 4 7 Quantities of NIFs by Router Model NIF Type Application to RP Type Max Q ty per Router Model AE IEE RP C RP D S S S S Inter Board RP C6and RP D6and amp ql ql A face Size NIF Name RP Aa1 RP cv RP V 6 G6 5 5 LAN Halt NE100 8T Yes No Yes 2 4 6 10 NE
233. ol Protocol IDentifier Protocol Independent Multicast Protocol Independent Multicast Dense Mode Protocol Independent Multicast Sparse Mode Programmable Logic Design PPP over SONET SDH Point to Point Protocol Packet Per Second Primary Rate Interface Permanent Virtual Channel Connection Permanent Virtual Circuit Quality of Service Router Advertisement Remote Defect Indication REJect Request For Comments GR2K GA 1002 Rev 6 03 xxiii GR2000 Installation Guide RIP RIPng RLB RM RMON RP RPF RQ RSVP SA SAP SD SDH SDLC SD I SDU SFD SMF SNA SNAP SNMP SONET SPF SPT SPX SSAP SSP SVC TA TCC TCP IP TOS Routing Information Protocol Routing Information Protocol next generation Remote Loop Back Routing Manager Remote Network Monitoring MIB Routing Processor Reverse Path Forwarding ReQuest Resource Reservation Protocol Source Address Service Access Point Start Delimiter Synchronous Digital Hierarchy Service Advertising Protocol Super Digital I interface Service Data Unit Start Frame Delimiter Single Mode Fiber Systems Networking Architecture Sub Network Access Protocol Simple Network Management Protocol Synchronous Optical Network Shortest Path First Spanning Tree Sequenced Packet Exchange Source Service Access Point Switch to Switch Protocol Switched Virtual Channel Connection Terminal Adapter Transmission Control Character Transmission Control Protocol I
234. ole port two memory card MC slots one 10BASE T port and a packet forwarding ASIC 2 4 2 3 RMB CPU Each RMB CPU has a common Pentium III 850 MHz and four main storage MS slots Since the main storage of 256 bytes MS256 can be mounted a memory of 1G bytes as maximum can be mounted Being different from RM IO BCU S850S BCU H850H BCU M850H and BCU L850H have the RS 232C AUX board in RMB IO 2 4 2 4 RMB IO RMB IO has two RS232C console boards two memory card MC mechanism slots one board of l1OBASE T 1OOBASE TX and a packet forwarding engine Packet Forwarding ASIC Duplication of BCU is possible only in GR2000 6H GR2000 10H and GR2000 20H by mounting two sets of BCU 2 30 GR2K GA 1002 Rev 6 03 Product Overview 2 4 2 5 2 4 3 Crossbar Switch CSW The CSW provides highspeed packet transfer between the RM and the RP on the models of GR2000 6H GR2000 10H and GR2000 20H On GR2000 6H the CSW is included in the RM CPU board Its 3 by 3 crossbar switch performs highspeed packet transfer between RM and up to 3 RPs On GR2000 10H the CSW is included in the RM CPU board Its 6 by 6 crossbar switch performs highspeed packet transfer between RM and up to 5 RPs On GR2000 20H the CSW is implemented as two separate boards CSWM and CSWS one acting as backup Its 11 by 11 crossbar switch performs highspeed packet transfer between RM and up to 10 RPs Routing Processor Module RP The RP uses the routing table
235. ompatible GR2000 2S Not Has RP D function mountable IPv6 IPv4 dual stack Packet transfer rate 1 0Mpps IPv4 Full duplex 0 8Mpps IPv6 MS 128MB standard 256MB max e Packet transfer engine is used commonly for transmission and reception e Routing retrieval engine is used commonly for transmission and reception e The mounted processor is MIPS RM7000 250Mhz RP C6 is a routing processor to which the hardware routing function of IPv6 has been enhanced on RP C to accommodate high speed lines such as OC 48c and the gigabit Ethernet of multi port versions Its hardware configuration is as follows e The packet transfer engines are exclusively mounted for transmission and reception The routing retrieval engines are exclusively mounted for transmission and reception e The mounted processor is MIPS RM7000 250 MHz e A memory of 128 M bytes is mounted in a fixed way RP CV is a routing processor to which the hardware routing function of IPv6 has been enhanced on RP C to accommodate high speed lines such as OC 48c and the gigabit Ethernet of multi port versions Its hardware configuration is as follows e The packet transfer engines are exclusively mounted for transmission and reception The routing retrieval engines are exclusively mounted for transmission and reception The mounted processor is MIPS RM7000 250 MHz A memory of 128 M bytes is mounted in a fixed way 1 For the GR2000 10 20 there are some limit
236. on line fault active down occurred being occurred 8 3 Line test Line being tested 9 test 3 Y In loop upon In loop upon request looped by rem request from from counterpart 12 counterpart In fault In fault 4 fault Command In maintenance 10 closed being blocked 5 Not used Configuration Not used unused definition not Configuration set yet definition not set yet 10 Configuration Configuration mismatch The NWE3 1C physically appear as Figure 3 41 CHANNELIZED E3 34Mbps Figure 3 41 NWE3 1C Front Panel View Switch and LED indication Table 3 54 NWE3 1C switch and function of LED indications STATUS LED Green Shows the operating Green Operable operation LINE Line state an ERR a ah an ee Line state Detail of state SR See by indication in M 1 and browse e 3 Ss Ss Being Being initialized 3 initialize initialized G 3 Y Y Being In normal In standby 3 active up operated operation Y 3 Line fault being In operation line fault active down occurred being occurred 8 G 3 Line test Line being tested 9 test In fault In fault 4 fault Command In maintenance 10 closed being blocked Not used Configuration Not used unused definition not Configuration set yet definition not set yet 10 Conf
237. on the input power cable firmly to the plug beneath the power switch When the power supply is duplexed do this in two positions Front this connection work requires expertise the work must be conducted by qualified personnel The steps are as follows l Procure the DC input power cable in compliance with the specifications shown below When the power supply is duplexed redundant procure two cables Cord structure 3 wire AWG No of each conductor determined by ampacity 8 Cord diameter determined by cable clamp 23mm or smaller Size of wire binding screw on terminal board M5 Ensure that the breaker switch in the front end of the chassis is in the O out position When the power supply is duplexed make sure in two positions Connect each terminal wire of the input power cable firmly to the terminal board and the ground See Figure 6 49 for the dimensions of the terminal board and the terminal wire When the power supply is duplexed repeat the connection work in two positions Fix the input power cable with the cable clamp not illustrated When the power supply is duplexed repeat the fixation in two positions Unit mm Figure 6 49 Terminal Board Wire Dimensions for DC Input to GR2000 10H 6 4 2 5 GR2000 20H 200V AC Input Figure 6 50 shows how to connect the AC input power cable to GR2000 20H Th steps are as follows l Prepare the AC input power cable supplied with the device The cable complie
238. one input power cord and one DC DC power un DC46003 U Figure 3 61 illustrates the AC input unit and one of the DC DC power unit s of th POW L200H and the POW L200HA The dimensions are approximate in mm and the drawing is not to scale Be noted that the locations for these components are fixed See Table 3 91 and se also Figure 2 11 and Figure 2 12 in Subsection 2 2 173 4 GES The POW LDCH comprises one DC input unit IN150 6U and five DC DC power units two DCO3R375 Us for 3 3V de output two DC38001 Us for 3 3V 24V de output and one DC46003 U for 3 3V 5V dc output The POW LDCHA comprises one DC input unit IN150 6U and one DC DC power unit DC46003 U Figure 3 62 illustrates the DC input unit and one of the DC DC power unit s of the POW LDCH and the POW LDCHA The dimensions are approximate in mm and the drawing is not to scale Be noted that the locations for these components are fixed See Table 3 92 and see also Figure 2 13 and Figure 2 14 in Subsection 2 2 7 206 3 f HS f if SC Figure 3 63 illustrates the power unit of the POW S100 The dimensions are approximate in mm and the drawing is not to scale Figure 3 63 Power Unit of POW S100 3 6 10 POW M100 and POW L200 Figure 3 64 illustrates the power unit of the POW M100 and
239. onnector Specifications for NWMX1 4 cccessseeeeeeenee eee eeeeeeeseeeeseeeseeeeseeeeaeeesneaeseeenseeeeeeeesneeneeeennees 3 34 NWJ1 8U switch and function of LED indications ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesneeeeeeseeseeeeeeeees 3 35 Connector Specifications for NWI1 8U ccceeeeeneeeeeeneeeeeeeeneeeseeeeeneeseeeeeeeeeseseseneesaesesneeeeeeeneseneeseene 3 35 NWT1 4 switch and function of LED indications ecceeeeeeeeeeneeeneeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeneees 3 36 NWT1 4 switch and function of LED indication c s eeeeecee cece eee eeneeeeeeeeeeeeneeeseneeneeeeeseeseeeeeneees 3 37 Connector Specifications for NWT11 4 c cccceseeeeeeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeneeeeseeeneeseeseeneeeeesseeeeesseeneeeeeseeneeeens 3 37 NWE1 4 switch and function of LED indications eeceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneneeneeeeeseeseeeeeneees 3 38 NWE1 4 switch and function of LED indication eeeceeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeneees 3 39 Connector Specifications for NWE1 4 ccccesseeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeneeseeeeseeeeseseseneeseeeeseeseeeseneseeeeenne 3 39 NW2J 1U switch and function of LED indications ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeseeeeeeeeneees 3 40 NW2J 1U switch and function of LED indication s seeeceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseeeeeneees 3 41 Connector Specifications for NWJ2 1U c
240. or SC 2 core to the mating receptacle on the own router When connecting push until a click SC 2 core When removing just pull Figure 6 66 Connection of OC 3c POS OC 12c POS or OC 48c POS Cable Connect SC 2 core 6 4 3 7 ATM MMF SMF OC 3c ATM MMF OC 3c ATM SMF OC 12c ATM MMF and OC 12c ATM SMF mating receptacle on the own router 8 pin modular connector Ensure the same interface type between the connector and the receptacle prior to physical connection A mismatch may cause malfunction or a failure Caution 10BASE T 100BASE TX WAN BRI PRI and 25Mbps ATM all use the same Figure 6 70 illustrates how to unmount an MC Note When the setup console is connected access to Lever 1 may be difficult because this lever is adjacent to the console port In such a case temporarily disconnect the console cable and operate the lever Lever 0 MC To unmount the MC push the lever correspond to the slot in this case Lever 1 Methods of fitting removing the GBIC to NEIG 4C are described below How to fit e 2 Let the lever fall down 1 Push the modules in securely to the end 1 Raise the lever and Note Push it in until click is heard push it in securely to the In case of Module A In case of Module B m How to remove After the hardware installation is complete initial setup of this router from the se console is mandatory To prepare for this operation connect the se
241. or the RM IO 4S or RM IO H defined in the preceding subsection S e a ko Ww oc o Ow g Bo ZE Ua Sw E span o GHH O oi 22 SZ R 398 264 as lt Oz 3 Rene bh see S 88 EIDO J f Figure 3 15 RM IO S Front Panel View S 3 H A w w t bE po PPS b Bor Ele y ap su ee fut 7s50 o 200 oO O Qu Z2 a a 7 52u oge 2 LC ls QD Z a5 22 eS58ses8 88 Bl 6 98 35 S a E latua D 2 zt st o Sag CP Oss Wie C9 4 Figure 3 16 RM IO M and RM IO L Front Panel View 3 14 GR2K GA 1002 Rev 6 03 Component Details 3 3 7 RMB IO H The RMB IO H for GR2000 6H GR2000 10H and GR2000 20H BCU H850H BCU M850H and BCU L850H physically appears as Figure 3 17 OG me mee og ROBO ak o A cen o gt g ora oo uy g e SE ga A ae S S Ss J Hues uy Gi aS eo Acco 00 Seu ae SE x 2282374 S Do S zo 0 accl foo eoe o cff Ye o H RET Figure 3 17 RMB IO H Front Panel View 3 3 8 CSW The CSW L3MH for GR2000 20H and the CSW L1M and the CSW L3M for GR2000 20 physically appear as Figure 3 18 and Figure 3 19 To explore the LED display functions see the Operations Guide Figure 3 18 CSW L3MH Front Panel View E o oki o Figure 3 19 CSW L1M and CSW L3M Front Panel View TATUS S Switch and LED indication Table 3 11 BCU switch and function of LED indications Name of switch Switch or LED Status Content and LED STATUS LED Green Shows the Green Operable operation GR2000 4 10 Y
242. panese Domain Identifier Not AcKnowledge Local Area Network Link Access Procedure Balanced Mode Link Control Protocol Label Distribution Protocol LAN Emulation Client LAN Emulation Server Logical IP Subnetwork Local Loop Back Logical Link Control Link Quality Monitoring Link Quality Report Label Switched Path Label Switched Router Media Access Control Memory Card Message Digest 5 Management Information Base Multi Mode Fiber Multi Protocol Label Switching Maximum Receive Unit Network Service Access Point Maximum Transfer Unit Not AcKnowledge Name Binding Protocol Network Control Protocol Neighbor Discovery Protocol Network Entity Title Network Basic Input Output System xxii GR2K GA 1002 Rev 6 03 NIF NLP NRZ NSAP NSSA NTP PAD OC 3c OC 12c OC 48c OAM ONU OSI OSPF OUI PAD PC PDB PDU PHY PID PIM PIM DM PIM SM PLD POS PPP PPS PRI PVC Qos RDI Rej Network Interface board Network Layer Protocol Non Return to Zero Network Service Access Point Not So Stubby Area Network Time Protocol PADding Optical Carrier level 3 concatenation Optical Carrier level 12 concatenation Optical Carrier level 48 concatetenation Operation Administration and Management Optical Network Unit Open Systems Interconnection Open Shortest Path First Organizationally Unique Identifier PADding Personal Computer Permanent Data Base Protocol Data Unit PHYsical layer protoc
243. preciate not receiving lengthy legal documents to sign The sources are provided for free but without warranty of any kind The library has been entirely written by Jean loup Gailly and Mark Adler it does not include third party code If you redistribute modified sources we would appreciate that you include in the file ChangeLog history information documenting your changes Apache HTTP server Copyright 1995 1998 The Apache Group All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment This product includes software developed by the Apache Group for use in the Apache HTTP server project http www apache org GR2K GA 1002 XV Rev 6 03 GR2000 Installation Guide 4 The names Apache Server and Apache Group must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission For written permission please contact ap
244. prior written permission THE UNIVERSITY OF OREGON DOES NOT MAKE ANY REPRESENTATIONS ABOUT THE SUITABILITY OF THIS SOFTWARE FOR ANY PURPOSE THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE TITLE AND NON INFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL UO OR ANY OTHER CONTRIBUTOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHETHER IN CONTRACT TORT OR OTHER FORM OF ACTION ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE Other copyrights might apply to parts of this software and are so noted when applicable Questions concerning this software should be directed to Kurt Windisch kurtw antc uoregon edu Id LICENSE v 1 2 1998 05 29 21 58 19 kurtw Exp Part of this program has been derived from PIM sparse mode pimd The pimd program is covered by the license in the accompanying file named LICENSE pimd The pimd program is COPYRIGHT 1998 by University of Southern California Part of this program has been derived from mrouted The mrouted program is covered by the license in the accompanying file named LICENSE mrouted The mrouted program is COPYRIGHT 1989 by The Board of Trustees of Leland Stanford Junior University mrouted The mrouted program is covered by the following license Use of the mrouted program represents acceptance of these terms and co
245. r bolts keep the screw jacks four removed 4 Appearance 5 Section A GR2000 20H opening for air D An RK Caster M12 nut pitch 1 7 RT OD i it oF 7 bel Max 34 Screwjack Caster Max rise of screwjack Required space for exhaust air When using earthquake proof bolts replace with them all screwja Frame base opening for air Earthquake proof bolt Max 100 Screwjack D Max rise of screwjack called UNDER SUPPORT instead of screwjacks The steps are shown below l 2 3 Remove the M12 bolts attached or mounted to UNDER SUPPORT and fasten them temporarily to the M12 bolt holes for the screwjacks Insert UNDER SUPPORT between the bottom of the router and the M12 bolts Tighten the M12 bolts Se e Using a wrench loosen the stopper nut M12 of each screwjack on the target router this allows you to adjust the screwjack Turn the screwjack counterclockwise until it lifts 10 mm from the floor surface Fasten again the stopper nut attached to each screwjack Maintaining the resulting screwjack status move the router When you reach the destination fix the location of the router in the reverse order of 1 4 Do not attempt to fix the location of the router by locking the casters Stopper nut 6 3 4 1 Each GR2000 model can be mounted in a 19 inch rack conforming to JIS and EI standards When you choose this style of install
246. r by local laws or regulations Table 5 7 shows typical power consumption and heat dissipation figures Each configuration assumes the maximum configuration Table 5 7 Typical Power Consumption and Heat Dissipation Figures Configuration Input Power Condition Power Heat dissipat Voltage Frequency Consumption A w GR2000 2S 100 Vac 50 60 1 Hz 2 200 GR2000 4S 100 Vac 50 60 1 Hz 3 260 200 Vac 50 60 1 Hz 3 260 GR2000 6H 100 Vac 50 60 1 Hz 12 1140 200 Vac 50 60 1 Hz 12 1140 48 Vdc 12 950 GR2000 10H with either redundant 100 Vac 50 60 1 Hz 12 1080 ornon redundant raw 200 Vac 50 60 1 Hz 8 1350 48 Vdc 27 1170 GR2000 20H with either redundant 200 Vac 50 60 1 Hz 14 2340 n upper left side In upper right side Out lower rear end Out lower right side Out lower left side a _ Out center bottom Out left side In right side Figure 5 12 Airflow of GR2000 4 In upper rear end gt In upper left side In upper e right side n upper eft side In upper right side In upper front end 5 2 7 3 Heated air from the other device may be taken into this router causing the intake air temperature to exceed the router s environmental requirements m When the air intake or exhaust force of the other device is too strong a rever pressure on this router s intake air may
247. r to the Facility plan The power supply configuration and specific POW model name vary depending on the GR2000 models as shown below Table 2 6 PS model name for each device Device cabinet Power PS model name Duplication supply type GR2000 2S AC100V PS is built in cabinet GR2000 4S AC100V POW S100S Duplication by using two POW S100S GR2000 6H AC100V POW H100H Duplication by using two POW H100H DC 48V POW HDCH Duplication by using two POW HDCH GR2000 10H AC100V POW M100H SS POW M100HA Redundancy mechanism for POW M100H AC200V POW M200H SS POW M200HA Redundancy mechanism for POW M200H DC 48V POW MDCH 8 POW MDCHA Redundancy mechanism for POW MDCH GR2000 20H AC200V POW L200H POW L200HA Redundancy mechanism for POW L200H DC 48V POW LDCH POW LDCHA Redundancy mechanism for POW LDCH 2 4 6 CPU Fan The CPU fan located on the RM CPU board of the BCU has a life expectancy of 100 000 hours of operation 2 4 7 Main Storage Card MS The router uses two different capacities of memory cards the MS64 with 64 MB is used on the BCU and RP while the MS128 with 128 MB on the BCU only 2 4 8 Flash Memory Card MC The router uses two different capacities of flash memory cards 30 MB MC30 and 64 MB MC64 Either card stores the software configuration files and log information 2 36 GR2K GA 1002 Rev 6 03 Product Overview 2 4 9 2 4 10 2 4 11 Interface Cables Only leased interface cables for V 24 V 35 X 21 of serial channel are avail
248. r to the Hardware operation manual Mounting position of RM IO CSW NIF board 10 12 14 16 18 NPUTO AC PS INPUT1 AC Power breaker Figure 2 37 Front View of GR2000 20H with AC Input 2 26 GR2K GA 1002 Rev 6 03 Product Overview RS 232C connector for AUX DC DC power supply unit x 6 FAN2 FANS FANO Mounting position of DC DC power supply unit POW POW POW POW POW POW 5 4 3 2 1 0 Figure 2 38 Rear View of GR2000 20H with AC Input Mounting position of RM CPU and RP board Placement of fans in fan tray top view front Fan 2 power Fan 1 power rear FAN3 front Fan 4 main Fan 3 main rear FAN1 Upper fan tray FAN2 FANO Lower fan tray GR2K GA 1002 Rev 6 03 2 27 GR2000 Installation Guide 2 4 Device Components Table 2 1 and Table 2 3 show the maximum number of device components described in this section depending on the target GR2000 model Table 2 1 Maximum Number of Device Components on Enhanced Models Device Component GR2000 2S GR2000 4S GR2000 6H GR2000 10H GR2000 20H Power Supply Unit POW Additional POW POWA Basic Control Unit BCU a Main memory BCU other than MS64 MS128 MS256 below BCU H850H BC
249. range of user needs Power Supply Unit POW The POW uses external power to generate a stable direct current for the internal units of the router In the GR2000 4S GR2000 6H GR2000 10H and GR2000 20H an additional POW provides a duplexed power supply configuration that improves the systems availability H Crossbar Switch CSW The CSW provides highspeed packet transfer between the RM and RP for the following models of GR2000 6H GR2000 10H GR2000 20H GR2000 4 GR2000 10 and GR2000 20 m Basic Control Unit BCU In the GR2000 2S the BCU consists of an RMP a duplexed BCU configuration is not available In the GR2000 4S the BCU consists of the RM a duplexed BCU configuration is not available In the GR2000 6H GR2000 10H and GR2000 20H the BCU consists of the RM and the CSW a duplexed BCU configuration option is available and is independent of the duplexed power supply configuration The BCU also contains the default memory on the RM flash memory cards and software Ease of operation and maintenance is achieved by the hot swapping capability of components On GR2000 2S the NIF is hot swappable when more than one NIF is installed on GR2000 4S and GR2000 4 the NIF and the POW are hot swappable when more than one NIF is installed or when the power supply is duplexed On the rest of the models the BCU RP NIF and POW are hot swappable when the BCU is duplexed more than one RP is installed more than one NIF is installed or
250. red e Make sure that the inner core fibers are duly protected from mechanical stresses e g repeated bends stretches compressions and rubs during the routing work and environmental stresses All the LAN interface cables are customer responsibilities Depending on the type LAN and the distance as shown in Figure 3 82 and Table 3 95 an appropriate LA interface cable needs to be procured er eege Teaser H Un NE100 8TA i deer NE100 8TB i O 17 SST NE100 4F Device Co HI q Keep 7 NE100 4FS St ene NE100 4FS4 EA NE1G 1S NE1G 1SA NE1G 1SBNE1G 4C H O Device BGIC SX NE1G 1L LI NE1G 1LA i NE1G 1LHA _ See NE1G 1LHA8H E a evice CAT 5 cable is required A UTP Category 3 CAT 3 cable is applicable when connecting only to the 1OBASE T port at 10 Mbps Figure 3 83 shows the cable specifications Table 3 96 Pin arrangement on the device side 10OMBASE 100MBASE interface Pin No Specifications Transmit Transmit Receive Unused Unused Receive Unused Unused Note Because of being a twisted pair cable make pairs of A and a B and b C and c and D and d using the above pin assignment For pins other than these do not care about the pairing either unconnected or connected can be accepted
251. ress designated as the destination In addition because the duplicated address detection is not completed for a few seconds immediately after the interface start up a response may similarly be returned from another IPv6 address However the operation returns to normal a soon as the duplicated address detection has been completed hence causing no problem IPv6 function that can be used at IPv6 relaying software processing This device performs the IPv6 relaying software processing or the IPv6 relaying hardware processing depending on the type of mounted RP At the IPv6 relaying software processing the usable IPv6 function is limited when compared to the IP relaying hardware processing If all the IPv6 functions in this device are used it recommended to mount an RP so that the IPv6 relaying software processing is performed Table 30 31 List of IPv6 function supports by software processing sho Functional item Detailed item TCP IP communication IPv6 unicast forwarding function IPv6 unicast routing Static RIPng OSPFv3 BGP4 Export Import Aggregate Packet filtering function Note 1 Line type 10 100M Ethernet Giga Bit Ethernet PPP over IPv6 ATM over IPv6 Note 2 Tunnel function IPv6 over IPv4 configured tunnel Note 3 IPv6 over IPv6 configured tunnel Note 3 etwork management SNMP IPv6 MIB function ICMPv6 MIB TCP MIB for IPv6 UDP MIB for IPv6 4 10 1
252. ront Panel View Switch and LED indication Table 3 64 NWOC12 4S NWOC12 4M switch and function of LED indications LED Color Content STATUS LED Green Shows the operating Green Operable operation Yellow Red condition of NIF Yellow Blocking and the board replaceable state The NWOC48 1S NWOC48 1S4 and NWOC48 1S8 physically appear as Figure 3 46 These NIFs each have one port for connection with a pair of SC 2 core optica fiber connectors transmit and receive Table 3 67 shows the connector specifications or NWOC48 184 or NWOC48 1S8 POS 0C 48C STM 16 gt FACILIT LOOPBAC O NWOC48 1S Figure 3 46 NWOC48 1S NWOC48 1S4 and NWOC48 1S8 Front Panel View Switch and LED indication Connector Specifications NWOC48 1S SC 2 core flat connector single mode fiber NWOC48 1S4 SC 2 core flat connector single mode fiber NWOC48 1S8 SC 2 core flat connector single mode fiber 3 5 21 NWOC48 1A NWOC48 1A4 and NWOC48 1A8 The NWOC48 1A NWOC48 1A4 and NWOC48 1A8 physically appear as Figure 3 47 o r NW OC48 1A8 r o POS OC 48C STM 16 NWOC48 1A LOOPBACK S O OOOO H FACILITY indication Status Green Yellow Extinguished No APS O APS steady Working being selected O state Protection being selected O APS Working being selected O switching Protection being selected O over Lamp tested O Table 3 70 Connector Specificat
253. s 4096 or less 256 or less 2 048 or less MPLS protocol mode Common to both modes Function item Number of VPNs accommodated per edge router Detailed item When any of BCU H850 BCU M850H BCU L850 are used and software after Ver 06 03 is used Support 2 559 as maximum When BCUs other than those stated in Item 1 are used or software before Ver 06 02 is used 255 as maximum LDP DU MPLS net size Number of LSRs per MPLS net 2 000 as maximum Number of LDP sessions Number of LDP sessions per device number of adjacent MPLS router Refer to Table 3 39 The relationship among BCU mounted memory amount number of LDP sessions and number of routes only for LDP DU mode Number of BGP4 routes of non VPN Per device 6 000 as maximum Number of VPN routes Number of VPN routes per device 120 000 as maximum Value designation 1 10 000 000 Name character string designation Alphanumerics within 14 letters mode VPN ID Ver 06 00 1 255 Ver 06 01 1 10 000 000 Not permitted 1 a lt 2 000 a b c gt 4 000 a Number of LSPs to be Ingress b Number of LSPs to be Core and c Number of LSPs to be Egress 2 Maximum of 255 before Ver 05 02 3 If ATM is used as a backbone line the number of LDP sessions is one per VP Therefore the number of LDP sessions depends on the max
254. s Detach the cover from the input unit and connect each terminal wire of the in power cable firmly to the terminal board and the ground See Figure 6 60 for dimensions of the terminal board and the terminal wire When the power sup is duplexed repeat the connection work in two positions Fix the input power cable with the cable clamp When the power supply is duplexed repeat the fixation in two positions Then attach the cover back to input unit Unit mm Figure 6 60 Terminal Board Wire Dimensions for DC Input to GR2000 20 6 4 3 Connection of Interface Cables This subsection depicts how to connect interface cables to the own router assuming that such cables are already routed Make sure that the general rules for cabling in Subsection 6 4 1 are satisfied or 1OOOBASE LH cable connector SC 2 core to the mating receptacle on the own router When connecting push until a click SC 2 core When removing just pull Figure 6 62 Connection of 100BASE FX 1000BASE SX 1000BASE LX or 1000BASE Cable Connector SC 2 core 6 4 3 3 WAN V 24 V 35 and X 21 RJ 48 to the mating receptacle on the own router 8 pin modular connector Ensure the same interface type between the connector and the receptacle prior to physical connection A mismatch may cause malfunction or a failure Caution 10BASE T 100BASE TX WAN BRI PRI and 25Mbps ATM all use the same pin modular RJ 45 IS8877 or RJ 48 connect
255. s PAD and Trailer 42 bytes 96 bytes the defined VC bandwidth is exceeded GR2000 discards the excessive amount o cells as illustrated in Figure 4 10 At this process called shaping possible loss of 1 with the other device may result if a dynamic routing protocol such as RIP or OS has been used on the subject interface The reason is because the shaping proce discards packets regardless of the packet type thus possibly discarding the cont packet of the routing protocol Shown below is an example of RIP being used as t routing protocol m When 3 minutes or more have passed since the last transmission of the RIP control packet to the other device the route information taking route on the subject interface is deleted from the routing table of that device causing link disconnection with that device Reconstruction of the routing table and recovery of the link will take a maxim of 30 seconds since the shaping process on the own router terminates In order to avoid the above mentioned problem it is recommended to plan the VC bandwidth to withstand a possible rise in traffic Own router the outbound control in units of the ATM service categories CBR UBR etc Pay attention that the Layer 3 QoS available for the LAN or WAN interface such as protocol based QoS and IP address based QoS does not function on the ATM interface RP NIF ATM KM NW ee ES C2 C1 U4 U3 C2 LS Transmission traffic by each service cat
256. s indicator Memory card slot RS 232C t for console Placement of RM IO CSW and NIF Two boards and power supply units CONSOLE amp AUX in case of RMB 10 foTototoroloolofolotorololo o ole EE NIF NIF NIF NIF NIF i 10 12 14 16 18 Terminal block NPUTO AC PS INPUT1 AC Power breaker Figure 2 11 Front View of GR2000 20H with AC Input 2 8 GR2K GA 1002 Rev 6 03 Product Overview FAN3 FAN1 RS 232C connector for AUX None in case of RMB CPU FAN2 Figure 2 12 Rear View of GR2000 20H with AC Input ololol o 10 Jololofolol front Fan 2 power Fan 1 power rear FANS front Fan 4 main Fan 3 main rear FAN1 Upper fan tray DC DC DC DC DC DC DC DC DC DC DC DC 5 4 3 2 1 0 Placement of fans in fan tray top view front Fan 2 power Fan 1 power rear FAN2 Placement of RM CPU and RP boards and power supply units front Fan 4 main Fan 3 main rear FANO Lower fan tray GR2K GA 1002 Rev 6 03 2 9 GR2000 Installation Guide LED status indicator Memory card slot RS 232C connector for console Placement of RM IO CSW andNIF Two J boards and power supply units CONSOLE amp AUX
257. s for adding and removing optional hardware Chapter 9 gives instructions for updating software GR2K GA 1002 Rev 6 03 1 1 GR2000 Installation Guide 1 2 Outline of Installation Process Figure 1 1 outlines the installation process Installation planning e Determine target configuration and necessary components of the product Chapter 2 and Chapter 3 e Ensure precautions in planning installation of the product Chapter 4 e Ensure requirements for the installation site Chapter 5 e Establish the installation plan Hardware installation initial Installation deinstallation of e Unpack and install hardware components Chapter 6 hardware options Connect cables including customer responsibility i e Unpack hardware options interface cables Chapter 6 Chapter 6 e Add or remove hardware options Chapter 8 Hardware setup e Connect the console customer responsibility Chapters 4 and 6 Software update e Start up and set up the device for operation Chapter 7 e Ensure that the device is Started up Chapter 7 i e Update the software components Chapter 9 Figure 1 1 Outline of Installation 1 2 GR2K GA 1002 Rev 6 03 Chapter 2 Product Overview 2 1 Models The GR2000 provides eight models Models GR2000 2S GR2000 4S GR2000 6H and GR2000 10H are new enhanced models The following are descriptions of each model GR2000 2S has two interface s
258. se of LDP DoD CR LDP mode LSP allocation System for each VPN c ccccceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeesueeeseeeeneaeseeeesueeeseensnuaeeeeeeseaeeeensneeeeeeeenes 4 31 RP Minimum Required Memory ccesceeccecseeeeeeeeseseeeeeeseeeneeeeeseseneeseseeeneeseeseeneeesesseeneeseeseeneeeseeneeeenes 4 32 BCU Minimum Required Memory c cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeensneeeeeeeeseeeeeeeesneeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeenes 4 33 RP Minimum Required Memory ccceceeeccecceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeneeseeseseneeseseeeneeseeseeneeeseseeeeeeseeseeneeeseeneeeenss 4 35 Accommodating conditions for the MPLS intrinsic function cccccceeeeeeeeeeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeneees 4 36 The relationship among BCU mounted memory amount number of LDP sessions and number of routes only for LDP DU MOde cecceeeeeeeeeeeee cece eee ee een neneeeeaeee sense ee ee ene eaeeeeaeeeseeeeseeeseeneeeeneeees 4 37 Maximum entry number Of MPLS PpoliCy scccsesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeneesesneeneeseeseseneeseseeeneeseeseeeeeenes 4 38 Maximum Dynamic and Static Entry COuUnt ccccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeneeseeeesneeeseesenneeseeseseeeeseneeennes 4 38 COPS agent accommodating CONAITIONS cceseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeenenseeseeeneeseseeeneeeeeseeeneenes 4 39 IPv6 accommodating conditions and functions provided thereby model GR2000 2S 4 39 IPv6 accommodating conditions and functions provided ther
259. shed by the Free Software Foundation either version 2 or at your option any later version This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE See the GNU General Public License for more details xii GR2K GA 1002 Rev 6 03 You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program if not write to the Free Software Foundation Inc 675 Mass Ave Cambridge MA 02139 USA less Copyright 1984 1985 1989 1994 1995 1996 Mark Nudelman All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
260. sily satisfied by setting up a conductive circuit Oil resistance Oil is used for router maintenance Fire resistance Dust free Acoustic Noise 1 Each model of GR2000 contains one or more cooling fans that generate noise Several measurements at 1 meter from the vertical edge of the device show the following figures a GR2000 2S approximately 49 dB A GR2000 4S approximately 46dB A Water a When cleaning the floor do not wet the router Do not place vases etc on the router Do not let rain wet the router Inan area where flood damage might occur determine an evacuation meth for the router Electromagnetic interference When another high frequency device is used n the router the router might not operate properly due to interference of electri waves generated by the other device Also this router generates a small amou of high frequency electrical waves It might affect a television radio or transceiver with an indoor antenna within 30m Router transport route The router is transported while packaged so make s that the transport route has enough room to accommodate the router s net dimensions plus 300 mm for packaging Animals Ensure that the cables are protected against damage from rodents other animals that could damage them Sprays When spraying pesticides or disinfectants in the router installed site cover the router to ensure that the chemical does not fall directly on it 5 2 1 Inpu
261. state condition of each line LED Yellow Yellow Line section II W fault detection Status Content LED Green Frame signal being received LED Green Frame signal being transmitted LED Green Signal detect operation detected GR2K GA 1002 3 21 Rev 6 03 GR2000 Installation Guide Table 3 20 Connector Specifications for NE1G 1S NE1G 1SA NE1G 1L NE1G 1LA NE1G 1LHA NE1G 1LHA8 NE1G 1SB NE1G 1LB and NE1G 1LHBA Connector Specifications NE1G 1S NE1G 1SA SC 2 core flat connector multimode fiber 850 nm wavelength NE1G 1SB NE1G 1L NE1G 1LA SC 2 core flat connector multimode single mode fiber 1300 nm wavelength NE1G 1LB NE1G 1LHA SC 2 core flat connector multimode single mode fiber 1500 nm wavelength NE1G 1LHA8 NE1G 1LHBA 3 5 4 NWVX 4 The NWVX 4 physically appears as Figure 3 25 This NIF has four ports for V 24 X 21 V 35 connections via half pitched 50 pin connectors on the router side which require specific connector pin assignments for respective interfaces See Table 3 23 Table 3 24 and Table 3 25 for the connector specifications On Ww Ww ZZ 3 LINE ERROO O O OLNE NWVX 4 Figure 3 25 NWVX 4 Front Panel View Switch and LED indication Table 3 21 NWVX 4 switch and function of LED indications LED Color Status Content LED Green Shows the operating Green Operable operation Yellow Red condition of NIF Yellow
262. t Power Requirements The input power supplied to the GR2000 series models must meet the requirements in Table 5 3 for AC input or those in Table 5 4 for DC input Table 5 3 Router Model Input Voltage Input Power Requirements AC Input Frequency Hz GR2000 2S 100 Vac 10 Single 50 60 1 GR2000 4S 100 Vac 10 Single 50 60 1 GR2000 6H 100 Vac 10 Single 50 60 1 GR2000 10H 100 Vac 10 Single 50 60 1 200 Vac 10 Single 50 60 1 GR2000 20H 200 Vac 10 Single 50 60 1 GR2000 4 100 Vac 10 V Single 50 60 1 200 Vac 20 V Single 50 60 1 Waveform Distortion 10 or less Electrical Noise Must not be included 5 2 2 1 100V ac Input GR2000 2S GR2000 4S GR2000 6H GR2000 10H GR2000 4 GR2000 A standard non redundant power feeding diagram with 100V ac input is shown Figure 5 3 Figure 5 4 shows its redundant power feeding counterpart in which c GR2000 2S is not applicable j CB i 100 Vac i PN i single phase d i 50 60 Hz Ground NEMA 5 15 convenienc outlet A standard non redundant power feeding diagram with 200V ac input is shown in Figure 5 5 Figure 5 6 shows its redundant power feeding counterpart in which case GR2000 2S is not applicable 200 Vac single phase 50 60 Hz NEMA 5 15R convenience outlet 100 Vac single phase 50 60 Hz Ground Power distribution panel CB Circuit breaker shown
263. te and connect the two types of cables to be connected to GR2000 i e input power cables and interface cables General Rules for Routing and Connection of Cables Regardless of the kind of cables the following must be observed when you route and connect the cables Protect cables by running them through a duct or by using a braid Especially for optical fiber cables a cord bend radius of at least 100mm in length and 50mm in breadth and a metal braid should be used For an optical fiber cord leave a 3m length of cord for maintenance Wind the rest of the cord and store it near the router If an optical fiber cord and other types of interface cables coexist do not stress the optical fiber cord On a floor installed GR2000 model of medium scale or large scale do not route a cable in such a manner that the cable obstructs the board replacement on the own model Route the cable properly as shown in Figure 6 40 On a rack mounted GR2000 model of small scale through large scale do not route a cable in such a manner that the cable obstructs the board replacement E Cabinet o not route cables like this Cables are bstructing board replacement Route cables in this manner so that th do not obstruct board replacement Secure additional length to facilitate replacement work Figure 6 40 Prohibited vs Preferred Cable Routing on Floor Installed GR2000 Metal fittings supplied as accessories M4 screws supplied as accessories
264. thout specific prior written permission This software is provided as is without express or implied warranty SRR AR AS AR ie Ae 2 Ae Ae AR A Ae 2K Oe RO RR RO RO OR RR RK ORR RR RK KR KE RAK RK ARK RRR EK k k k k k k k k k k kkk Primary Author GR2K GA 1002 Rev 6 03 Steve Waldbusser Additional Contributors Erik Schoenfelder schoenfr ibr cs tu bs de additions fixes and enhancements for Linux by 1994 1995 David Waitzman Reorganization in 1996 Wes Hardaker lt hardaker ece ucdavis edu gt Some bug fixes in his UC Davis CMU SNMP distribution were adopted by David Waitzman David Thaler lt thalerd eecs umich edu gt Some of the code for making the agent embeddable into another application was adopted by David Waitzman Many more over the years BSDI Internet Server BERKELEY SOFTWARE DESIGN INC Copyright 1992 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 Berkeley Software Design Inc This product includes BSDI Internet Server developed by Berkeley Software Design Inc THE REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA All of the documentation and software included in the 4 4BSD and 4 4BSD Lite Releases is copyrighted by The Regents of the University of California Copyright 1979 1980 1983 1986 1988 1989 1991 1992 1993 1994 The Regents of the University of California All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the fol
265. tion GR2K GA 1002 3 25 Rev 6 03 GR2000 Installation Guide ACT LINE ERR WI Line state Being initialized Detail of state Table 3 27 NEW1 8 switch and function of LED indication State as seen by SXMP Being initialized 3 Line state indication in MMI and browser initialize Being operated In normal operation In standby 3 active up Line fault being occurred In operation line fault being occurred 8 active down Line test Line being tested 9 test In fault In fault 4 fault Command being blocked In maintenance 10 closed Not used Configuration definition not set yet Not used Configuration definition not set yet 10 unused Configuration definitions not agreed 1 G Lights in green Y Lights in yellow Goes off 2 Meaning and value of SMNP private MIB and gr2kPhysLineOperStatus 3 The T R LED lights and goes off by H W In lighting conditions this LED lights in green when the logical value of send and receive data is 0 The LED lights in green when lighting conditions are detected irrespective of the line state Configuration definitions not agreed 11 mismatch Gs Note When making connection with the cable having come off repeat cancellation of the LED and lighting up of the ERR or ACT LED to retry the CLOSE OPEN operation of the line
266. tions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement This product includes software developed by the Washington University in Saint Louis and its contributors 4 Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY WASHINGTON UNIVERSITY AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL WASHINGTON UNIVERSITY OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE WILDBOAR Portions or all of this file are Copyright 1994
267. to the BE structure complicated things Los Alamos National Laboratory Copyright 1990 The Regents of the University of California This software was produced under a U S Government contract W 7405 ENG 36 by Los Alamos National Laboratory which is operated by the University of California for the U S Department of Energy The U S Government is licensed to use reproduce and distribute this software Permission is granted to the public to copy and use this software without charge provided that this Notice and any statement of authorship are reproduced on all copies Neither the Government nor the University makes any warranty express or implied or assumes any liability or responsibility for the use of this software traceroute Copyright 1988 1989 1991 1994 1995 1996 The Regents of the University of California All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that 1 source code distributions retain the above copyright notice and this paragraph in its entirety 2 distributions including binary code include the above copyright notice and this paragraph in its entirety in the documentation or other materials provided with the distribution and 3 all advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software display the following acknowledgement This product includes software developed by the University of California Lawrence Berkeley L
268. to the device turn power off and unplug the power cable from the outlet Do not attempt to remove the object while the power is on Do not remove the device s cover while the device is in operation Touching internal parts may cause electric shock Contact a qualified service technician for any internal inspection adjustment or repair Do not modify the device Doing so may cause fire or electric shock Do not insert any foreign objects into the device or the ventilation slots Doing so may cause fire or electric shock Do not insert hands or any other object into a fan Do not allow unauthorized users of the device to pull out boards or power supplies at any time Do not set the GR2000 in a dusty or humid location Doing so may cause fire or electric shock xxviii GR2K GA 1002 Rev 6 03 This router contains a lithium battery for the real time clock Mishandling this battery may cause heat build up damage or in an extreme case explosion or fire Do not remove the battery from the device disassemble it or expose it to temperatures of over 100 C 212 F Do not throw or immerse lithium batteries into water a Dispose of exhausted batteries as required by local regulations Remove dust on and around the device regularly Dust buildup can cause fire or electrical shock and can result in failure of the device The power supply of the GR2000 6H weighs 8 kg Handle with care since it could cause injury if it is droppe
269. tor Specifications for NWOC3C 2M and NWOC3C 2S scccceseeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeesenenseesnenes 3 49 NWOC3C 8S NWOC3C 8M switch and function of LED indications cccccccsssesseeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 50 Connector Specifications for NWOC3C 8S and NWOC3C 8M ccccseeetceceeseeeseeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeeenenes 3 50 NW0C12C 1S NWOC12 1SD switch and function of LED indications eceeeeseeeeeeeees 3 51 Connector Specifications for NWOC1 2C 1S cceccecceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeseeeeeneeeseeeeseeeseeeeseeeeeeeseenenes 3 51 NWOC12 4S NWOC12 4M switch and function of LED indications sssseeeeessseeeresseeeeees 3 52 Connector Specifications for NWOC12 4S and NWOC1 2 4 ccccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeneneeneeeeeeees 3 52 NWOC48 1S NWOC48 1S4 switch and function of LED indications ccccssseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 3 53 Connector Specifications for NWOC48 1S NWOC48 1S4 and NWOC48 1S8 cccssseeereseeerees 3 54 NWOC48 1A NWOC48 1A4 NWOC48 1A8 switch and function of LED indications 3 54 NWOC48 1A NWOC48 1A4 NWOC48 1A8 switch and function of LED indication 3 55 Connector Specifications for NWOC48 1A NWOC48 1A4 and NWOC48 1A8 ceseereseeeeees 3 55 NWOC3 1S NWOC3 1M switch and function of LED indications cccceeseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 56 Connector Specifications for NAOC3 1M and NAOC3I ee EREEEEREEEEREREE
270. tors H Software processing on RP IPX routing is enabled and the traffic is higher than 2500 pps Bridge is enabled and the traffic is higher than 3500 pps IP fragmentation occurs often A lot of packets utilizing IP header option are received and relayed at a tim m Use beyond configuration limits CO ns Fc Discarding of packets due to heavy load SS C47 Iess Output queues packets accumulated QoS control failing packets discarded regardless of priority 4 13 1 4 13 1 1 4 13 1 2 Connection with LAN Switch Pay attention to the following when connecting this router and a LAN switch by Tag VLAN VLAN type The only VLAN that this router supports is Tag VLAN on an IPv4 packet VLAN se a LAN switch should be one of the following VLANs even when the LAN switch th connects this router supports VLAN e g protocol VLAN of IPX other than the Tag VLAN Tag VLAN on IPv4 packets that a LAN switch relays m Tag VLAN on the transmission reception port of a LAN switch Tag VLAN setting This router s setting should coincide with Tag VLAN of the LAN switch connected this router In this router H An interface specified using a vlan option that sets VLAN can send and rece Layer 3 relay LAN switch definition LAN switch RE of this router ARP static configuration definition Network pu lt a No tag Tag Figure 4 21 Network Configuration
271. tribute of configuration definition data in WAN 6Mbit s or less excluding ISDN and is a mode that is designated by the bandwidth_kbps parameter 4 Remote gateway path entry required for MPLS operation is included in the path entry count In the case of IPv4 multicast use With regard to the number of route entries for IP unicast number of route entries for IP unicast IP muiticast Maximum path entry count PIM DVMRP e Maximum number of entries Ger memor aed by protocols SG intertace SO Interface pe entry entry RIP count count count count OSPF BGP Static 128MB 10 000 10 000 500 Unused Unused Unused Unused 25 or more 5 000 5 000 l 10 000 10 000 DM 10 000 32 or less or less 5 000 64 or less or less 2 500 128 or less or less 10 000 10 000 SM 1 000 31 or less or less 10 000 10 000 10 000 32 or less or less 256MB 250 000 10 000 250 000 1 000 Unused Unused Unused Unused 2 or more 90 000 10 000 90 000 DM 10 000 32 or or less or less Maximum path entry count PIM DVMRP S Maximum number of entries Ge Si memor ATMVCs size i by protocols DI interface S O interface per NIF entry entry RIP BGP Stati count count count count OSPF Halle 1 024MB 500 000 30 000 500 000 DM 5 000 64 or more or less or less Note 8 1 000 000 30
272. ts may not support it Consequently there may be cases when the frping command issued from GR2000 ends in a timeout even the target device is in the reachable status Conditions When Submitting Application Form to Frame Relay Network This information is for Japan only If you need this information contact our sale representative Packet Length If the MTU setting of GR2000 and that of the other end device is different packet be relayed may sometimes be discarded Specifically such discarding of packets occurs on the receiving device whose MTU setting is smaller than that of the transmitting device Make the MTU setting identical For example when you conn GR2000 with Cisco Systems routers set the MTU of GR2000 to 1502 using the max_packet_size option of the dilci command The MTU length used in IP fragment is max_packet_size 2 of a dlci command For the IP fragment see the Application Guide Filling columns in application form Connecting condition Protocol operation of PVC state verification procedure LMI General selection alternative Terminal DTE Net DCE Di directional Designation of application when this device is connected Select optionally from the three kinds given on the left Setting the configuration defining information of this device No setting is required because of default operation When setting explicitly designate dte by using the poll_direction opt
273. tup console to router s RS 232C port with a cross cable having 9 pin D sub female connectors o both ends Figure 6 71 below shows an example with GR2000 10 If the router s B is duplexed then the router has two ports for the setup console connection activ and standby BCU RM duplexed Cross cable with 9 pin D sub female connectors on both ends Table 6 2 Console specifications Item Specifications Communication parameter 8 bits and 1 stop bit without parity Communication speed 19 2 kbps 9600 bps 4800 bps 2100 bps 1200 bps The communication speed varies depending on the port connected to the console When connecting the console to CONSOLE RS232C the communication speed can be selected from the above table The standard speed is 9600bps The communication speed when the console is connected to AUX is 9600bps The cable to connect the console with this devices is the RS 232C cross cable The connector on this device side is the D SUB CON female of 9 pins Starting Setting Up and Stoppin 7 1 Overview of Device Operation Figure 7 1 provides a sequence of operating this device Initial installation Yes Starting the own router is performed by turning on the power switch or the power breaker on each router chassis See Subsection 6 4 2 for the locations and in out positions of these power switches and breaker switches Pay attention to t
274. ty LTCS Label Traffic Control System Copyright 1999 Harris and Jefferies Inc All rights reserved Copyright 2000 NetPlane Systems Inc All rights reserved KAME IPv6 STACK Copyright 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 and 2000 WIDE Project All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 Neither the name of the project nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE PROJECT AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE PROJECT OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND
275. unction of LED indications Name of switch and LED LED Green Shows the operating Green Operable operation Yellow Red condition of RP Yellow Blocking and cock insertion and removal possible Green blinking Under preparation being started up Red Fault Extinguished Operation not possible Including the device power supply being turned off Status Content LED Green Don t care LED Green Don t care LED Green Don t care GR2K GA 1002 Rev 6 03 Component Details 3 4 2 RP C RP C6 The RP C and RP C6physically appear as Figure 3 21 The switch LED display functions of the RP C and RP C6 are the same as those of the RP A1 The additional LEDs are for test purposes only o DE Figure 3 21 RP C C6 Front Panel View Switch and LED indication Table 3 14 RP C RP C6 switch and function of LED indications Name of switch and LED LED Green Shows the operating Green Operable operation Yellow Red condition of RP Yellow Blocking and cock insertion and removal possible Green blinking Under preparation being started up Red Fault Extinguished Operation not possible Including the device power supply being turned off Don t care Status Content Don t care Don t care Don t care Don t care Don t care GR2K GA 1002 3 17 Rev 6 03 GR2000 Installation Guide 3 5 Network Interface Module NIF Various types of N
276. undary with network router s connector Figure 3 98 Single Mode Optical Fiber Cable Specifications for OC 48c STM 16 POS Table 3 104 Optical Interface Specifications for OC 48c STM 16 POS Single Mode Connections Specifications This is SM type quartz fiber optic cable with a core diameter of 8 0um and a clad diameter of 125um The maximum allowable transmission distance between the devices is 80km when a fiber optic cable with a transmission loss of 0 3 dB km wavelength of 1550nm or less is used The boundary for the NWOC48 is the connector on the side of this device A single mode fiber optic cable can be used for connecting with the device A summary diagram is shown in Figure 3 99 below Table 3 105 shows the optical interface specification for NWOC48 0O21 Direct connection between devices do ER d ol F Recommended model name Hitachi Optical Fiber Cable C 2DSF0803 2 D S P 0 2 M 2 core SC connector 2 core SC connector core length in brackets All the ATM interface cables are customer responsibilities Depending on the type ATM and the distance as shown in Figure 3 100 and Table 3 106 an appropriate ATM interface cable needs to be procured Router NAOC3 1M H ry Device DSU ONU NAOc3 IMH H Box Lo l aee NAOC3 1S H g Device DSU ONU Naocs 1s H HB NA25M 1 H g ONU
277. used as timestam for events in the log information and creation of files Before you start product use of the router set the date and time to correct values using date command see GR2000 Operations Guide 8 1 Adding and Removing Component The user s own addition and removal of components is available on this router basically while the router power is off In addition under certain conditions components can be added and removed while the router power is on This hot swapping capability and its procedures for applicable components are descri in the last section in this chapter The other sections in this chapter illustrate addition removal procedures for components assuming that the router power is BCU RP and NIF Modules To add or remove the BCU RM CPU RM IO and CSW if applicable RP and NIF Guide rail e 7 Ze Be Anchor screw gt S To add or remove the power supply components to from each model of GR2000 ot than GR2000 2S refer to the following subsections Note The power supply module of GR2000 2S cannot be added or removed by the user because they are integral to chassis When addition or removal of such a module is necessitated on GR2000 2S entrust work to trained service personnel Note For models other than GR2000 2S certain power supply components cannot be added or removed by the user For power supply components not described in this section entrust work to trained servic
278. via DSU ONU Device DSU ONU ATM Service DSU ONU Device GR2K GA 1002 2 45 Rev 6 03 GR2000 Installation Guide This page left intentionally blank 2 46 GR2K GA 1002 Rev 6 03 Chapter 3 Component Details 3 1 Cabinet Chassis Table 3 1 shows the installed dimensions and the mass of each GR2000 cabinet model The mass assumes the case when each cabinet model is installed with full options maximum configuration This table also refers to the minimum service clearance for maintaining or installing each cabinet model differentiated by the type of installation e g desktop floor and rack mount Figure 3 1 illustrates the minimum service clearance for desktop or floor installation while Figure 3 2 illustrates the same for rack mount installation common among cabinet models See Section Subsection 2 2 for the external images of these cabinet models Table 3 1 Installed Dimensions Masses and Minimum Service Clearances Cabinet Model Approx Dimensions mm Approx Type of Installation and Minimum Service Height Width Depth Mass kg Clearance GR2000 2S Desktop See Figure 3 1 Rack mount See Figure 3 2 GR2000 4S Desktop See Figure 3 1 Rack mount See Figure 3 2 GR2000 6H Desktop See Figure 3 1 Rack mount See Figure 3 2 GR2000 10H Floor See Figure 3 1 Rack mount See Figure 3 2 GR2000 20H Floor See Figure 3 1 Rack mount See Figure 3 2 GR2000 4 Desktop See Figure 3 1 Rac
279. warranties of any kind I shall in no event be liable for anything that happens to anyone anything when using this software CHRISTOPHER G DEMETRIOU Copyright 1993 1994 Christopher G Demetriou All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement This product includes software developed by Christopher G Demetriou 4 The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA
280. wavelength 1300 nm 1 port VRRP supported full NE1G 1LB 1000BASE LX short wavelength 1300nm 1 full port VRRP MPLS VLAN band control supported NE1G 1LHA 1000BASE LH long wavelength 1500 nm 1 port full NE1G 1LHA8 1000BASE LH8 long wavelength 1500 nm 1 port 80 km supported full NE1G 1LHBA 1000BASE LH long wavelength 1500nm 1port 100km full VRRP MPLS VLAN band control supported NE1G 4C 1000BASE SX 1000BASE LX 1000BASE LH full 4ports GBIC supported VRRP MPLS VLAN band control supported WAN NWVX 4 V24 up to 64 k V35 up to 6 M X21 up to 6 M synchronization serial half 4 ports NWVX 8 V24 up to 64 k V35 up to 2 M X21 up to 2 M synchronization serial half 8 ports NWJB 8 Basic interface 64 128k 8 ports leased line ISDN half NWMxX1 4 High speed digital 1 5M 2 ports plus Basic interface 64 128k 2 ports half leased line ISDN NWJ1 4U High speed digital 1 5M 4 ports leased line ISDN half NWJ1 8U High speed digital 1 5M 8 ports leased line ISDN half NWT1 4 High speed digital 1 5M 4 ports North America half NWE1 4 High speed digital 2M 4 ports Europe Asia half NWE1 8 High speed digital 2M 8 ports MPLS supported half NWJ2 1U High speed digital 6M 1 port half NWT3 2U High speed digital non multiplex 45M 2 ports half 2 34 GR2K GA 1002 Rev 6 03 Product Overview Table 2 5 List of NIF
281. xtinguished Occurrence of partial fault is not detected Including the device power supply being turned off ALARM LED Red Shows Red Partial fault has occurred in the device occurrence of fault Extinguished Operation possible Including the device in the device power supply being turned off POST DISP LED Green Shows the state Green Shows the state that STATUS CODE 7 seg is that STATUS indicating the initial diagnosis code of RM CPU CODE is Extinguished Shows that STATUS CODE 7 seg is indicating the indicating the contents of FAULT CODE Including the initial diagnosis device power supply being turned off code of RM CPU STATUS CODE 7 seg for 7 seg Decimal Green Indicates the device state code for 00 99 Code indicating the and two digits contents differ by lighting of POST DISP LED device Extinguished Non indication Including the device power condition supply being turned off ACCESSO LED Green Shows the state of Blinking MC card zero being accessed Memory card MC card being take out is prohibited zero Extinguished MC card zero being idle Memory card may be put in or taken out ACCESS 1 LED Green Shows the state of Blinking MC card one being accessed Memory card MC card being take out is prohibited one Extinguished MC card one being idle Memory card may be put in or taken out STATUS RP LED Green Shows the Green Operable operation Yellow Red operating Yellow Blocked cond
282. y Break down ad N 9 Sd Break down ad enter size by protocol No of static by protocol No of jacent face Note ae static mes entries gel BGP static router 1 entries routers routers entries OSPF BGP RIPng Ce s 128 10 000 10 000 5000or 64 or 0 0 2 000 1 000 1 000 64 or 32 or MB or or less less less or less or less orless less less more 2 000 2 000 5000r 64o0r 500o0r 320r 2 000 1 000 1 000 64 or 32 or or less less less less less or less or less or less less less 256MB 90 000 10 000 80 000 1 000 256 or 5 000 8or 25 000 1 000 25 000 1 000 256 or 32 or or less orless less jorless less orless orless orless orless less less Note 2 Note 4 Note 5 Note 6 Note 11 Note 3 Note 4 Note 5 Routing processor IPv6 unicast IPv6 multicast IPv4 unicast IPv4 multicast No of ATM module RP path entry count path entry count path entry count path entry count VCs per NIF memory 32MB or more 25 000 or less 1 000 or less 10 000 or less 1 000 or less 256 or less 96MB or more 25 000 or less 90 000 or less 5 000 or less 2 048 or less Remarks Note 1 Note 1 Note2 Note3 Note 1 Memory must be extended for all RPs implemented in a router Note 2 Memory must be extended so that only the corresponding RP can obtain the minimum required memory The memory required differs for each RP Note 3 For the accomm

Hitachi GR2000 User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents